Home

Administration Guide

1. Enabled None View Update Create Delete Control PTZ Cameras Yes Enable Disable Yes Digital Input Monitoring Enable Disable Yes Logical Input Monitoring Monitors Purge Alarms Yes Acknowledge Remove Yes Alarms View Live Video Yes View Recorded Video Yes Setup Operators Yes Yes Yes Yes Contexts Yes Yes Yes Yes System Permissions Yes Yes Yes Yes Facility Permissions Yes Yes Yes Yes Facilities Yes Yes Yes Yes Facility Commander Yes Yes Yes Yes Servers Workstations Yes Yes Yes Yes Access Control Systems Yes Yes Yes Yes Devices Access Points Yes Yes Yes Yes Digital Inputs Yes Yes Yes Yes Logical Inputs Yes Yes Yes Yes Digital Inputs Yes Yes Yes Yes Digital Video Recorders Yes Yes Yes Yes Cameras _ Yes Yes Yes Yes Intercom Exchanges Yes Yes Yes Yes Page 442 Facility Commander Administration Guide Appendix D Facility Permissions Table 149 All Facility Permissions Enabled None View Update Create Delete Intercom Stations Yes Yes Yes Yes Analog Video Switcher Yes Yes Yes Yes Intrusion Panels Yes Yes Yes Yes Intrusion Areas Yes Yes Yes Yes Intrusion Inputs Yes Yes Yes Yes Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 443 Appendix D Facility Permissions Entry Level Guard Facility Permissions Table 150 Entry Level Guard Facility Permi
2. Sea Event Type Condition Subsystems Action Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter AP 200101 NY Door Forced a B COMPUTER Alarm _ _JROOM__ AP 200200 ses OutputDestination NY Door Forced Activate A lcsnppING alarm EGE emna a a t DOCK 2S E AP 200200 NY Door Forced i Video Destination NY Cam A lSHppne alarm bes Digital Video F agging 100 DOCK AP 200300 Access Destination AP lB Ny Losey poor Forced set Control Lock 200101 NY WEST Manager COMPUTER ROOM AP 200300 A SF Door Forced i Video Destination NY Cam hi M Loney arm Set Digital video Tagging 100 DYR Email Subject Bii NY B1 DYR Communications Set Mail Man The Header DVR Alarm To Frank Pra DVR Alarm Vincent 5 Alarm Event in NY B1 ae NY Lobby Intercom Master Set Intercom Dial OriginatingStationId DigitsToDial Bldg 1 Call Connected Manager Digits NY Lobby Bldg 1 6156 Figure 124 Event Action Mappings page When a record is changed such as changing the tag name the event source name is automatically updated to reflect the new tag name Also if an event source is deleted the event action mapping record is also deleted Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 181 Chapter 8 Event Action Mapping Tagging Vid eo Events for Access Points gt To tag a video event when an alarm occurs follow these steps 1 2 Select Device Management and then Event Action Mappings The Event A
3. Event Type Access Control System Comm Failure Analog Switcher Ofline Door Forced Alarm Door Held Alarm Door Prealarm DYR Communications Alarm Input Alarm Intercom Exchange Comm Failure Alarm Intercom Exchange Reset Alarm Intercom Exchange Reset Alarm Event Intercom Master Busy Intercom Master Call Answered Intercom Master Call Connected Intercom Master Call Ringing Intercom Master Call To Busy Intercom Master Call To Private Intercom Master Disconnected Intercom Master Reset Intercom Substation Busy Intercom Substation Call Answered Intercom Substation Call Button Alarm Intercom Substation Call Button Event Intercom Substation Call Connected Intercom Substation Call Ringing Intercom Substation Call To Busy Intercom Substation Call To Private Intercom Substation Disconnected Intercom Substation Reset Intrusion Area Alarm Event Intrusion Area Armed Intrusion Area Auto Armed Intrusion Area Auto Disarmed Intrusion Area Disarmed Intrusion Area Disarmed During Intrusion Area Failed To A Intrusion Area State soda nsndsaencenssssosoeecsesesacses Figure 143 Event Type Filter 2 Select the check boxes to indicate the event types you want to display on the Event Monitor A check mark indicates the event type is selected Refer to Table 86 on page 228 for a complete list of event types Clear the check boxes to remove the event types from view 3 Click OK Facility Commander Administration Guide
4. Instructions Choose from the available entries and click Synchronize AP 200100 NY LOBBY SOUTH Synchronize Figure 53 Synchronize page 3 Select the records that have changed on the Picture Perfect system that should be synchronized with Facility Commander 4 Click Synchronize Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 79 Chapter 4 Importing Records Digital Inputs and Outputs An input also called a digital input DI or alarm input is a physical sensing device used to monitor an electronic contact connected to a micro controller There are three basic types of digital inputs e Door sensors which monitor the door state e Exit requests which provide access to leave without presenting a badge Devices which monitor items such as heat and moisture An output also called a digital output DO is a physical device that controls door hardware or annunciates an alarm Outputs can also be used to turn lights heaters or air conditioners on and off using a schedule Use the Picture Perfect system to configure Inputs Outputs Input Groups and Output Groups Refer to the Picture Perfect Administration Guide for more information Refer to the following sections for more information e Importing Digital Inputs on page 81 Importing Logical Inputs on page 87 e Importing Digital Outputs on page 92 Viewing Digital Inputs Use the Digital Inputs page to view import copy delete and synchroniz
5. View alarms in colors you select e Launch the Video Console to view live and recorded video e Launch the Graphics Display to view the alarm point on a graphic display issue commands to lock and unlock doors and more e Acknowledge an alarm with a text message or use a predefined message If configured to do so the Alarm Monitor window displays indicators representing video clips and site maps associated with the alarm event The Alarm Monitor displays incoming alarms with indicators priority operator time alarm description location alarm state input state processing state and count A status bar displays the number of total alarms unacknowledged alarms and the highest priority The status bar also displays a server connection icon to monitor connection to the Facility Commander server Automatically Launch Video Console by Alarm Priority In addition you can configure Facility Commander to automatically launch a Video Console when an alarm event occurs with associated video Each time an alarm event occurs within the specified priority range the Video Console launches and displays both live video and the recorded video clip of the event To configure e Use the Configure System Parameters page to identify the priority range which determines when the Video Console launches automatically Refer to System Parameters on page 50 for more information The priority range is from 1 to 500 Every alarm in the speci
6. cccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeseeeeeaees 38 Adding an Access Control System ccceeecieeeeeteeteeeeeeeteeeeeneeens 39 Workstations icc cascscetcccougshedecteecved sta eadvbvasecdisdsaercenenebel REESE 45 Configuring the Alarm Alert Window 0 ccccecceeeseeeeeteeeeeteeeeeees 45 Launching the Video Console Automatically ccceeeeeeeees 45 Intercom Stations ci 4 aeiiivieit lace eevee 45 Viewing Defined Workstations ceeccccceeeeeeteeeeeeeeteeeeeeenaeeeeneeea 46 Adding a Workstation seereis 47 System Parameters cccceceeecceceeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeesaaeeseeeeesenaeeeea 50 Launch Video Console by Alarm Priority cccseeesseseseeeeneees 50 Require an Alarm Response ccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeaeeeeeneaaaes 50 Configure Video Pre Play Time ccccceceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaes 50 Configuring System Parameters cccccceseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseteeeeeees 51 System SHNUTKOWN 2 0 0 eeeccecceeceeceeeeeeeeeecceseeaeeeeeaaeseqeaaesnaaeseeaaaeseeaees 53 Shutdown Notification to Client Applications s e 53 Shutdown Notification to Browser Configuration Clients 53 Shutting Down the System cccceesccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeeaes 53 Chapter 4 Importing RecordS ccsssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 55 OV GIVIOW oc doe viceicdvecdasact devas svabedepiestensetens E pelea snetedeate 56 Tag Names Descriptions and
7. Field Name REQ Description Tag Name Y Enter a unique name to identify this item Use 2 36 characters Description Enter a description for this item Use 1 100 characters The description does not have to be unique Page 272 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices General Tab Alarms Facility Mtrusion Panel ATS Panel x Area Number 200 Figure 180 Configure Intrusion Area General tab 5 Enter the information described in Table 114 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 114 Configure Intrusion Area fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Intrusion Panel f Use the drop down list to select the intrusion panel associated with this intrusion area Area Number Y Enter a number from 1 to 256 that corresponds to the area number configured in the intrusion panel Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 273 Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Alarms Tab Intrusion Area Failed To Md Intrusion Area State Armed and In Alarm Figure 181 Configure Intrusion Area Alarms tab 6 Enter the information described in Table 115 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 115 Configure Intrusion Area fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Intrusion Area Use the drop down
8. gt To enable SSL communication follow these steps 1 Select System Administration and Access Control Systems The Access Control Systems page displays 2 Select the Picture Perfect system to edit The Configure Access Control System page displays 3 Select the Advanced tab 4 Select the Enable Encryption with Access Control System check box 5 Click Submit 6 Restart the Picture Perfect system which will allow the Picture Perfect system to communicate with Facility Commander using SSL encryption Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 399 Chapter 19 Advanced Configuration Page 400 Facility Commander Administration Guide Appendix A Edit Configuration Files for Informix Backup to Disk Appendix A Edit Configuration Files for Informix Backup to Disk This section describes the steps needed to modify the configuration files which allows you to backup the database to a disk file Read Backup Restore Informix Databases on page 349 before proceeding Once you edit these files to change the output to disk the backup utility will not write to tape because the output destination has been changed from tape to disk For instructions refer to the following sections e Editing the Informix Configuration File on page 403 e Scheduling the Backup Utility on page 404 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 401 Appendix A Edit Configuration Files for Informix Backup to Disk Configuration Files
9. Adding Intrusion Areas on page 272 Viewing Intrusion Areas gt To view the intrusion area records follow these steps 1 Select Device Management 2 Select Intrusion Areas The Intrusion Areas page as shown in Figure 178 displays Intrusion Areas Instructions View edit add or delete intrusion areas 4Page 1 of i gt Go to Go Items per Page fio H Tag Name Description Intrusion Panel Area Number T E o comer tat OO C Figure 178 Intrusion Areas page Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 271 Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Adding Intrusion Areas gt To add an intrusion area follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then Intrusion Areas The Intrusion Areas page displays 2 Click Add Intrusion Area and the Configure Intrusion Area page as shown in Figure 179 displays Configure Intrusion Area Instructions View or edit the intrusion area Intrusion Area Information Tag Name INY Cornputer Lab Description pee o ooo ao Reference ID General Alarms Facility Intrusion Panel ATS Panel x Area Number 200 Submit Cancel Figure 179 Configure Intrusion Area page 3 Enter the information described in Table 113 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages 4 Click Submit to save the record Table 113 Configure Intrusion Area fields and descriptions
10. Information Bar Window Filter Preferences Event Action Mappings Access Paints Digital Inputs Logical Inputs Digital Outputs Intercom Stations Intercom Exchanges Cameras Digital Video Recorders Alarm Profiles Alarm Instructions Analog Video Switchers CCTY Monitors Intrusion Panels Intrusion DGPs Intrusion Keypads Intrusion Areas Intrusion Inputs Intrusion Outputs Current user Default System Account Version 2 2 0 108254 tc03 2009 02 06 10 15 24 Logout Device Management Browser Menu List Page When you select any item from the Browser Menu the list page displays The list page in Figure 7 shows all the defined records and is sorted in alphabetical order The list page allows you to view copy or delete records h aes Online Help Page Name Page Display Options Instructions Import synchronize view edit or delete access points Page f1 Go to Go Items per Page 50 v PPSim Import Synchronize fh i AP 169 1 0 DOOR 1 AP 169 1 0 DOOR 1 PPSim Icons Links lx Figure 7 Browser Interface List Page Table 4 on page 16 lists and describes the elements of the List Web page Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 15 Chapter 2 Getting Started Page 16 Table 4 Web interface elements and descriptions Element Description Information Bar e Displays the operator s name that is c
11. Page 104 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 5 Assigning Permissions and Context Control Tab controis Monitors Setup Devices Facility Permission Enabled Lock Unlock Access Points B Activate Reset Digital Outputs B Control PTZ Cameras Ci Enable Disable Digital Input Monitoring L r Enable Disable Logical Input Monitoring Figure 75 Facility Permissions Controls tab 5 Select the Control tab shown in Figure 75 to choose one or more check boxes granting permissions A check mark indicates the permission is enabled Enabling the Control PTZ Cameras permission also grants View Live Video permissions to be enabled If the View Live Video permission is not enabled the Control PTZ Cameras permission is also not enabled Monitors Tab Controls monitors Setup Devices Facility Permission Enabled Purge Alarms r Acknowledge Remove Alarms B view Live Video C view Recorded Video r Figure 76 Facility Permissions Monitors tab 6 Select the Monitors tab shown in Figure 76 to choose one or more check boxes granting permissions A check mark indicates the permission is enabled Enabling the View Live Video permission also grants Control PTZ Cameras permission to be enabled If the View Live Video permission is not enabled the View Live Video permission is also not enabled Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 105 Chapter 5 Assigning Permissions and Context
12. a Intercom Master Busy Intercom Master Call Answered Intercom Master Call Connected Intercom Master Call Ringing Intercom Master Call To Busy Intercom Master Call To Private Intercom Master Disconnected Intercom Master Reset Figure 159 Example Intercom Master Station Symbol Scheme Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 247 Chapter 12 Configuring Intercom Devices Intercom Substation Symbol Scheme Figure 160 shows a symbol scheme for an Intercom Substation Symbol Editor Oo ta x 2 a Intercom Substation Busy Intercom Substation Call Answered Intercom Substation Call Button Al Intercom Substation Call Button Al Intercom Substation Call Button E Intercom Substation Call Connect Set Intercom Substation Call Ringing Intercom Substation Call To Busy Set Intercom Substation Call To Private Set Intercom Substation Disconnected Set Intercom Substation Reset Figure 160 Example Intercom Substation Symbol Scheme Page 248 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices This chapter describes how to configure intrusion panels intrusion areas and intrusion inputs Instructions to connect the RS 232 cable are included as well as the parameters to configure the device server Readers should know how the current intrusion panel is configured The Facility Commander confi
13. e Red indicates the Graphics Editor is no longer communicating with the server Page 304 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays Drawing Tools The Graphics Editor provides drawing tools to create site maps or other graphic displays gt To use the drawing tools follow these steps 1 Select the appropriate icon You must select a tool each time before moving to the drawing area 2 Position the mouse where you want to begin drawing Follow the instructions listed in Table 129 to use the tools Table 129 lists and describes the Graphics Editor drawing tools Table 129 Drawing tools description Tool Description Rectangle c Circle T E Polyline R Use to draw a rectangle or a square e To create a rectangle use the mouse to click and drag to reach the correct size To create a square click and hold the Shift key while dragging the mouse Use to draw a circle or an ellipse e To draw a circle click and hold the Shift key while dragging the mouse e To draw an ellipse click and drag the mouse to reach the correct size Use to draw a horizontal vertical or diagonal line Click to begin the line and drag the mouse to the correct location to end the line Use to create a free form shape e Click in the drawing area and begin to move mouse to create the shape When one side is complete left click to change direction e When fini
14. Table 144 Configuration files and default values Configuration File General Backup File Name and Parameters Edit the Facility Commander Backup Utility configuration file to change the parameters which include the location of log files and the number of log files retained For each parameter listed below uncomment remove the sign the command to enable the value assignment File etc BackupUtility config e Use to identify the location of log files This parameter may changed depending on operating system disk space and more Parameter LOG_DIR Default value var log BackupUtility e Use to identify the tape device used for file backups This is the default setting Parameter BACKUP_DEVICE Default value dev tape New value dev disk e Use to identify the directory where backup files are stored This is the default setting e Use to minimize the number of log files This parameter minimizes the impact on free space on the partition containing the file backup logs The backup utility retains a limited number of each log file type full or Incremental The default value can be scaled up or down to balance more history or more free space Parameter BACKUP_DEVICE Default value bud Parameter NUMBER_OF_LOGS_RETAINED Default value 7 Database Backup Refer to Editing the Informix Configuration File on page 403 Edit the Informix configuration file when you want to back
15. Alarm requires response The alarm requires response Enter the response text into information text before it can be removed the response text window 00104 Other field values are Review all the fields marked inconsistent with this value The operator entered values for other fields that are inconsistent with the value for this field The other fields will be flagged with their own error indicators and those error messages will indicate the type of inconsistency with an error indicator and determine a consistent set of values for those fields After making the changes click the Submit button to save the data Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 437 Appendix C Error Messages Table 148 List of error numbers messages causes and actions Continued Message Causes Actions 00105 Tag name may be in use or The tag name entered forthe Enter a different tag name invalid Please specify a graphic display is not valid and click Upload to save the different tag name The tag name may bein use graphic display Tag names by another item or may betoo must be atleast two long characters 00106 Switcher configuration file An error occurred when Verify that the model of the syntax error or model type attempting to read the switcher record you are incorrect information in the specified attempting to import the data analog switcher configuration for matches the model in the file The syntax of the file may
16. Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 14 Creating Symbol Schemes e Graphics Viewer provides a graphical view of the premises and allows an operator to locate alarm events as they occur such as doors and cameras Operators can issue commands and launch applications such as locking and unlocking doors and viewing video Refer to Viewing Graphic Displays on page 333 for more information Using the Symbol Editor Use the Symbol Editor shown in Figure 192 to associate symbols with device types such as cameras door access points and more The symbols represent the state condition such as set and reset for each device type and condition This collection of symbols and specific attributes represents a symbol scheme To define a scheme select a device type and assign a symbol to each state condition To create customized symbols graphics in several formats are supported including GIF and JPG The recommended graphic size is 32 x 32 pixels Once a scheme is created use the Upload button to copy the scheme to the Facility Commander server Once the scheme is copied to the server the scheme is ready to use with the Graphics Editor and is also available to other users The symbol schemes are used with the Graphics Editor to create display maps Refer to Using the Graphics Editor on page 301 for more information gt To open the Symbol Editor follow these steps 1 From the Facility Commander Launcher window sel
17. Intrusion Area Y Use the drop down list to select the intrusion area associated with this intrusion inputs This number must match the area configured for this input Input Number Y Enter the input number that to represent this intrusion inputs Page 278 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Alarms Tab Intrusion Input Alarm Ad Intrusion Input Bypassed Alarm Intrusion Input Fault Alarm Ad Intrusion Input Tamper Alarm z Figure 186 Configure Intrusion Inputs Alarms tab 6 Enter the information described in Table 119 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 119 Configure Intrusion Inputs fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Intrusion Input Use the drop down list to select the appropriate alarm Alarm profile to use when the input is in an alarm state This is the generated alarm Intrusion Input Use the drop down list to select the appropriate alarm Bypassed Alarm profile to use when the input is bypassed This is the generated alarm Intrusion Input Use the drop down list to select the appropriate alarm Fault Alarm profile to use when the input is a fault state This is the generated alarm Intrusion Input Use the drop down list to select the appropriate alarm Tamper Alarm profile to use when tampering with the intrusion input has occurred This is the generated
18. gt To view access points follow these steps 1 Select Device Management 2 Select Access Points The Access Points list page as shown in Figure 48 displays Instructions Import synchronize view edit or delete access points 4Page1ofib Go to Go Items per Page 30 z Tag Name Description Reference ID External System Ts Bl AP 200101 NY COMPUTER ROOM AP 200101 NY COMPUTER ROOM pictureofjamie te AP 200200 NY SHIPPING DOCK fa 200200 NY SHIPPING DOCK pictureofjamie fe B AP 200301 NY CONFERENCE ROOM ar 200301 NY CONFERENCE ROOM pictureofjamie ee AP 200400 NY LIBRARY AP 200400 NY LIBRARY pictureofjamie ele AP 200401 NY TRAINING ROOM AP 200401 NY TRAINING ROOM pictureofjamie int i AP 201100 NY B1 NORTH STAIR ae 201100 NY B1 NORTH STAIR pictureofjamie fy i AP 201201 NY B1 WEST STAIR ap 201201 NY B1 WEST STAIR pictureofjamie i ap 201300 NY B2 ACCOUNTING ar 201300 NY B2 ACCOUNTING pictureofjamie i AP 201401 NY B2 DATA CENTER ae 201401 NY B2 DATA CENTER pictureofjamie Figure 48 Access Points page Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 4 Importing Records Importing Access Points gt To import access points follow these steps 1 Select Device Management 2 Select Access Points The Access Points list page as shown in Figure 48 on page 74 displays 3 Use the Server drop down list to select the Picture Perfect server with the record
19. Always on Top Figure 119 DVR Event Search tab 3 Enter the information described in Table 71 on page 170 to search for a video clip Search criteria includes start date start time end date end time recorder camera and text description Enter multiple values to narrow the search criteria to locate video clips 4 Click Search The number of matches found display in the Results pane Double click the result you want to view and the recorded video displays in the Video Console 5 Click Clear to return to the default settings and remove any matches in the Results pane 6 Click Close when you are finished viewing results Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 169 Chapter 7 Using the Video Console Page 170 Table 71 lists and describes the DVR Event Search tab Table 71 DVR Event Search tab Element Description Start Date To search for a specific day click the Date button to End Date display the Select Date window shown in Figure 119 on page 169 e Use the drop down lists to select the month and year to display the calendar month Click the day of the month to select the Start Date and the End Date Start Time To search for a specific time End Time Type the device time in the Start Time field to begin the search e Type the device time in the End Time field to end the search Use this format HH MM SS Recorder Use the drop down list to identify the DVR device where the video event is
20. Chapter 9 Configuring Alarms Setting Alarm Colors The Facility Commander allows you to define alarm colors based on processing state to display alarm events on the Alarm Monitor Each alarm event appearing on the Alarm Monitor can have a different foreground and background color based on the alarm processing state gt To change the alarm colors follow these steps 1 Select System Administration 2 Select Alarm Colors The Select Alarm Color Scheme list page shown in Figure 129 displays Select Alarm Color Scheme Instructions Select the alarm color scheme Scheme Name Processing State Click to edit alarm colors Figure 129 Select Alarm Color Scheme page 3 Click on the alarm color scheme you wish to edit The Edit Alarm Color Scheme page as shown in Figure 130 displays Edit Alarm Color Scheme Instructions Choose the colors for this scheme Processing State Foreground Color Background Color Active yellow gt fred Bumped oue gt ite sl Notified yelow gt green Remote red 7 yelow z Pending bue z yellow z Completed white z oray Removed black 7 dark gray 7 Purged magenta z orange z Figure 130 Edit Alarm Color Scheme page Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 197 Chapter 9 Configuring Alarms Table 76 lists and describes the items Select Alarm Color Scheme page Table 76 Edit Alarm Color Scheme page
21. Country Name 2 letter code AU US US State or Province Name full name Some State FL FL Locality Name eg city Boca Boca Organization Name eg company Internet Widgits Pty Ltd CASI CASI Organizational Unit Name eg section eng eng Common Name eg your name or your server s hostname pphost pphost Email Address fc casi rusco com casi rusco com Please enter the following extra attributes to be sent with your certificate request A challenge password An optional company name Page 392 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 19 Advanced Configuration Generating Picture Perfect Signed Certificate The following openssl command creates a signed certificate file You will be prompted for the password used in the previous commands openssl req x509 key picture key in picture csr out picture crt Using the configuration from usr share ssl openssl cnf enter PEM pass phrase lt password gt Generating Picture Perfect PEM File The following command creates the PEM file that will be used by the Facility Commander system cat picture key picture crt gt picture pem Updating EIF Event Manager Configuration File The following set of commands uses vi to modify the eifevtmgr cfg file to configure Picture Perfect to use SSL with Facility Commander You should make a copy of the configuration file in case you have to restore the previous version cp eife
22. Global Facility NEW YORK PP GLOBAL test3 West Coast Region ee Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility Sample Region Facility Figure 46 Configure Facilities Parent Facility tab 6 Select the Parent Facility tab as shown in Figure 46 and enter the information described in Table 30 A check mark indicates a required field Table 30 Configure Facility fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Assigned to The field is blank when a new facility is being added and has not yet been assigned Available Y Displays a list of facilities Select a parent facility where this facility should be assigned Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 4 Importing Records Window Filter Use the Window Filter page in Figure 47 to limit the number of items in the client application navigation pane or drop down lists This is helpful when you are working in a large organization and you want to isolate one facility to perform troubleshooting activities Window Filter Instructions Select the facilities that are to be active in the window filter Facilities IM Global Facility East Coast Region NEW YORK Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility Sample Region Facility Unassigned Items Facility West Coast Region Figure 47 Window Filter page Changing Contents of View Limit your view of items in Facility Commander by selecting only the facilities you want to view and filtering th
23. If View is selected an operator can only view the Event Action Mapping records and cannot modify or delete them 7 Review each permission and select the appropriate permission level Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 111 Chapter 5 Assigning Permissions and Context Operations Tab Applications Editors Operations Facility Permission Enabled Change Window Filter L Change Locale Change Video Popup Options Shutdown System Run Configure Diagnostics Alarm Colors pees ee System Parameters Figure 83 Configure System Permissions page Operations tab 8 Select the Operations tab as shown in Figure 83 to choose one or more check boxes granting permissions A check mark indicates the permission is enabled Page 112 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 5 Assigning Permissions and Context Contexts Contexts are comprised of system permissions and facility permissions and assigned to each operator Facility Commander provides pre defined Contexts that can be modified to meet your organization s needs which include e System Administrator Context Grants control over the entire system It grants all permissions to all action items and facilities e Regional Administrator Context Grants control over a limited portion of the system It grants all system level permissions to all actions and items but not all facilities The Context definitions also include three g
24. Offline Alarm profile to use when the intrusion panel is offline Intrusion Siren Use the drop down list to select the appropriate alarm Monitor Failure profile to use when the intrusion siren monitor fails Alarm Intrusion Panel Use the drop down list to select the appropriate alarm Tamper Alarm profile to use when someone tampers with an intrusion panel Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 259 Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Facility Tab Model Addresses Advanced Alarms rmy e Assigned to Bi Available BOCA RATON East Coast Region Global Facili PP GLOBAL Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility Sample Region Facility West Coast Region Hold the Ctrl key down for multiple selection Figure 167 Intrusion Panel Facility tab 9 Select the Facility tab as shown in Figure 167 and enter the information described in Table 104 A check mark indicates a required field Table 104 Configure Intrusion Panel fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Assigned to Items can belong to more than one facility This is a read only field and cannot be edited Available va Use to assign or change the facility membership for this item The facilities that display in this list depend on the operator s context and permissions To assign the item to more than one facility select the first facility and press the Ctrl key while selecting the other facilities The selected
25. Type the following command service fcmediad start or etc re d init d fcmediad start gt To start or stop services on a Windows server 1 You must be logged in as the administrator user If not log out and log back in as a user with these permissions 2 Click Start Settings Control Panel Administrative Tools and then click Services The Services window displays Locate the Facility Commander Media server services 3 Right click on Facility Commander Media server and select either Stop or Start Facility Commander Launcher When the client application is started from a workstation it displays the Facility Commander Launcher window which allows you to launch other client applications display Web pages to configure network parameters for client to server communications and log out Using the Facility Commander Launcher shown in Figure 3 on page 10 you can open the Web browser and other client applications such as e Alarm Monitor e Video Console e Graphics Editor Event Monitor e Graphics Viewer e Symbol Editor e Multi Viewer The Facility Commander Launcher window can be minimized to display as a toolbar as shown in Figure 4 on page 11 The Launcher can also be customized you can replace the icons and you can add up to six additional icons to launch other applications such as WaveReader Refer to Customizing Launcher Window on page 382 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 9 Chapter 2 Getting
26. cc cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeaes 79 Digital Inputs and Outputs cece ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee cece eeeaaaeeeeeeeseaaeeteneees 80 Viewing Digital Inputs 20 0 2 ceeeeccceeeeeeeceeeeeeseceeeeseseeceeeeeneeeeeeeeneees 80 Importing Digital INDUtS 2 0 ee n eee eeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeneaaaes 81 Editing Digital Inputs arsson aA aaa EEREN 82 Synchronizing Digital Inputs eecceeeeeeeeneeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 85 Viewing Logical Inputs sss aan anaa n S a 86 Importing Logical INPUTS 2 0 0 0 ee eee eeeee eee eeeeee a 87 Editing Logical Input Records 0 0 0 ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennaeeeeseenaeeeeeeeaaaes 88 Synchronizing Logical Inputs c cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaes 91 Viewing Digital Outputs 0 cece cece eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeteaes 92 Page ii Facility Commander Administration Guide Importing Digital Outputs 0 eeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeeeeeas 92 Editing Digital Outputs 20 0 ee eee eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeaeeeeeas 94 Synchronizing Digital Outputs ee eee eeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeteeeee 97 Chapter 5 Assigning Permissions and Context 99 OVEIVICW E E E taseeeunnaatexiee atte 100 Facio ea a E capssduee dc eacensleeedvvaetetesdas 100 POlMISSIONS eios a aE a 100 Context eoi inaa oa e iaa a a otea iaaa aaa 100 Pre Defined Permissions and Context cccecseseeeeeeeeeseeeeees 101 EX GUM PI
27. f Submit Cancel Figure 174 Configure Intrusion Outputs page 3 Enter the information described in Table 109 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages 4 Click Submit to save the record Table 109 Configure Intrusion Keypad fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Tag Name Y Enter a unique name to identify this item Use 2 36 characters Description Enter a description for this item Use 1 100 characters The description does not have to be unique Reference ID Enter a name to associate this item to a blue print or wiring diagram Use 1 20 characters Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 267 Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices General Tab ATS Panel Keypad Number fi Figure 175 Configure Intrusion Keypad General tab 5 Enter the information described in Table 110 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 110 Configure Intrusion Outputs fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Intrusion Panel f Use the drop down list to select the intrusion panel associated with this intrusion outputs This number must match the area configured for this output Keypad Number f Enter the keypad number to represent this intrusion keypad The number must be between 1 and 16 Page 268 Facility Commander Administrati
28. fusr BackupUtility BackupUtility 12096 blocks Backup complete details in var log BackupUtilityfF_200304071429 03 E jecting media done Please load the first tape of this file backup session in ftape for verifica tion and press ENTER Log file name Figure 222 Waiting to start file backup verification 3 When the backup is complete a message displays with the details of where the log is stored and the last tape is ejected Record this information to view the logs at a later date 4 Insert the first tape in the series to verify the backup and press Enter This verification only tests the readability of the tape and not the contents of the tape The window in Figure 223 on page 357 displays next Page 356 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 17 Backup Restore Informix Databases fusr informix etc sqlhosts fusr informix etc onconf ig fusr informix etc infos mlnserver fusr informix etc conf mlnserver fusr informix etc oncfg_mlnserver O fusr informix etc fc_log_full conf fusr informix etc fc_log_full sh fusr informix etc ac_config std fetc BackupUtility fetc BackupUtility backup_paths fetc BackupUtility config fvar log BackupUtility fvar log BackupUt ility F_200304061802 22 fvar log BackupUtility F_200304071150 33 fusr BackupUtility fusr BackupUtility BackupUtility 12096 blocks Backup complete details in var log BackupUtility F_200304071429 03 E jecting media done
29. launched from the Alarm Monitor Event Monitor or the Facility Commander Launcher window When an alarm event is generated the symbol placed on the graphic display changes to reflect the alarm state For example a Door Forced alarm includes two conditions set and reset Each alarm state and condition is represented on the graphic display by a different symbol such as the e initial state is represented by a gray door icon e alarm condition is represented by a red door icon reset condition is represented by a green door icon The graphic displays contain symbols which represent e Cameras e Intercom Substations e Door Access Points e Intrusion Areas e Digital Inputs e Intrusion DGPs e Logical Inputs e Intrusion Inputs e Digital Outputs e Intrusion Outputs e Intercom Exchanges e Intrusion Keypad e Intercom Master Stations e Intrusion Panel In addition a globe icon displays on the Alarm Monitor and Event Monitor to represent a graphic display when an alarm event occurs When you select the globe icon the Graphics Viewer launches with the default graphic display if configured to do so Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 16 Viewing Graphic Displays Alarm States An alarm can be in one of three states Alarm Tamper and Reset If different icons were defined for each of these states using the Symbol Editor then the appearance of the symbol reflects its current state If you have multiple maps and l
30. navigation pane to open the graphics display gt To open the Graphics Viewer using the menu follow these steps 1 From the Facility Commander Launcher window select Launch and Graphics Viewer or select the Graphics Viewer icon from the Viewers toolbar The Graphics Viewer shown in Figure 205 on page 336 displays 2 Select File and then Open If amore recent copy of the site map exists on the Facility Commander server the Open window shown in Figure 206 displays 2 Available Server Displays NY Floor 01 bd Cancel Figure 206 Download window 3 Use the drop down list to select the graphic display you want to view Click OK The Graphics Viewer displays the selected site map Page 338 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 16 Viewing Graphic Displays Selecting Layers Graphic displays can be constructed of different layers with different items on each layer Use this option to select the layers you want to view One layer may contain only access points while another layer may contain all the video devices Hiding layers reduces the clutter when operators need to focus gt To display a different layer follow these steps 1 Select Layer and Show Hide Layer The Show Hide Layer window shown in Figure 207 displays Show Hide layer x visible Figure 207 Show Hide Layer window 2 The window displays the layer names Layer 0 Layer 1 or the name assigned to the layer with a chec
31. operator record could not be located in the database Verify the presence of the context record in the database that is specified in the operator record Try to recreate the context if it is missing Examine the system log for evidence of database consistency error messages If the problem persists send the relevant information to Customer Support for assistance 00059 All workstation licenses in All concurrent log ins Wait a few minutes and try to use permitted by the license arein log in again Idle log ins will use be terminated after their idle expiration period freeing their licenses Reduce the number of concurrent log ins by asking operators to log off of workstations that they are not actively using Increase concurrent login licenses 00060 Login failed workstation not The operator attempted torun Notify the operator of which specified or not defined the Java client user interface workstations may be used to from a workstation that was run the Java client user not defined to the Facility interface software or define Commander server the workstation on the Facility Workstations that may be Commander server If used to run the Java client dynamic IP addressing is user interface must be being used on the network defined on the Facility the System Administrator Commander server The host should verify that the DNS name of the workstation domain name server is where the Java client user correctly translating the
32. tabbed pages 4 Click Submit to save the record Table 99 Intrusion Panel fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Tag Name Y Enter a unique name to identify this item Use 2 36 characters Description Enter a description for this item Use 1 100 characters The description does not have to be unique Reference ID Enter a name to associate this item to a blue print or wiring diagram Use 1 20 characters Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 255 Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Page 256 Model Tab Moder Addresses Advanced Alarms Facility Mode ATSPanel x Facility Commander Server icserver Time Zone X GMT 00 00 GMT GMT x Command Retry Interval seconds fi 5 Maximum Command Retry Attempts 3 Figure 163 Intrusion Panel Model tab 5 Select the Model tab as shown in Figure 163 and enter the information described in Table 100 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 100 Configure Intrusion Panel fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Model va Use the drop down list to select the model name Facility Commander f Server Use the drop down list to select the main Facility Commander that controls communication with this intrusion panel Time Zone Y Use the drop down list to select the time zone for this server This time zone dis
33. 1 100 characters The description does not have to be unique Reference ID Enter a name to associate this item to a blue print or wiring diagram Use 1 20 characters Page 76 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 4 Importing Records General Tab Facility General l Rd fist floor plan x Time Zone GMT 05 00 EST EST he Figure 51 Configure Access Point General tab 5 Select the General tab as shown in Figure 51 and enter the information described in Table 32 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 32 Configure Access Points fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Graphic Display Use the drop down list box to select the graphic display to show when an alarm is generated for this access point When a site plan is selected a globe icon displays on the Alarm Monitor and Event Monitor when an alarm event occurs indicating a site plan is available Time Zone Y Use the drop down list to select the time zone for this access point This time zone displays on the Alarm Monitor or Event Monitor The default time zone setting is GMT Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 77 Chapter 4 Importing Records Facility Tab Assigned to i Available Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility Sample Region Facility West Coast Region Hold the Ctrl key down for multiple select
34. 13 14 15 16 17 8 19 20 21 2 23 24 25 26 27 26 Time 00 10 00 Cancel eee C Always on Top Figure 120 DVR General Playback tab 3 Enter the information described in Table 72 on page 172 to search for recorded video Search criteria includes recorder cameras date and time Enter multiple values to narrow the search criteria 4 Click Go The recorded video displays in the Video Console 5 Click Close when you are finished viewing results Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 171 Chapter 7 Using the Video Console Table 72 lists and describes the DVR General Playback tab Table 72 DVR General Playback tab Element Description Camera Selection Recorder Use the drop down list to identify the DVR device where the recorded video is stored Camera Use the drop down list to identify the camera device used to record the video Search on Date and Time Date Use the drop down list to select the month e Use the drop down list to select the year Time Enter the time The format is HH MM SS Page 172 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 7 Using the Video Console DVR Motion Search gt To search for recorded video that includes motion follow these steps 1 From the File menu select Video Search 2 Select the DVR Motion Search tab The DVR Motion Search tab shown in Figure 121 displays 5 gt Video Search System Event Search D
35. Enable At Time to Disconnect Enable Packing Algorithm Packing Algorithm Disable Additional Settings Disconnect Mode Ignore Check for Cntl D Disable Port Password Disable Telnet Mode Disable Inactivity Timeout Enable Page 252 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices RS 232 Connection To communicate with an RS 232 device you must use a Lantronix bridge UDS100 Device server This device allows messages sent by the ATS panel s RS 232 connector to be received by the Facility Commander ethernet connection If installers decide to provide their own RS 232 cable they should consider e The wire carrying the CTS Clear To Send signal on the RS 232 cable should be disconnected at the panel e The wires carrying the RTS CTS Request To Send signal on the RS 232 should be wired together at the panel e The cable should be constructed as a null modem cable which is also known as a crossover cable This means the transmit and receive signals should be crossed so the transmit signal from the panel becomes the receive signal at the other end of the cable Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 253 Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Configuring Intrusion Panels Use the Intrusion Panels page to add edit copy and delete records Refer to the following sections for instructions e Viewing
36. Exchanges Yes No No No Intercom Stations Yes No No No Analog Video Switcher Yes No No No Intrusion Panels Yes No No No Intrusion Areas Yes No No No Intrusion Inputs Yes No No No Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 453 Appendix D Facility Permissions Page 454 Facility Commander Administration Guide Appendix E System Permissions Appendix E System Permissions Use system permissions to grant or deny permissions to system applications such as the Alarm Monitor or access points to item that are not assigned to facilities Examples of items that are not in facilities include alarm colors alarm instructions and alarm profiles Refer to System Permissions on page 108 for more information about configuring permissions To review the specific permissions granted when using the predefined permissions refer to the following sections Permission Level Refer to All System Permissions Table 155 on page 455 Entry Level Guard System Permissions Table 156 on page 457 Guard Supervisor System Permissions Table 157 on page 458 Intermediate Guard System Permissions Table 158 on page 459 If you are reading this document online click one of the links above to navigate directly to the page All System Permissions Grants all permissions including view update create and delete for system level items This also grants permission to use application
37. Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 155 Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Page 156 Client Path Settings Facility Commander uses Window DLL files which codes and decodes video streams to display video e On the client computer the Kalatel DLL file is named NativeADV601Codec d1l e The DLL file resides in C Program Files FacilityCommanderClient lib resources The Client system path must be able to find the DLL file which is created during the installation process gt To verify the path follow these steps 1 From the Start menu select Settings Control Panel and then System 2 Select the Advanced tab 3 Click Environment Variables 4 In the System Variables group confirm the path statement contains the following entries C Program Files FacilityCommanderClient C Program Files FacilityCommanderClient lib resources 5 If these entries do not exist click Edit The New System Variable window displays a Enter the Variable Name Path b Enter the Variable Value identified in Step 4 c Click OK 6 Click OK twice to close the Properties windows Communication Failure Using the Alarm Monitor check for a DVRComm Failure Alarm gt Ifan alarm exists follow these steps 1 Try to ping the DVR If the ping command fails verify the IP address IP address mask and gateway settings on the DVR are correct Refer to the vendor s documentation for instructions 2 Verify the DVR is plugg
38. Guide indicator in the lower right corner of the client application is red this indicates a communication problem First verify with the System Administrator that the server is up and running If it is then the problem may be with the client PC s network connection or due to an incorrect hostURL entry in the client properties file Appendix C Error Messages Table 148 List of error numbers messages causes and actions Continued Message Causes Actions 00067 Attempt to update facility The operator request to Attempt to make the membership failed change the membership ofa membership changes that facility was not totally previously failed If the successful most likely due to problem persists contact the a problem accessing the System Administrator to database or an inconsistency examine the system log file between database tables for evidence of database Some of the requested inconsistency or a software changes may have been problem and send the made but at least one change relevant information to failed The screen will be Customer Support for refreshed to show the current assistance membership of the facility The operator should examine the information to determine what changes did not occur 00068 The window filter contains no This message indicates that No action is required unless facilities the context assigned to the the operator believes that the operator does notinclude any context should contai
39. Intrusion Panels Adding Intrusion Inputs on page 277 Viewing Intrusion Panels gt To view intrusion panels follow these steps 1 Select Device Management 2 Select Intrusion Panels The Intrusion Panels page as shown in Figure 161 displays Intrusion Panels Instructions View edit add or delete intrusion panels 4Page 1 of i gt Go to Go Items per Page fio Tag Name Description Reference ID Facility Commander Server afejasee OO o ee Figure 161 Intrusion Panels page Page 254 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Adding Intrusion Panels gt To add an intrusion panel follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then Intrusion Panels The Intrusion Panels page displays 2 Click Add Intrusion Panel The Configure Intrusion Panel page as shown in Figure 162 displays Configure Intrusion Panel Instructions View or edit the intrusion panel Intrusion Panel Information Tag Name ATS Panel Description Reference ID Model Addresses Advanced Alarms Facility Model ATSPanel z Facility Commander Server icserver z Time Zone GMT 00 00 GMT GMT Command Retry Interval seconds 115 Maximum Command Retry Attempts b Cancel Figure 162 Intrusion Panel page 3 Enter the information described in Table 99 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the
40. Links Use to access other functions such as editing item records or logging out of the system If an operator does not have permission to edit the record the link will be disabled e Click tag name or description to make changes to an existing record The configuration page displays which allows you to make changes Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 2 Getting Started Table 4 Web interface elements and descriptions Continued Element Description Icons Click the appropriate icon to copy or delete a record If an operator does not have permission to edit the record the link will be disabled The icons are e Click Copy to make a duplicate of the existing record The configuration page displays which allows you to change the information in the existing record This is useful when you need to create many records with similar information e Click Delete to remove the record Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 17 Chapter 2 Getting Started Browser Menu Use the Facility Commander Browser menu shown in Figure 8 to select configuration and list pages Click to expand menu _ _p Environment Device Management Operator Administration System Administration Workstations Facilities Graphic Displays System Parameters Access Control Systems Facility Commander Servers 4larm Colors System Shutdown System Diagnostics Figure 8 Browser menu Select a menu n
41. Model Addresses Advanced Alarms Facility Status Polling Interval seconds 60 Command Retry Interval seconds 30 Figure 109 Configure Analog Video Switcher Advanced tab 7 Select the Advanced tab shown in Figure 109 and enter the information described in Table 63 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 63 Configure Analog Video Switcher fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Status Polling va Enter the number of seconds to wait before Interval Seconds Facility Commander polls the analog video switcher device The default value is 60 seconds Command Retry Y Enter the number of seconds to wait before Interval Seconds trying to reconnect to the Facility Commander server The default value is 30 seconds Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 147 Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Alarms Tab Analog Switcher Offline Model Addresses Advanced Aterms Facility X Figure 110 Configure Analog Video Switcher Alarms tab 8 Select the Alarms tab shown in Figure 109 and enter the information described in Table 64 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 64 Configure Analog Video Switcher fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Analog Switcher Use the drop down list to select the appropriate alarm Offline indicating when the ana
42. Model tab shown in Figure 91 and enter the information described in Table 50 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 50 Configure DVR fields and descriptions Field Name Online REQ Description Default setting is online A check mark indicates the DVR is online Clear the check box to take the DVR offline The DVR must be offline to use another application such as WaveReader Model Number of Inputs Use the drop down list to select the DVR model name Enter the number of available inputs on the DVR This number is different depending on the DVR model For all Sym devices this number must be 20 Configure the first IP camera on Input 17 Time Zone Use the drop down list to select the time zone where this device is located This time zone displays on the Alarm Monitor and Event Monitor The default time zone setting is GMT Facility Commander Server Use the drop down list to select the Media server that controls communication with this DVR Archive Device When configuring an IP camera use the drop down list to select the device to which this camera sends archived video Video Clip Search Timeout seconds Enter the number of seconds to poll the DVR to find a video clip to play Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 127 Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Page 128 Addresses Tab Model I
43. Outputs page shown in Figure 114 displays Analog Switcher Inputs and Outputs Instructions View or edit analog switcher inputs and outputs Select the camera or CCTY monitor that is connected to each port of the switcher Import Configuration File Inputs 4Page1ofib Goto Port Camera Alias Camera Title Camera 0 0 camera_01_01 x 1 1 camera_01_02 x 2 2 camera_01_03 v 3 3 camera_01_04 v 4 4 x 5 j5 6 l vl Outputs 4 Page 1 of 1 gt Go to Port Monitor Alias Monitor o Oo o Monitor 1 v 1 1 Monitor 2 v 2 2 v 3 3 v Figure 114 Analog Video Switcher Inputs and Outputs page 4 Click Import Configuration File The Inputs and Outputs File Import page shown in Figure 115 displays Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 153 Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Page 154 Inputs and Outputs File Import Instructions Select a file to import Configuration File Browse M Create cameras and monitors Submit Cancel Figure 115 Inputs and Outputs File Import page 5 Enter the directory path in the Configuration File field or use the Browse button to navigate to the directory folder where the file is stored Select the file and click OK 6 Select the Create cameras and monitors check box which is the default setting 7 Click Submit to generate the camera and monitor records and enter the records in the database T
44. Page 227 Chapter 11 Using the Event Monitor Page 228 Event Types List Table 86 lists the event types that display on the Event Monitor Table 86 Event Monitor Event Types Event Types Event Types Access Control Comm Failure Intercom Substation Reset Analog Switcher Offline Intrusion Area Alarm Event Door Forced Alarm Intrusion Area Armed Door Held Alarm Intrusion Area Auto Disarmed Door Prealarm Intrusion Area Disarmed During Alarm DVR Communications Alarm Intrusion Area Failed To Arm Input Alarm Intrusion Area State Armed All Clear Intercom Exchange Comm Failure Alarm Intrusion Area Armed and In Alarm Intercom Exchange Reset Alarm Intrusion Area Armed and In Alarm Event Intercom Exchange Reset Alarm Event Intrusion Area State Disarmed Intercom Master Busy Intrusion Area Unknown Intercom Master Call Answered Intrusion Battery Test Failure Intercom Master Call Connected Intercom Master Call Ringing Intrusion Battery Test Finish Intrusion Battery Test Start Intercom Master Call To Busy Intrusion DGP Main Power Failure Alarm Intercom Master Call To Private Intercom Master Call Disconnected Intrusion DGP Offline Alarm Intrusion DGP Siren Monitor Failure Alarm Intercom Master Reset Intrusion DGP Tamper Alarm Intercom Substation Busy Intrusion Input Alarm Intercom Substation Call Answer
45. Please load the first tape of this file backup session in dev tape for verifica tion and press ENTER Verifying backup 12096 blocks PASSED Verification passed message Figure 223 Successful file backup verification 5 Remove the tape and store it according to your organization s policy If you are using an Imation Travan tape it will not be ejected automatically Remove the tape from the drive to prevent any problems with loading future tapes Restore Procedures This section describes the restore process as if the Facility Commander server disk drive fails Previous to restoring the data the system administrator should e Install the operating system e Install the database e Install Facility Commander software Also install all patches or upgrades that are appropriate The machine should have the same configuration as the original hardware when the backups were completed When the Restore action is selected the program preforms a pre restoration check to verify the system is in an appropriate state These checks depend on the database Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 357 Chapter 17 Backup Restore Informix Databases The Informix database must be shut down before it is restored You will be unable to restore the Informix database before shutting it down An error message displays Use the command service Informix stop to shutdown the database gt To begin the restore process f
46. Preferences Xiahoe Chu Intermediate Guard Context st Figure 35 Operators page Preferences ae Frank Zheng FZheng Guard Supervisor Context Preferences Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 59 Chapter 4 Importing Records Adding Operators gt To add a Facility Commander operator to the system follow these steps 1 Select Operator Administration and then Operators The Operators list page displays 2 Click Add Operator The Configure Operator page as shown in Figure 36 displays Configure Operator Instructions View or edit operators Do not specify a password for imported operators Operator Information User Name Full Name General External System Facility Password mo Confirm Password Context Enty Level Guard Context z Cancel Figure 36 Configure Operator page 3 Enter the information described in Table 25 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages 4 Click Submit to save the record Table 25 Configure Operator fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description User Name va Enter the operator s name using the appropriate naming convention This may be the first initial and last name For example fsmith Use 1 to 50 characters Spaces are not valid Full Name A Enter the first name and last name of the person who is assigned to the user name For example Fred Smith U
47. Record cccsssseeeeeesees 387 Editing the Host File on a Client System n 387 Editing the Client Properties File on a Client System 0 388 Editing the Picture Perfect Configuration File cseeeeee 388 Enabling SSL Encryption for Picture Perfect c s 388 Copying File from Facility Commander ccscceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 389 Moving File to Picture Perfect ceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 391 Generating Picture Perfect Key File cccccccssseseereesseeeeeeeees 391 Generating Picture Perfect Certificate Request eseeeees 392 Generating Picture Perfect Signed Certificate 0 393 Generating Picture Perfect PEM File ccccccsseeseeeeessteeeeeeees 393 Updating EIF Event Manager Configuration File seeeee 393 Updating EIF Request Manager Configuration File 0 395 Copying Certificate to Facility Commander Server c006 397 Adding Picture Perfect Certificate ccccceesseeeeseeeeeeeeesteeeeenes 398 Enabling SSL Communication on Facility Commander 399 Appendix A Edit Configuration Files for Informix Backup to E E A T 401 Configuration Files smesisriiiinarianisiaannae aianei ian eaa 402 Editing the Informix Configuration File sesser 403 Scheduling the Backup Utility 2 0 00 ceceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeenees 404 Create a Cron Task ceescccceceeeeessceceeeeceeaeeeceeeseee
48. Record IDS ceceeeeeeeeesereeees 56 TIME ZONES siira i ca sceesiadaeiebe sy T a 56 Synchronize Records sirosti daniati aiioa ian 57 TErmiInolOgy yea 57 Operator Records sssr sotineen aaeain naaa aaa ea aka Aeae 58 Operator PasswordS ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaaeeseneeesenaeeeeaes 58 Operator Preferences cccccccecceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeeeaas 58 Viewing Facility Commander Operators ccccceseeeeeeeeesteeeeeeees 59 Adding Operators sssei oc ecticeierehiicssectie needed aad 60 Removing Default ACCOUNT ee ccceeieeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeneaaaes 64 importing Operators seve ieiee lassen eaewd saves ateneliitaseciitenennens 65 Changing Operator Preferences ccccceeeceeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaes 66 FACTS A E A E E E A T A TA 67 Viewing FacilitieS ssesscnreiseiit a aO a 68 mmporing FACIES seivcscsceeettivssede tse aaa 68 Creating a Facility seisis nirai aaa aasan 70 Members TaD saischcetstdtucheseasticecesateeitencessinneneeveiied sesndiecietiteis 71 Parent Facility TaD ccno an cecal naeestnaet 72 Window FIOT soes aan E EE 73 Changing Contents of View cceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeaeeeteneeestaeeeeaes 73 ACCESS POINTS ooann naan aT A ANAA EA 74 Viewing Imported Access Points ssssssessrressssrreseserneeersnnensrenneens 74 Importing Access PONS sesim 75 Editing Access POINIS okesreicnnssiinei n 76 Synchronizing Access Points 0
49. Select the check boxes to indicate the items you want to display on the Graphics Viewer A check mark indicates the item is selected Clear the check boxes to remove the items from view 4 Click Save The Graphics Viewer displays a window filter icon in the status bar indicating the list of available Facility Commander facilities has changed Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 347 Chapter 16 Viewing Graphic Displays Printing Graphic Displays gt To print a display follow these steps 1 From the File menu select Print The Print View window shown in Figure 216 displays LT x Paper View selection Pages Preview Paper Format A4 A Paper width 21 Paper height 29 7 Top margin 2 54 Bottom margin fe 54 Left margin 2 54 Right margin 2 54 Orientation f E i Default Unit cm inch Default Print Close Figure 216 Print View window 2 On the Paper tab use the Paper Format drop down list to select the correct paper size The measurements and margins display for the selected paper format The default setting is A4 Select the unit of measurement to display Click the appropriate option button to select centimeters or inches Select the paper orientation Click the portrait icon or landscape icon to change the orientation If you select a custom paper format enter the paper width and height and margins for the graphic di
50. Started Title Bar Menu Bar window Launch View Help Login Logoff Button The items appearing on the Facility Commander Launcher window depend on the Facility Commander user s context and permissions The system administrator may be able to view all the items while another operator may only be able to view the Alarm Monitor Refer to Assigning Permissions and Context on page 99 for more information amp Facility Commander Launcher Default System Account connected to bctblas DEAR 96 Facility Commander Logoff Toolbar Icons Server Connection Icon Figure 3 Facility Commander Launcher window Table 1 lists and describes the elements of the Facility Commander Launcher Table 1 Facility Commander Launcher elements Element Description Title Bar Displays the user s name the Facility Commander server name and the user s context information Menu Bar Displays a menu bar that allows you to launch the client applications access the Facility Commander Web browser open the Online Help system and exit Login Logoff Button Click this button to log in to or exit from Facility Commander Toolbar Icons Select the appropriate icon from the toolbar to open a client application or Web browser interface ler Use to launch the Multi Viewer application gt Use to launch the Alarm Monitor application a gt g EA Use to launch the Event Monito
51. SymNet 1 2 00i Legend IP 3 6 These recorders are part of the family of SymSuite video products Integral DVXi 3 1 Technologies DVXe 4 0 4 1 DS Xpress 2 1 American Intellex DVMS8000 3 1 Dynamics Nice Pro Harmony 8 0 Digital Watchdog DWPro 9016 2 3 Pelco DX8000 1 0 Panasonic HD500A 2 5 Note Increasing the processor speed and memory on the server and or client workstations may be required for optimizing performance in your specific application Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 123 Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Page 124 Video Devices The video equipment and supporting software applications must be installed according to the manufacturer s directions The Facility Commander supports GE Security and other vendor products including NTSC and PAL video formats Refer to the product documentation provided by the manufacturer for instructions to install and use their products You can add an unlimited number of DVRs which allows you to add more DVRs and cameras as your business needs grow The number of cameras you can use will depend on the DVR type and model used in your environment All the cameras in Facility Commander must be licensed the number of licenses is determined by the number of cameras in the whole deployment and not per DVR device Configuring Digital Video Recorders A Digital Video Recorder DVR is a device which is capable of recording video from multiple cameras simultaneously and
52. Terminology Facility Commander uses these terms to describe intercom devices Exchange Intercom hardware which is typically located in the control center and serves as a switch to physically connected devices Master Intercom which is typically located at an operator s Station workstation The master station has a keypad Substation _ Intercom which is typically located at door entrances The substation has a button which is used to communicate but does not have a keypad Checklist A system administrator should use the checklist below to implement the intercom feature in Facility Commander Y Configure the intercom exchange Refer to Adding an Intercom Exchange on page 234 for more information Y Configure intercom stations Refer to Adding Intercom Stations on page 241 for more information Y Create a symbol scheme with intercom devices to use ona graphic display Refer to Creating Symbol Schemes on page 285 for more information Y Create a graphic display and place symbols representing intercom devices Refer to Creating Graphic Displays on page 299 for more information Page 232 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 12 Configuring Intercom Devices Configuring Intercom Exchanges Use the Intercom Exchanges page to add edit copy and delete intercom exchange records Refer to the following sections for instructions Viewing Intercom Exchanges on page 233 Adding an Intercom Exchange on p
53. The text below represents what should be entered if you want to add an application such as Notepad to the Launcher window This change adds the Notepad icon to the first position on the Applications toolbar launcher user_application 1 exe c winnt system32 notepad exe launcher user_application 1 icon c path wmplayer gif launcher user_application 1 tooltip Media Player 3 Save the changes and close the text editor when you are finished Verifying Computer Host Name Facility Commander servers remote media servers and client workstations all have host names which are used to identify the system to the network Windows gt To verify the host name follow these steps 1 Right click My Computer on the desktop 2 Select Properties from the shortcut menu 3 Select the Network Identification tab The computer host name is listed on this page Linux AIX Windows gt To verify the host name 1 Open a terminal window and type the host name command hostname Page 384 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 19 Advanced Configuration Changing the Host Name or IP Address If you are installing Facility Commander on a new system or a system that is already configured in your network the server s host name may need to be changed On a new system only a change on the Facility Commander server is required Refer to the following sections e Linux Operating System e AIX Operating System on page 386 e
54. This list is populated with items based on the selected event source type Press the Ctrl key while selecting multiple items 5 Use the Event Types By Condition list to select one or more alarm conditions Press the Ctrl key while selecting multiple items 6 Use the Subsystems drop down list to select Access Control Manager 7 Select the appropriate action from the Subsystem Actions drop down list Depending on the selection additional lists or fields may display Refer to Actions in Event Action Mapping on page 190 for a complete list 8 Select an Output Destination This is the Digital Output you are associating with this event 9 Click Submit to save the record Page 184 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 8 Event Action Mapping Sending Automatic E mails Note To send automatic e mails your server must be configured for SMTP gt To automatically send an e mail when an alarm event occurs follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then Event Action Mappings The Event Action Mapping page displays as shown in Figure 124 on page 181 2 Click Add Event Action Mapping The Configure Event Action Mapping page similar to the one shown in Figure 128 displays Configure Event Action Mapping Instructions Define the actions the system will take when the specified event occurs When defining Event Sources or Event Types By Conditior selection Event Action Event Source Type Subsyste
55. Use 1 20 characters Page 32 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 3 Configuring the System Address Tab addresses E mail Server Advanced Alarms Facility Host Name 2 33 133 63 Port s085 Time Zone GMT 00 00 GMT GMT X I Media Server Only Figure 16 Configure Facility Commander Server Address tab 5 Select the Address tab as shown in Figure 16 and enter the information described in Table 9 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 9 Configure Facility Commander server fields and description Field Name Host Name REQ Y Description Enter the host name or IP address of the Facility Commander server The host name is case sensitive Port Time Zone Media Server Only Y Identify the TCP IP port on which this server system communicates with the other systems in the network Facility Commander 2 1 server The default port for the Application server and Media server is 8085 Facility Commander 2 2 server The Application server port is 8085 and the Media server port is 8083 Note Because the default value populated in this field is 8083 Media server it must be changed to 8085 if you are configuring an Application server Use the drop down list to select the time zone for this server This time zone displays on the Alarm Monitor and Event Monitor The default time zone setting is GMT Select t
56. Web browser to configure the system Also included are instructions on how to navigate the browser interface and a description of the common elements including error messages Readers should familiarize themselves with this chapter before proceeding to other chapters in this document In this chapter Overview on page 8 Facility Commander Launcher on page 9 Logging In from a Workstation on page 12 Logging In Using the Web Application on page 14 Using the Web Browser Application on page 14 Managing Multiple Windows on page 20 Customizing Window Name and Contents on page 22 Error Messages on page 23 Navigating the Multi Viewer on page 24 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 7 Chapter 2 Getting Started Overview This chapter introduces you to the Facility Commander interface and describes how to log in and access the Web browser interface and other client applications Starting and Stopping Facility Commander Server and Media Server Services Facility Commander services are started automatically in Windows and Linux AIX operating systems Use http hostname 8085 Merlin URL to access the Web pages to configure Facility Commander Facility Commander Server The following procedures are used to stop and start services for the Facility Commander server Always stop the services before restarting them to clear any lock files gt To stop services on a Linux server 1 You must be logged in as the administrat
57. Windows Operating System on page 386 On an existing system changes are required on the following systems e Facility Commander server e Facility Commander Clients on page 386 e Picture Perfect Server on page 386 Use the checklist in Table 140 to change the host name Table 140 Change Host Name Checklist Facility Commander Server Y Disable client encryption Refer to Changing the Client Encryption on page 387 for instructions to enable or disable encryption between the Facility Commander server and the client applications Y Y Change the host name on the Facility Commander server Refer to Changing the Host Name on Server Record on page 387 for more information Change the operating system host name Refer to the following sections for the appropriate operating system Linux Operating System Y Run the chhostlinux sh script located in the following directory var FacilityCommanderServer server webapps Mer1lin WEB INF classes resources va Select the database you are using and enter the new host name and IP address Enter the same IP address if it is not changing Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 385 Chapter 19 Advanced Configuration Table 140 Change Host Name Checklist Continued AIX Operating System va Run the chhostaix sh script located in the following directory var FacilityCommanderServer server webapps Merlin WEB INF classes resources va Select
58. and then Multi Viewer or select the Multi Viewer icon from the Viewers toolbar The Multi Viewer window as shown in Figure 13 displays Split Bars and Pointers Title Bar deo Console a Window Launch View Help Custom View i Piles x m Facility View Window File Layer View Help ile View Window Help B Global Facility rm 14 nc DL 5 Fi gt AlarmRecorder SE EJ P Legend Dome 34 r gt Kelatel 1 Area Area 2 ene 828 shoe Navigation Pane gt ShreSete Prot 5 paS i 3 ce ie SymDec 2 X s a 7 R 12 E E SymDec 32 EDR KEOS 13 i gt VisioWave ORK B VisioWave 1205 je camera_43_01 Area a s 5 s Sw camera_43_02 om R Kenan Snr e camera_43_03 Sor peed rear BARE BARE Sw camera_43_ y E 100 Comm Fail DVR UBF 18 19 R 0R 21 R 22 i 230R 24 OG Sme es 331 S as ER a6 AR SRo K 2 Cameramap EEEN B REESE Live 04 04 09 11 38 23 door camera Am 02 DSU Window Action View Help mB 9 4 8 oR Indicators Priorit Operator Time Alarm Description Location larm State Input State Processin Count i EP Program Panes Figure 13 Multi Viewer window Table 6 lists and describes the elements found in the Multi Viewer window Page 24 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 2 Getting Started Table 6 Multi Viewer elements and descriptions Element Description Title Bar Displays the title Multi Viewer and the window instance num
59. associate this item to a blue print or wiring diagram Use 1 20 characters Page 94 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 4 Importing Records General Tab eee NY Floor 02 x Time Zone GMT 05 00 EST EST x Figure 69 Configure Digital Output General tab 5 Select the General tab as shown in Figure 69 and enter the information described in Table 41 A check mark indicates a required field Table 41 Configure Digital Output fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Graphic Display Use the drop down list box to select the site plan to display when an alarm is generated for this access point When a site plan is selected a globe icon displays on the Alarm Monitor when an alarm event occurs indicating a site plan is available Time Zone Y Use the drop down list to select the time zone for this device This time zone displays on the Alarm Monitor or Event Monitor The default time zone setting is GMT Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 95 Chapter 4 Importing Records Facility Tab Assigned to an Available Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility Sample Region Facility West Coast Region Figure 70 Configure Digital Output Facility tab 6 Select the Facility tab as shown in Figure 70 and enter the information described in Table 42 Table 42 Configure Digital Output fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description A
60. backups full and incremental A full backup includes the entire database contents If you choose to backup to disk a full backup is done Incremental backups sometimes called differential backups only record those portions of the system that have been modified since the last full backup It is recommended that you perform a full backup at regular intervals AIX Only Change the TAPEDEV parameter to the actual tape device name AIX does not accept symbolic links to a tape device The tape device name in the new value may be different Parameter TAPEDEV Default value dev tape New value dev rmt0 Requirements Tape Backups A minimum of two tapes is required to create a system backup One tape is used to record the database backup while the other is used to record the required support files for Informix and Facility Commander Depending on the amount of data to be backed up additional tapes are spanned to contain the information Tape Labels Backup tapes must be identified clearly Record the following information e Type Full or Incremental Date Tape number and the number in the series such as 1 of 2 and 2 of 2 During file backups the log file name is displayed and contains both the backup type and date Refer to Figure 222 on page 356 for an example In addition include the referenced full backup log file For the database backups each database may have information that is unique to the vendor a
61. by the alarm monitor on a subhost but are not acknowledged in a defined amount of time and are forwarded through a login window to a pre defined terminal on the network host Remote Used by Remote Alarm Notification RAN Notified Priority Alarm Displays a value only when the event type is alarm The range is 1 to 500 Alarms with a priority of one have the highest priority Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 223 Chapter 11 Using the Event Monitor Badge Events List Refer to Table 84 for a description of the column headings that display for badge events Table 84 Event Monitor Badge Events description Element Description First Name Displays the first name of the badgeholder Last Name Displays the last name of the badgeholder Employee Number Displays the employee number of the badgeholder Page 224 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 11 Using the Event Monitor System Events List Refer to Table 85 for a description of the column headings that display for system events Table 85 Event Monitor System Events description Element Description Video Mapped Event Displays the location of the event Location Mapped Event Displays the event state State Video Token ID Displays the video token ID associated with the recorded video clip Intercom From Extension Enter the intercom extension number Refer to Adding Intercom Stations on page 241 for
62. can be sent to designated personnel and outputs can be activated Refer to the following sections for a list of available events and actions Events in Event Action Mapping on page 186 e Actions in Event Action Mapping on page 190 Refer to the following sections for additional instructions Tagging Video Events for Access Points on page 182 Tagging Video Events for Intercom Calls on page 183 e Activating Digital Outputs on page 184 e Sending Automatic E mails on page 185 Event Action Mapping allows you to associate event sources and event types to a specific action An event action mapping is created by identifying the following items e Event Source Types represent the type of event sources that can generate actions such as cameras DVRs and doors e Event Sources are individual devices or items that can trigger actions Event sources are specific access points cameras DVRs digital inputs logical inputs intercom and intrusion devices and servers e Event Types by Condition is a combination of alarm state and alarm for the device e Actions represent the action or activity you want to take place when the combination of event source type and condition are met Facility Commander allows you to lock or unlock doors tag a video event move a camera to a preset position send e mails and more Depending on the actions you select the action parameters display the appropriate drop down list and text boxes Select
63. change is lt number gt available at the current time license capacity of the The license resource system required how many license units are currently in use and how many license units were requested are shown in the message 00002 Cannot release license The operation requested by The requested operation by resource capacity is the operator attempted to the operator to release the lt number gt lt number gt in use release license resources not license resources not held by desired change is lt number gt held by the operator s the operator s session This session This could indicate a could indicate a software software problem or an problem or an attempted attempted security breach security breach 00003 Examine the system log file to Licensing exception No details specified Indicates a software problem or an attempted security breach determine if any unauthorized network activity is present If there is evidence of a software problem send the error message and corresponding information from the log file to Customer Support for assistance Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 415 Appendix C Error Messages Table 148 List of error numbers messages causes and actions Continued Message Causes Actions 00004 License has expired The operator s session was The operator must log in expired due to inactivity and again the license required for the requested operat
64. check box if you do not want the Video Console to launch automatically Intercom Station Use the drop down list to select the intercom station associated with this workstation Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 3 Configuring the System Facilities Tab General Facility Assigned to rere Available PP GLOBAL Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility Sample Region Facility Figure 32 Workstations Facility tab 6 Select the Facility tab as shown in Figure 32 and enter the information described in Table 22 Table 22 Define Workstations fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Assigned to Y Displays the facility or facilities for this workstation Items can belong to more than one facility This is a read only field and cannot be edited Available Y Use to assign or change the facility membership for this item The facilities that display in this list depend on the operator s context and permissions To assign the item to more than one facility select the first facility and press the Ctrl key while selecting the other facilities The selected facilities are highlighted Click Submit e If this item is already assigned to a facility listed in the Assigned To list press the Ctrl key before selecting the new facility assignment e To assign the item to all the listed facilities select the first facility in the list press the Shift key and select the
65. click the symbol to launch the Alarm Response window as shown in Responding to Alarms on page 215 displays Right click the symbol to display the action menu The window shown in Figure 210 displays with the tag name and a list of actions available to the operator lf the camera is not in an alarm state Double click the symbol to perform the default action which is View Live Video Or drag the camera from the navigation pane to a Video Console pane and live video displays Right click the symbol to display the action menu The Control Toolbar displays when the device is not in an alarm state Page 342 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 16 Viewing Graphic Displays View Video from Monitor Devices To use this feature analog cameras must be connected to an analog CCTV switcher Refer to Configuring Video Devices on page 121 for more information gt To display video on a CCTV monitor follow these steps 1 Select the graphic display Refer to Opening Graphic Displays on page 338 NY Cam 100 Control Panel Display In Monitor gt Lobby 100 Monitor Lot 400 Monitor West Lobby 200 Monitor Figure 211 Graphical display with monitors 2 Locate the symbol representing the camera If the camera is in an alarm state Double click the symbol to launch the Alarm Response window as shown in Responding to Alarms on page 215 displays Right click the symbol to display the action men
66. e g Picture Perfect is currently offline Verify that the alarm has an Offline indicator displayed a red X This indicates that the external system that is the source for this alarm is currently offline When the external system comes back online when the red X is no longer displayed bringing up the Alarm Response window again to display the alarm instructions Page 430 Facility Commander Administration Guide Appendix C Error Messages Table 148 List of error numbers messages causes and actions Continued Message Causes Actions 00074 No hyperlink location defined This message may occur with Notify the System the Graphic Viewer when a Administrator that the graphic hyperlink symbol was added display contains a link that to the graphic display but was was not set The System not linked to another graphic Administrator should run the Graphic Editor to set the hyperlink to an existing graphic display or should delete the hyperlink symbol 00075 Error in saving display The file name may contain Examine the client log file to invalid characters determine which file names were invalid Correct the file names and retry the save operation 00076 Error in getting display from The attempt to retrieve the Contact the System server specified graphic display file Administrator to determine if from the Facility Commander _ the server is down or there server failed The server may are network communi
67. edit the graphic display information Graphic Display Information Tag Name CameraMap Description File Name Facility Assigned to Global Facility Available FACILITY 1 PP GLOBAL Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility Sample Region Facility Hold the Ctrl key down for multiple selection Figure 205 Configure Graphic Display page 4 Enter the information described in Table 132 A check mark indicates a required field 5 Click Submit to save the record Table 132 Configure Graphic Display fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Tag Name oY Displays the file name assigned to the graphic display Enter a unique name to identify this item in the navigation pane of the client applications This changes the file name on the Facility Commander server Use 2 36 characters Description Enter a description for this item Use 1 100 characters The description does not have to be unique File Name Displays the file name with the JLX extension Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 331 Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays Page 332 Table 132 Configure Graphic Display fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Facility Assigned To Displays the name of facility where this graphic display is currently assigned This is a read only field Available Y Facility Commander Administration Guide Use
68. elements Field Name Description Processing State The processing state includes active bumped notified remote pending completed removed and purged Use the Selection Colors to define the colors when an alarm is selected on the Alarm Monitor client application Use Default Colors to define the colors for any alarm event that is not included in the list of alarm processing states Foreground Color This represents the color of the text in the alarm entry displayed on the Alarm Monitor Use a color definition that is easy to view Background Color This represents the background color of the alarm entry displayed on the Alarm Monitor Use a color that is compatible with the foreground color so the alarm entry is easy to view 4 Use the drop down lists to select the foreground and background colors for each type of alarm event Use the Tab key to move from field to field 5 When you are finished click Submit to save your changes Page 198 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 9 Configuring Alarms Creating Alarm Instructions Use the Configure Alarm Instruction page to copy or delete alarm instruction records gt To create custom alarm instructions follow these steps 1 Select Device Management 2 Select Alarm Instructions The Alarm Instructions list page shown in Figure 131 displays Alarm Instructions Instructions View edit add or delete alarm instructio
69. event type and when an alarm is generated the appropriate icon displays on the site map For example a scheme with icons representing doors in an alarm state may include a gray door to represent the initial state e red door to represent a set condition green door to represent a reset condition When an alarm is generated at the specific door access point the appropriate icon for the state condition displays on the map Refer to Creating a Symbol Scheme on page 291 for more information If you create site maps and link them in a hierarchal arrangement the associated icons on each level also displays the icon in its alarm state condition Refer to Building Hierarchical Displays on page 320 There are three ways to create a site map which are e Create map with the drawing tools provided by the Graphics Editor Using the drawing tools such as circles lines polylines rectangles and text entries you can create a site map ora graphical representation of your facilities Refer to Drawing Tools on page 305 for more information e Use an existing JPG or GIF graphics file Most professional drawing applications usually have the capability to save a drawing in a JPG or GIF format Refer to Create New Image Entry on page 302 for more information e Import DXF drawings created with AutoCAD Site maps and drawings with a DXF extension can be imported if they are saved in a DXF R12 format using AutoCAD Refer to Impor
70. facilities are highlighted Click Submit e If this item is already assigned to a facility listed in the Assigned To list press the Ctrl key before selecting the new facility assignment e To assign the item to all the listed facilities select the first facility in the list press the Shift key and select the last facility in the list All the facilities are highlighted Click Submit Page 260 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Configuring Intrusion DGPs Use the Configure Intrusion DGPs data gathering panel page to add edit copy and delete records Refer to the following sections for instructions e Viewing Intrusion DGPs on page 261 e Adding Intrusion DGPs on page 262 Viewing Intrusion DGPs gt To view intrusion DGPs follow these steps 1 Select Device Management 2 Select Intrusion DGPs The Intrusion DGPs page as shown in Figure 168 displays Intrusion DGPs Instructions View edit add or delete intrusion DGPs 4 Page 1 of 1 gt Go to a Go Items per Page 0 H Tag Name Description Reference ID Intrusion Panel DGP Number Figure 168 Intrusion DGPs page Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 261 Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Adding Intrusion DGPs gt To add an intrusion DGP follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then Intrusion DGPs The Intrusion DGPs page displays 2 Click Add Intr
71. fiso Figure 189 Configure Intrusion Outputs page 3 Enter the information described in Table 121 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages 4 Click Submit to save the record Table 121 Configure Intrusion Outputs fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Tag Name Y Enter a unique name to identify this item Use 2 36 characters Description Enter a description for this item Use 1 100 characters The description does not have to be unique Reference ID Enter a name to associate this item to a blue print or wiring diagram Use 1 20 characters Page 282 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices General Tab Facility Intrusion Panel ATS Panel x Output Number 1150 Figure 190 Configure Intrusion Outputs General tab 5 Enter the information described in Table 122 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 122 Configure Intrusion Outputs fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Intrusion Panel f Use the drop down list to select the intrusion panel associated with this intrusion outputs This number must match the area configured for this output Output Number f Enter the output number to represent this intrusion output Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 283 Chapter 13 Configuri
72. host name or IP address such as valid host name or IP address The host name is server3 domain com or Internet Protocol address for case sensitive Contact the 10 20 30 40 a device on the network System Administrator for assistance in specifying an appropriate value 00043 Value must be blank for this The operator specified a Set the value for the field to option value for a field that must be blank or change the value of blank empty based on the the other field value specified for another field Both fields are flagged with an error indicator and this error message 00044 Value must be entered for this The operator did not specify a Enter a value for the field or option value for a field where one was change the value of the other required based onthe value field specified for another field Both fields are flagged with an error indicator and this error message 00045 Minimum value must be less Indicates one or more than maximum value incorrect entries in the configuration files that specify minimum and maximum values for data entered by the operator The minimum value specified for a field must be less than or equal to the maximum value specified Examine the entries in the configuration files fieldValidations xml and eventActionCommandValidati ons xml and contact Customer Support for assistance if necessary Customers and business partners should not alter these files without specific instructions from Cu
73. is a link to Camera Preset list page This displays only the presets for the selected camera 5 Select Camera Presets The Configure Camera Preset list page as shown in Figure 101 displays 6 Select Add Preset The Configure Camera Preset configuration page as shown in Figure 102 displays Configure Camera Preset Instructions View or edit the camera preset Preset Information Tag Name NY Cam 100 PS 01 Description General Camera ID NY Cam 100 v Preset Number i Figure 102 Configure Camera Preset page 7 Enter the information described in Table 59 to identify the camera preset positions 8 Click Submit to save the record Table 59 lists and describes the fields on the Configure Camera Preset page Table 59 Configure Camera Preset fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Tag Name VY Enter a unique name to identify this item Use 2 36 characters Description Enter a description for this item Use 1 100 characters The description does not have to be unique Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 139 Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Table 59 Configure Camera Preset fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Camera ID Use the Camera ID drop down list to select the camera Refer to Configuring Cameras on page 132 for more information about adding a camera Preset Number gy Enter the number assigned to the preset position Page 140 Fa
74. it will no longer appear on the graphic displays when the alarm condition changes Status Bar Displays an icon indicating if the system with the Graphics Editor is connected to the Facility Commander server and the layer number currently active or visible e Green indicates the Graphics Editor is communicating with the server e Red indicates the Graphics Editor is no longer communicating with the server Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 14 Creating Symbol Schemes Creating a Symbol Scheme If you are creating a symbol scheme for an intrusion area refer to Creating an Intrusion Symbol Scheme on page 292 for more information gt To create a symbol scheme follow these steps 1 From the Facility Commander Launcher select Launch and Symbol Editor or select the Symbol Editor icon from the Editors toolbar The Symbol Editor window shown in Figure 192 on page 288 displays 2 Click the New button 3 Enter the name of the scheme in the Scheme Name field 4 Select the type from the Device Type drop down list The appropriate alarm state attributes and state conditions display for each device type 5 Click Browse to display the Attach window shown in Figure 193 E Look In statesymnots gt B l Ele cetvcameranoState gif intrusion2NoState gif Q doorForcedOpen gif D microNoState gif Q doorHeldOpen gif D microOffline gif D doorNormal gif Bi microOnline gif Q doorNoState
75. list to select the appropriate alarm Failed to Arm profile to use when a command is sent to arm an area and an active input prevents the operation This is the generated alarm Intrusion Area Use the drop down list to select the appropriate alarm State Armed profile to use when an area is armed and an input and In Alarm becomes active This is the generated alarm Page 274 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Facility Tab General Alarms Feu Assigned to Pae Available Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility Sample Region Facility West Coast Region Figure 182 Configure Intrusion Area Facility tab 7 Select the Facility tab as shown in Figure 182 and enter the information described in Table 116 A check mark indicates a required field Table 116 Configure Intrusion Area fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Assigned to Items can belong to more than one facility This is a read only field and cannot be edited Available Y Use to assign or change the facility membership for this item The facilities that display in this list depend on the operator s context and permissions e To assign the item to more than one facility select the first facility and press the Ctrl key while selecting the other facilities The selected facilities are highlighted Click Submit e If this item is already assigned to a facility listed in the A
76. of a door input input group or output Facility Commander provides the ability to synchronize descriptions so that the operator does not have to re enter the new description in Facility Commander For any device page click Synchronize results in displaying a list of devices whose descriptions are different from those of existing imported records in Facility Commander If an operator changes the facility of a record the facility must be changed manually on Facility Commander Because facilities in Facility Commander can have more complex relationships it is not possible for the system to make the necessary changes automatically Facility Commander synchronizes the device information between the selected Picture Perfect system and Facility Commander For more information refer to Synchronization on page 196 Terminology Table 24 lists and describes the Picture Perfect item names the corresponding Facility Commander names and description Picture Perfect Terms Table 24 Picture Perfect and Facility Commander terms Picture Description Facility Perfect Commander Doors Door Door Input Group for Door Forced Door Held Access and Badge Alarms Points Prepend AP to the Picture Perfect description Input Input Physical Inputs that have a one to one Digital Input relationship with their Input Group Prepend DI to the Picture Perfect description Input Group Multiple Dis tied to a single Input Group or Logical Log
77. or after noting the changes that deleted the same record This you had intended to make If problem can occur if two on a list screen use the operators attempt to update appropriate entry in the the same item at the same navigation menu to refresh time The first update attempt the list screen You may will succeed and the second observe that the item you will fail with this error were attempting to edit is no message This error can also longer present indicate a database If on an edit screen click the inconsistency or a software Cancel button to return to the problem list screen If the item is still present you can select its tag name or description to re edit it You may observe another operator changed one or more of the values Some of your intended changes may no longer be relevant If the problem persists examine the log file for evidence of a database inconsistency or a software problem and send the relevant information to Customer Support for assistance 00024 Attempt to delete data failed The requested updated Revisit the current list screen Data may have been updated operation failed most likely by clicking on the appropriate or deleted by another due to a situation where entry in the navigation menu operator another operator deleted the to determine if the item you same record were attempting to delete still This problem can occur if two exists If SO repeat the delete operators attempt to delete operatio
78. page 253 Ethernet Connection Encryption is available for Ethernet connections If you choose to use encryption enter the same encryption key as configured on the ATS panel The ATS panel uses the UDP IP protocol which unlike TCP IP is blocked from passing through network routers by many IT Departments The Facility Commander server and ATS panel should be located on subnets that allow UDP packets to be exchanged Configure this device using the Lantronix Device Installer application Table 98 lists the parameters Table 98 Device Installer Parameters Device Installer Parameters Serial Port Settings Serial Protocol RS 232 Speed 4800 Character Size 8 Parity None Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 251 Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Table 98 Device Installer Parameters Continued Device Installer Parameters Stopbit 1 Flow Control None Connect Mode Settings UDP Datagram Mode Disable Incoming Connection Unconditional Response Nothing Startup No active connection startup Dedicated Connection Local Port Installers choice Must match the panel configuration Flush Mode Input Buffer Line to Network On Active Connection Enable On Passive Connection Enable At Time to Disconnect Enable Flush Mode Input Buffer Network to Line On Active Connection Enable On Passive Connection
79. priority alarms Refer to Alarm Alert on page 207 for more information Launching the Video Console Automatically In addition you can configure Facility Commander workstation to automatically launch a Video Console when an alarm event occurs with associated video Each time an alarm event occurs within the specified priority range the Video Console launches and displays both live video and the recorded video clip of the event Intercom Stations Use Workstations to associate an intercom master station with a workstation The intercom device should be physically located next to the workstation When an operator logs onto the system using the specified workstation they are able to connect to another intercom station from the Alarm Monitor or Graphics Viewer If the workstation is not configured operators are not able to connect to any intercom stations using Facility Commander the connection must be dialed manually Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 45 Chapter 3 Configuring the System Viewing Defined Workstations Use the Workstations list page to view add edit copy or delete a workstation record Also use to edit the workstation record if you want to enable the Alarm Alert window gt To view workstation records follow these steps 1 Select System Administration 2 Select Workstations The Workstations page as shown in Figure 29 displays Workstations Instructions View edit add or delete wor
80. selecting the new facility assignment e To assign the item to more than one facility select the first facility and press the Ctrl key while selecting the other facilities The selected facilities are highlighted Click Submit e To assign the item to all the listed facilities select the first facility in the list press the Shift key and select the last facility in the list All the facilities are highlighted Click Submit Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 37 Chapter 3 Configuring the System Access Control Systems Facility Commander communicates with Picture Perfect access control systems The Access Control Systems list page displays the systems that communicate with Facility Commander Each record includes a tag name and description Facility Commander supports these Picture Perfect 1 7 or later configurations e Standalone system is the typical configuration with one Picture Perfect server that manages client systems and microcontrollers e Redundant system configuration operates with two servers one server acts as the primary and one server acts as a standby server Enterprise system consists of a network host and multiple subhosts Only subhosts can be configured to communicate with Facility Commander Viewing Access Control Systems Use the Access Control Systems list page to view add edit copy or delete a Picture Perfect server record gt To view the access control servers follo
81. site map you want to upload to the server From the File menu click Open and select the file you want to upload 2 From the File menu select Download or select the Download icon from the toolbar The Download window shown in Figure 202 on page 328 displays xi ait Available Server Displays NY Floor 01 x Figure 202 Download window 3 Select the site map from the drop down list and click OK The selected site map displays in the Graphics Editor drawing window When you are finished making changes to the site map upload the current file to the server so that it will be available to other Facility Commander client applications Page 328 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays Deleting Unused Files The process of creating symbol schemes and graphic displays is an art and during that process you may create some files that will not be used in your final product The Graphics Editor provides the capability to remove unused files which includes e Displays with JLX file extensions e Images with JPG JPEG or GIF file extensions gt To remove the files that are no longer needed follow these steps 1 From the File menu select Deleting Graphics Files The Deleting Graphics Files window shown in Figure 203 displays Graphics Files Type Displays w Graphics Files Found On Server 1st floor plan jix 1st floor plan 10_07 jIx f 1st floor plan 1203 jix 1st fl
82. size of the display and make it easier to trace the border Right click to end the path when you are finished and apply the scheme Adding Text Labels to the Site Map Font Toolbar Text Tool This feature allows you to add a text label to identify the building name identify a link to another site map or identify a particular symbol icon on the site map gt To add a text label follow these steps gt 1 Select the Text Tool icon on the Graphics Editor toolbar ila PARNASSUS AVENUE IRVING STREET loot 7 Ble AN foo o e Text Input l NY Main Bldg Floor 1 Ac Figure 185 Adding text to drawing in Graphics Editor window 2 Click in the drawing area where you want to place the text label The mouse pointer changes to a crosshair shape and the Text Input window as shown in Figure 185 displays 3 Enter the text to use a the label or description of the symbol Click OK 4 The text displays on the drawing area with an active border surrounding the text Select the text and move it to the correct position Use the Font toolbar to change the text attributes Use the Font drop down list to select the font Use the Size drop down list to select the font size Click the Bold icon to change the font to bold Click the Italic icon to change the font to italics Continue to the next section to save the site map Facility Commander Administration Guide Pag
83. stored Cameras Use the drop down list to identify the camera device used to record the video event Any video events from the specified camera display in the Camera column Text Search Results Use to enter the DVR token name identifying the video clip The token name can be up to 50 characters Displays the number of matches found camera tag name the start date time and end date time of the video event Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 7 Using the Video Console DVR General Playback Search Investigators and other operators may want to view previously recorded video for a specific date and time which is not necessarily when an alarm event occurs Facility Commander allows you to retrieve recorded video from the DVR which differs from retrieving only a marked video clip from an alarm event The DVR General Playback tab allows an operator to view recorded video by selecting a DVR a camera and a specific date and time gt To search for recorded video follow these steps 1 From the File menu select Video Search 2 Select the DVR General Playback tab The DVR General Playback tab shown in Figure 120 displays Video Search System Event Search DVR Event Search DVR General Playback DVR Motion Search Camera Selection Recorder VisioVVave v Cameras Search on Date and Time February x 2003 NA Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 sE 1 12
84. storing it on the DVR s internal hard disk The DVR provides access to stored video and live camera images using a standard ethernet connection Digital recording can improve playback quality over time lapse VCRs and eliminates the need to change tapes Refer to the following sections Adding DVRs on page 126 e Linking Cameras to DVRs on page 141 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Viewing DVRs Use the Digital Video Recorders page to view add edit copy or delete DVR records gt To view DVRs follow these steps 1 Select Device Management 2 Select Digital Video Recorders The Digital Video Recorders page as shown in Figure 89 displays Digital Yideo Recorders Instructions view edit add or delete digital video recorders 4Pageiofib Go to l Go Items per Page fio z IP Address or Hostname Online Link Cameras mjeren pes ECHE Tag Name l Description Reference ID Use to link camera with DVR Figure 89 Digital Video Recorders page Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 125 Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Adding DVRs gt To adda DVR device follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then Digital Video Recorders The Digital Video Recorders page displays 2 Click Add DVR and the Configure Digital Video Recorder page as shown in Figure 90 displays Configure Digital Video Recorder Instructions View o
85. the specified range of valid values 00037 Enter true or false The operator did not enter a value of true or false where one was required Enter the true or false 00038 Enter a number The operator entered a non numeric value where a numeric value was required Enter a numeric value 00039 Enter a valid URL such as http www someDomain com The operator did not enter a valid URL Uniform Resource Locator address A URL is a full path specification to an object on the network Enter a valid URL address Contact the System Administrator for assistance in specifying an appropriate value Page 422 Facility Commander Administration Guide Appendix C Error Messages Table 148 List of error numbers messages causes and actions Continued Message Causes Actions 00040 Enter a valid host name such The operator did not entera Enter a valid host name The as server3 domain com valid host name for a device host name is case sensitive on the network Contact the System Administrator for assistance in specifying an appropriate value 00041 Enter a valid IP address such The operator did not enter a Enter a valid IP address as 10 20 30 40 valid IP Internet Protocol Contact the System address for a device on the Administrator for assistance network in specifying an appropriate value 00042 Enter a valid host name or IP The operator did not entera Enter a valid
86. the Members tab as shown in Figure 45 on page 71 displays the items assigned to the facility 4 Click Submit to save the record Table 29 Configure Facility fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Tag Name Y Enter a unique name to identify this item Use 2 36 characters Description Enter a description Page 70 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 4 Importing Records Members Tab Members EEA Click to expand Access Control Systems folder _ gt S access Points AP 200101 NY COMPUTER ROOM AP 200200 NY SHIPPING DOCK AP 200301 NY CONFERENCE ROOM AP 200400 NY LIBRARY AP 200401 NY TRAINING ROOM Click to view the 1 ap 201100 NY B1 NORTH STAIR i i AP 201201 NY B1 WEST STAIR configuration page for AP 201300 NY B2 ACCOUNTING this item AP 201401 NY B2 DATA CENTER Analog Video Switchers QO cameras QO LI CCTY Monitors 1 Digital Inputs xl Figure 45 Configure Facility Members tab 5 Select the Member tab as shown in Figure 45 The Members tab lists all the items assigned to this facility Expand a folder to display the associated items listed by their tag name Select an item to view the configuration page Use the browser s back arrow to return to this page Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 71 Chapter 4 Importing Records Page 72 Parent Facility Tab Assigned to Available BOCA RATON East Coast Region
87. the Shift key and select the last facility in the list All the facilities are highlighted Click Submit Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 149 Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Configuring CCTV Monitors CCTV Monitors are used to display video from cameras connected to analog switchers Use the CCTV Monitors page to view add edit copy or delete CCTV Monitor records Refer to the following sections e Viewing CCTV Monitors e Adding CCTV Monitors on page 151 Viewing CCTV Monitors gt To view CCTV monitors follow these steps 1 Select Device Management 2 Select CCTV Monitors The CCTV Monitors page as shown in Figure 112 displays CCTV Monitors Instructions View edit add or delete CCTV monitors Add CCTV Monitor 4Pagelofirb Goto Go Items per Page is z Tag Name Description Reference ID ___ ES lL a S Lot 400 Monitor NY East Parking Lot Th BB west Lobby 200 Monitor NY West Lobby Figure 112 CCTV Monitors page Page 150 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Adding CCTV Monitors gt To configure CCTV monitors follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then select CCTV Monitors The CCTV Monitors page displays 2 Click Add CCTV Monitor and the Configure CCTV Monitor page as shown in Figure 113 displays Configure CCTY Monitor Instruction
88. the database you are using and enter the new host name and IP address Enter the same IP address if it is not changing Windows Operating System Y Edit the system configuration file Refer to Advanced Configuration on page 381 for more information va Change computer name in System Properties Refer to Changing the Computer Name on Server on page 390 for more information Y Change server name in SQL Server Refer to Changing the Server Name in SQL Server on page 391 for more information Facility Commander Clients va Edit the host file This step is only necessary if the customer is not using domain name service DNS server Refer to Editing the Host File on a Client System on page 387 for more information Y Edit the client properties file Editing the Client Properties File on a Client System on page 388 S Delete existing security certificates va Enable client encryption Refer to Changing the Client Encryption on page 387 for instructions to enable encryption Picture Perfect Server Y Edit the configuration file Refer to Editing the Picture Perfect Configuration File on page 388 for more information Y Recreate SSL certificates Refer to Picture Perfect External Interface Installation Guide for more information va Restart the Picture Perfect system for the changes to take effect Page 386 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 19 Advanced Configuratio
89. the i i A DOOR INT check box if i AWALL INT vi AFLOR FURR you do not xi DEFPOINTS want to import vi FR 2 HOUR the layer vi S NEW COL p A 96 INT Dim Invert black and white ori Rane Figure 188 Select Layers to Import window The Select Layers to Import window lists each of the multiple layers in the drawings To import all the layers click Import To import some of the layers clear the check boxes of the layers you do not want to import Only layers with check marks are imported The display area reflects the changes in layers as you select or clear the check boxes When the imported drawing is displayed you can re import the drawing immediately if necessary Right click on a path in the drawing or a border The shortcut menu in Figure 189 on page 317 displays This menu is not accessible again after you select the Edit option Select Re Do and the Open window in Figure 186 on page 314 displays The imported drawing s name is highlighted You can either re import the same drawing or select a different one Click Open to re import the drawing and the Select Layers to Import window shown in Figure 188 displays Click Open to re import the drawing Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays Maintain Layers in AutoCAD Drawings Layers created in Graphics Editor display with whit
90. this item is already assigned to a facility listed in the Assigned To list press the Ctrl key before selecting the new facility assignment e To assign the item to all the listed facilities select the first facility in the list press the Shift key and select the last facility in the list All the facilities are highlighted Click Submit Page 90 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 4 Importing Records Synchronizing Logical Inputs gt To synchronize logical inputs follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then Logical Inputs The Logical Inputs list page displays 2 Click Synchronize and the Synchronize page in Figure 65 displays Synchronize Instructions Choose from the available entries and click Synchronize Available LI 100100 BOCA LOBBY EAST LI 200100 NY LOBBY EAST LI 200101 NY COMPUTER ROOM LI 200200 NY SHIPPING DOCK LI 200300 NY LOBBY WEST LI 200301 NY CONFERENCE ROOM LI 200400 NY LIBRARY LI 200401 NY TRAINING ROOM Synchronize a y rs Figure 65 Synchronize page 3 Select the records that have changed on the Picture Perfect system that should be synchronized with Facility Commander 4 Click Synchronize Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 91 Chapter 4 Importing Records Viewing Digital Outputs Use the Digital Outputs page to view import edit copy delete or synchronize digital output records from Picture Perfect gt To view digital o
91. to assign or change the facility membership for this graphic display The facilities that display in this list depend on the operator s context and permissions Note When assigning this item to a facility listed in the Available list press the Ctrl key before selecting the new facility assignment e To assign the graphic display to more than one facility select the first facility and press the Ctrl key while selecting the other facilities The selected facilities are highlighted Click Submit e To assign the graphic display to all the listed facilities select the first facility in the list press the Shift key and select the last facility in the list All the facilities are highlighted Click Submit Chapter 16 Viewing Graphic Displays This chapter describes the how to use the Graphics Viewer to issue commands such as locking and unlocking doors enabling and disabling devices and more Readers should be familiar with using layers in the Graphic Editor client application In this chapter Overview on page 334 Navigating the Graphics Viewer on page 336 Issuing Commands on page 340 Customizing Window Name and Contents on page 347 Printing Graphic Displays on page 348 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 333 Chapter 16 Viewing Graphic Displays Page 334 Overview The Graphics Viewer is a client application that allows an operator to view graphic displays and issue commands The Graphics Viewer can be
92. to blink The operator clicks the icon to display the Florida map Page 320 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays e Florida is represented by a list of the facilities including Boca Raton Miami and others When an alarm occurs the facility name is configured to blink Operators select the name to view the graphic display e The Boca Raton graphic display represents the actual facility with associated access points and camera devices The door access point where the alarm occurred is configured to change to a red door icon gt To build hierarchical graphic displays follow these steps 1 From the Facility Commander Launcher window select Launch and Graphics Editor The Graphics Editor shown in Figure 177 on page 302 displays 2 From the File menu select Open The Open window displays 3 Select the top level map you want to use The file will have a JLX extension 4 Click the Create Hyperlink Area icon on the toolbar Move the mouse cursor to the drawing area the cursor changes to a crosshair shape Click on the drawing area to create the first point on the site plan Trace the object using horizontal vertical or diagonal lines created by clicking to create an anchor point and moving the cursor to the next anchor point Use the Zoom menu to increase the size and make it easier to trace an irregular shaped border When you are finished right click to end the path an
93. to record the video event Any video events from the specified camera display in the Token column Text Search Use to enter the DVR token name identifying the video clip The token name can be up to 50 characters Results Facility Commander Administration Guide Displays the number of matches found camera tag name the camera tag and token name and the time of the video event Double click the token name to play the recorded video Chapter 7 Using the Video Console DVR Event Search Use the DVR Event Search tab to locate video clips stored on the DVR devices by DVR event gt To search for previously recorded video clips follow these steps 1 From the File menu select Video Search 2 Select the DVR Event Search tab The DVR Event Search tab shown in Figure 119 displays Video Search System Event Search DVR Event Search DVR General Playback DVR Motion Search Recorder SymDec TE x Cameras F Start Date Feb 26 2009 End Date Feb 27 2009 Start Time 02 00 00 End Time 23 59 59 Search Type Alarm Event Text Results 4 matches found Num Camera Start Date Time I End Date Time I camera_04_01 02 26 09 02 02 23 02 26 09 08 19 34 camera_04_01 02 26 09 08 19 44 02 26 09 12 25 02 camera_04_01 02 26 09 12 25 02 02 26 09 15 40 36 camera_04_01 02 2609 15 47 48 02 27 09 08 33 50 Search Clear Cancel Help _
94. to validator page 421 00031 Criterion value is not correct type page 421 00032 Enter value for required field page 422 00033 Duplicate user name please try another page 422 00034 Text entered must be at least lt number gt characters page 422 00035 Text entered exceeds lt number gt characters page 422 00036 Enter a number from lt number gt to lt number gt page 422 00037 Enter true or false page 422 00038 Enter a number page 422 00039 Enter a valid URL such as http page 422 www someDomain com Page 410 Facility Commander Administration Guide Appendix C Error Messages Table 147 Error messages numbers and page number Continued Error Messages Page 00040 Enter a valid host name such as page 423 server3 domain com 00041 Enter a valid IP address such as 10 20 30 40 page 423 00042 Enter a valid host name or IP address such as page 423 server3 domain com or 10 20 30 40 00043 Value must be blank for this option page 423 00044 Value must be entered for this option page 423 00045 Minimum value must be less than maximum value page 423 00046 Camera linking or unlinking failed Camera assigned page 424 to another DVR input or DVR deleted by another operator 00047 Preset number in use please try another page 424 00048 Everything is imported for the facilities enabled in the page 424 window filter 00049 Errors occurred Move mouse pointer over X fo
95. up to disk instead of tape File usr informix etc onconfig e Defines the device file associated with the tape drive to use for database backups The default value is a link to the device file Parameter TAPEDEV Default value dev tape New value bud BackupUtility db_backup cpio Database Support Files Backup Use to identify the list of directories to include in a file system backup The file should contain one entry per line The entry should be the path to a directory or file to back up e When an entry identifies a directory the contents are recursively included in the backup The path may be relative to the root directory or absolute Page 402 Facility Commander Administration Guide File etc BackupUtility backup_paths Appendix A Edit Configuration Files for Informix Backup to Disk Editing the Informix Configuration File gt To edit the Informix configuration file follow these steps Use the instructions in Table 145 to edit the configuration file The instructions use vi as the text editor however you can use any text editor installed on the system Table 145 Edit configuration file Action Type Navigate to the directory cd usr informix etc Enter Open file with vi editor vi onconfig Enter Locate parameter Parameter TAPEDEV Move to this location dev tape Enter Delete each character in the XXxXxxxxxx Enter old parameter value by t
96. was lost The System Administrator should determine if the DVR could be accessed across the network Contact the network administrator for assistance 00013 Connection failed A connection to the DVR Verify that the DVR Cause lt text gt could not be established configuration is correct Also check that no other applications are connected to the DVR 00014 Recorder initialization failed A connection to the DVR Verify that the DVR could not be established configuration is correct Also check that no other applications are connected to the DVR 00015 Requested operation not supported The software was requested to perform an operation that is not permitted This message can be the result of an attempted security breach or a software problem Examine the system log file for evidence of an attempted security breach or a software problem and send the information to Customer Support for assistance Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 417 Appendix C Error Messages Table 148 List of error numbers messages causes and actions Continued Message Causes Actions 00016 Duplicate tag name please The tag name specified by The operator should specify a try another the operator is already in use different tag name When a for another item defined on manual deletion was the system This error can performed the system also occur if a manual administrator should be command line deletion ofa
97. 1 Select the appropriate graphic display Refer to Opening Graphic Displays on page 338 NY Computer Lab Control Toolbar arm Area Disarm Area Figure 214 Graphic display with an intercom device 2 Locate the intrusion area If the area is in an alarm state Right click the symbol to display the action menu The window shown in Figure 213 displays with the tag name and a list of actions available to the operator If the device is not in an alarm state Double click the symbol to perform the default action which is Arm Right click the symbol to display the action menu The Control Toolbar displays when the device is not in an alarm state Page 346 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 16 Viewing Graphic Displays Customizing Window Name and Contents gt To filter the items follow these steps 1 From the View menu select Window Filter The Window Filter window in Figure 215 displays Custom Title Boca Raton FL Facility Facilities a System Administrator Context K Global Facility CHICAGO East Coast Region NEW YORK Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility Sample Region Facility Unassigned Items Facility West Coast Region BEES SS RK Save Cancel Help Figure 215 Window Filter 2 Use the Custom Title field to identify a title to display on the Graphics Viewer title bar You can use up to 255 characters 3
98. 106 displays Configure Analog Video Switcher Instructions View or edit the analog video switcher Analog ideo Switcher Information Tag Name Kalatel Analog Switcher Description Reference ID pees ooo Model Addresses Advanced Alarms Facility Model yj i qaOotff Facility Commander Server Facility Commander Server z Time Zone GMT 05 00 EST EST ha Cancel Figure 106 Configure Analog Video Switcher page 3 Enter the information described in Table 60 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages 4 Click Submit to save the record Table 60 Configure Analog Video Switcher fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Tag Name v4 Enter a unique name to identify this item Use 2 36 characters Description Enter a description for this item Use 1 100 characters The description does not have to be unique Reference ID Enter a name to associate an item to a blue print or wiring diagram Use 1 20 characters Page 144 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Model Tab moase Addresses Advanced Facility Kalatel KTD 348 Facility Commander Server Facility Commander Server z Time Zone GMT 05 00 EST EST Figure 107 Configure Analog Video Switcher Model tab 5 Select the Model tab shown in Figure 107 and enter the information describe
99. 124 Viewing DVRS veccceecccseaticiscenvieectneeeeessceeees A 125 Adding DV RS orelas deai o ai AA ddan 126 Configuring Cameras eesseesseeesseeseesserssrsssrrsstrnsrrnsesnnsstnnennnennnnt 132 Viewing Cameras ceccecceteeeeneeeeceeeeeeaaeeeeeeeesaaaeseeaeeesecaeeeeaeeseaes 132 Adding Cameras 2 s cics scents teett ccmnite stand dain 133 Configuring IP Cameras cccccceeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeesaeesennees 137 Configuring Camera Preset Positions s es 138 Viewing Camera Preset Positions 0 0 0 cece eee esse eseeeeneeeeeeees 138 Adding Camera Preset Positions seeen 139 Linking Cameras to DVRS 0 ccceeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeseaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeesaeeseeees 141 Configuring Analog Video Switchers cccccescccesseeeeeereeeeseeeeeeees 143 Viewing Analog Video Switchers cccccceeeceeeeeseeeseceeeeeseeeeaes 143 Adding an Analog Video Switcher cccccceeeeeseeeeeteeeeeseeteees 144 Configuring CCTV Monitors oe ee eeee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeesaeesneeeaaes 150 Viewing CCTV Monitors 0 ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeecaeessnneeeeaes 150 Adding CCTV Monitors 0 ccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecaeeeeaeeeeeceeesnaeeeeaes 151 Associating Analog Video Switcher Devices s 153 Troubleshooting Steps ceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeaeeeeed 155 Configuration useine tie ia late eee 155 Client Path Settings ccceccsesesceececeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeesaeeesan
100. 2 Duplicate layer name 0 found Operation aborted page 436 00093 AutoCad DXF layer name 0 cannot be renamed page 436 00094 Value is not within the range 0 number integer to 1 page 436 number integer 00095 Enter a valid numeric range such as 1 100 or 1 page 436 20 25 30 50 00096 Range numbers must be in numeric sequence suchas page 436 1 5 50 60 70 00097 Value must contain only numeric digits page 437 00098 Intercom extension or exchange number is already page 437 assigned to 0 00099 Camera and preset information has been refreshedon page 437 the Monitoring tab 00100 Camera is not linked to a DVR page 437 00101 Intercom extension or exchange number length must page 437 not exceed 0 number integer digits 00102 Selected alarms require response information page 437 00103 Alarm requires response information page 437 00104 Other field values are inconsistent with this value page 437 00105 Tag name may be in use or invalid Please specify a page 438 different tag name 00106 Switcher configuration file syntax error or model type page 438 incorrect 00107 The input number is already in use for this area page 438 00108 The area number is already in use for this panel page 438 00109 Switcher configuration has already been imported page 439 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 413 Appendix C Error Messages Table 147 Error messages numbers an
101. 210 NY B1 DYR Presets m 6 nY Cam 300 NY B1 DVR Presets Figure 96 Cameras page Page 132 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Adding Cameras gt To add a camera device follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then Cameras The Cameras page displays 2 Click Add Camera The Configure Camera page as shown in Figure 97 displays Configure Camera Instructions View or edit the camera Camera Information Tag Name INY Carn 100 Description Computer Room Reference ID General Alarms Facility Linked to DVR NY B1 DVR DYR Camera Input 1 PTZ Controller NY B1 DYR Bus Address Aae Cancel Figure 97 Configure Camera page 3 Enter the information described in Table 55 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to add information on the tabbed pages 4 Click Submit to save the record Table 55 Configure Camera fields and description Field Name REQ Description Tag Name Y Enter a unique name to identify this item Use 2 36 characters Description Enter a description for this item Use 1 100 characters The description does not have to be unique Reference ID Enter a name to associate this item to a blue print or wiring diagram Use 1 20 characters Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 133 Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices General Tab
102. 7 00010 Video clip not found page 417 00011 Video source not available page 417 00012 Digital recorder not available Cause lt text gt page 417 00013 Connection failed Cause lt text gt page 417 00014 Recorder initialization failed page 417 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 409 Appendix C Error Messages Table 147 Error messages numbers and page number Continued Error Messages Page 00015 Requested operation not supported page 417 00016 Duplicate tag name please try another page 418 00017 Error performing database operation page 418 00018 Invalid value for parameter page 418 00019 Error accessing the database please try again page 418 00020 Deletion of predefined data not permitted page 419 00021 Requested data not found Data may have been page 419 deleted by another operator 00022 Attempt to save data failed page 419 00023 Attempt to update data failed Data may have been page 420 updated or deleted by another operator 00024 Attempt to delete data failed Data may have been page 420 updated or deleted by another operator 00025 Database read failed number of columns incorrect page 420 00026 Database read failed column data not of correct type page 421 00027 Database connection error page 421 00028 No database configured page 421 00029 Input value to validator is not correct type page 421 00030 Incorrect number of criteria provided
103. ACE TRUE RESEND_BUFFER_SIZE 256 Copyright C 2002 GE Interlogix All Rights Reserved eifevtmgr cfg eifevtmgr cfg 1 0 12 12 02 Supported Property Examples URL http hostname facilitycommander servlet net casi app AppHttpServlet PORT 8085 Default SSL port PORT 8443 KEEP_ALIVE FALSE MESSAGE_TRACE TRUE RESEND_BUFFER_SIZE 256 RANDOM cas db text random pem CERTIFICATE cas db text server cer URL nhttps bctrenegade FacilityCommander servlet net casi app AppHttpServlet PORT 8085 SSL Default Port PORT 8443 KEEP_ALIVE TRUE KEEP_ALIVE FALSE RANDOM cas db text random pem CERTIFICATE cas db text server cer MESSAGE_TRACE TRUE RESEND_BUFFER_SIZE 256 SSL_PASSWORD password Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 19 Advanced Configuration Updating EIF Request Manager Configuration File The following set of commands uses vi to modify the eifreqmgr cfg file to configure Picture Perfect to use SSL with Facility Commander You should make a copy of the configuration file in case you have to revert to the previous version cp eifreqmgr cfg eifreqmgr cfg bak The following properties need to be configured correctly to support SSL PROTOCOL RANDOM KEYFILE SSL_PASSWORD e The non secure protocol is commented out and the secure protocol is uncommented to use HTTPS e The SSL_PASSWORD is the same password used to generate the Pi
104. Action 28 A Digital Video Link cameras to DVRs Refer to Linking Cameras to Recorders DVRs on page 141 29 vd CCTV Monitors Configure the CCTV monitors Refer to Configuring CCTV Monitors on page 150 30 Y Analog Video Configure the analog video switchers Refer to Switchers Configuring Analog Video Switchers on page 143 31 va Inputs and Configure the inputs and outputs to use CCTV Outputs Monitors Associating Analog Video Switcher Devices on page 153 32 Y Intercom Configure the intercom exchange Refer to Adding an Exchanges Intercom Exchange on page 234 33 Y Intercom Configure the intercom stations Refer to Adding Stations Intercom Stations on page 241 34 Y Intrusion Configure the intrusion panels Refer to Configuring Panels Intrusion Panels on page 254 35 U Intrusion Areas Configure the intrusion areas Refer to Configuring Intrusion Keypads on page 266 36 Y Intrusion Inputs Configure the intrusion inputs Refer to Configuring Intrusion Inputs on page 276 37 Y Intrusion Configure the intrusion outputs Refer to Configuring Outputs Intrusion Outputs on page 281 38 Y Intrusion DGPs Configure the intrusion DGPs Refer to Configuring Intrusion Inputs on page 276 39 Y Intrusion Configure the intrusion keypads Refer to on page Keypads 284 40 Y Graphic Configure graphic displays to change the file name to Displays a tag name Refer to Editing Graphic Display Records on page 330 41 Y Event Action Configure Event Action Mapp
105. CS sce sii eae a T T 101 CHECKIISE seccieeeceesnertentenetetevedhckesceeetd iaueccemessiueweativyeecdenestdavecnbadiatee 101 Facility Permissions cececcceececeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceaneeceeeeeeeeeeneeeenenes 102 Using Pre Defined Facility Permissions n se 102 Viewing Facility Permissions cececeeeeeeneeeeeeenteeeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaes 103 Adding Facility PermisSiOns cccsceeeeeseeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaes 104 System Permissions cccccececeeeeeeeececeeeeeneeeseeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeseaeesennees 108 Using Pre defined System Permissions ssssseccreeeeeeerererene 108 Viewing System Permission c cccccseeeeeeeseceeeeeneeeseneeeenaeeseaes 109 Adding System Permissions ccccseeeeeereeeeceeeeeseeeeeneeesnaeeeeaes 110 COMUGXIS aiaiaaeo aa aa E eE aE AERE 113 Viewing Context Definitions ccccceceeeeeeceeeeceeeeeneeeseteeeeneeeeeaes 113 Adding Context Definitions ececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeees 114 Pre defined Contexts eccccccececeeenceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeseceeeeeeaeeeeeneeee 117 EKAMIS a E agape tac cee 118 Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices s sssessssussenusnnnnennnnns 121 OVENV EW nirsniarunirinnn eaaa dime as eel dase aana ieaS 122 Define digital video recorders o oo ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 123 Video DeVICES osnerisrir sone EA 124 Configuring Digital Video Recorders cccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeetennees
106. Click the Browse button to display the Choose Alarm Color window Select a color and click OK 9 Select the Launch New Window check box if you want the associated site map to display in a new Graphics Viewer window If you want the associated site map to display in the same Graphics Viewer window clear this check box 10 Click Save Page 322 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays Working with Layers Layers are defined as single transparent drawing surfaces that lay on top of one another much like pages in a notebook Layers give you the ability to see each layer through the others above it or see each layer individually Layers allows you to move or edit objects on any layer without disturbing the objects on other layers A graphic display can be created with multiple layers to group access points cameras and inputs When viewed using the Graphics Viewer an operator can choose to view all the layers or select a specific layer such as only access doors This improves visibility by hiding unnecessary details at a critical time Refer to the following topics for more information Creating a New Layer on page 323 e Selecting a Layer on page 324 Renaming a Layer on page 325 e Removing a Layer on page 325 Moving Objects Between Layers on page 326 Creating a New Layer When the Graphics Editor opens the drawing area that displays represents layer zero or the backgroun
107. Configure Intercom Exchange fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Tag Name Y Enter a unique name to identify the item Use 2 36 characters Description Enter a description for this item Use 1 100 characters The description does not have to be unique Reference ID Enter a name to associate this item to a blue print or wiring diagram Use 1 20 characters Page 234 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 12 Configuring Intercom Devices Model Tab medet Addresses Advanced Alarms Facility AlphaComDriver Facility Commander Server Facility Commander Server Time Zone GMT 00 00 GMT GMT lt Figure 147 Configure Intercom Exchanges Model tab 5 Select the Model tab as shown in Figure 147 and enter the information described in Table 88 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 88 Configure Intercom Exchange fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Model Y Use the drop down list to select the intercom exchange model name Facility Commander f Use the drop down list to select the Facility Commander Server server that controls communication with this intercom exchange Time Zone Y Use the drop down list to select the time zone where this device is located This time zone displays on the Alarm Monitor and Event Monitor The default time zone setting is GMT Facility Commander Administ
108. Context v Global Facility CHICAGO East Coast Region NEW YORK Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility o Sample Region Facility Unassigned Items Facility West Coast Region BRENNAN Figure 137 Window Filter window 2 Use the Custom Title field to identify a title to display on the Video Console title bar Maximum number of characters is 256 3 Select the check boxes to indicate the items you want to display in the client applications A check mark indicates the item is selected Clear the check boxes to remove the items from view 4 Click Save The Alarm Monitor displays a window filter icon in the status bar indicating the operator has reduced the number of facilities in their view Display Multiple Time Zones The Alarm Monitor can display up to four columns of time zones which include GMT operator server and device The device time zone represents the time zone of the devices associated with the alarm event gt To change time zones follow these steps 1 From the View menu select Options The Alarm Monitor Options Page 212 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 10 Using the Alarm Monitor window shown in Figure 138 displays Alarm Monitor Options x Columns Setup _ GMT Time isl Operator Time _ Server Time _ Device Time Event Type Save Cancel Help Figure 138 Alarm Monitor Options window Colum
109. Database Connection Pool Use the Database Connection Pool page shown in Figure 237 to view the following statistics Connection pool size Highest connection used Number of leases obtained Average lease time Number of lease waits Average lease wait time The Database Connection Pool page displays the date and time the last event was written to a log Use this page to reset the statistics and to return to the Diagnostics list page Database Connection Pool Instructions View Database Connection Pool Back to Diagnostics Home Page Reset Statistics Statistics Creation Time Mon Jun 28 11 26 24 EDT 2004 Connection pool size Highest Connection Used Number of lease obtained 3386 Average Lease Time 16 0 Number of leases waits 0 Average lease wait time o o Figure 237 Database Connection Pool page Page 372 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 18 Viewing Diagnostics Database Transactions Diagnostics Use the Database Transactions Diagnostics page shown in Figure 238 to view the following statistics e Transactions e Number e Average milliseconds e Minimum in milliseconds e Maximum in milliseconds e Commits e Rollbacks The Database Transactions Diagnostics page displays the date and time the last event was written to a log Use this page to reset the statistics and to return to the Diagnostics list page Database Transaction Diagnostics Instructions View Data
110. ENTER Figure 221 Start backup of files gt To begin the back up process follow these steps 1 Insert the tape in the tape drive wait for computer system to recognize the tape and press Enter The window in Figure 222 displays The list of files being backed up scrolls as the files are written to the tape Note On AIX systems the backup process begins immediately when Enter is pressed Failure to insert a tape use a read only tape or pressing the Enter key too early will result in a program error 2 If the number or size of the files is sufficiently large the tape will become full and you will be prompted to replace the tape This prompt is repeated each time a tape is filled to capacity In many cases one tape is sufficient and you will not see this message Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 355 Chapter 17 Backup Restore Informix Databases fusr informix etc Connect cr fusr informix etc connfiles fusr informix etc installce fusr informix etc sqlhosts fusr informix etc onconf ig fusr informix etc infos mlnserver fusr informix etc conf mlnserver fusr informix etc oncfe_mlnserver 0 fusr informix etc fco_log_full conf fusr informix etc fc_log_full sh fusr informix etc ac_conf ig std fetc BackupUtility fetc BackupUtility backup_paths fetc BackupUtility config fvar log BackupUtility fvar log BackupUtility F_200304061802 22 fvar log BackupUt ility F_200304071150 33 fusr BackupUtility
111. Figure 186 Import AutoCAD Drawings window 2 Select the drawing name you want to import The name displays in the File Name field Click Import The Drawing Limits window shown in Figure 187 on page 315 displays Page 314 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays View dimensions Other options ExtentsiLimits Ratio Origin Use extents Use limits EXTMIN x 1019 8858 EXTMINy 74983 EXTMAX x 850 0598 EXTMAX y 491 9589 Figure 187 Drawing limits window Use the Extents Limit tab to change the original coordinate system which is taken from the imported DXF file Use the Ratio Origin tab to indicate if the aspect ratio of the original drawing should be maintained Use the View Dimensions tab to convert the DXF file coordinates to coordinates used by the Graphic Editor Use the Other Options tab to select the Invert black and white check box Select this check box to change the color attributes If the text map is not visible such as a drawing with white ruling lines select the check box to invert the black and white attributes of the drawing 3 Click OK The Select Layers to Import window shown in Figure 188 on page 316 displays Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 315 Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays Page 316 Select layers to import M Layer Name l i A BUILDING WALLS EXT Clear
112. GE Security Facility Commander Administration Guide P N 460571003B ISS 19APRO9 Copyright Disclaimer Trademarks and patents Intended use Copyright 2009 GE Security Inc All rights reserved This document may not be copied or otherwise reproduced in whole or in part except as specifically permitted under US and international copyright law without the prior written consent from GE Security Document number revision 4605710038 April 2009 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE GE ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR INACCURACIES OR OMISSIONS AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITIES LOSSES OR RISKS PERSONAL OR OTHERWISE INCURRED AS A CONSEQUENCE DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY OF THE USE OR APPLICATION OF ANY OF THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT FOR THE LATEST DOCUMENTATION CONTACT YOUR LOCAL SUPPLIER OR VISIT US ONLINE AT WWW GESECURITY COM This publication may contain examples of screen captures and reports used in daily operations Examples may include fictitious names of individuals and companies Any similarity to names and addresses of actual businesses or persons is entirely coincidental GE and the GE monogram are registered trademarks of General Electric Facility Commander and logo are registered trademarks of GE Security Other trade names used in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of the manufacturers or vendors of the respective products Use this product o
113. Graphic Display or Symbol Editor If this problem occurs the image file cannot be used Choose or create another image file The operator must log off and exit the Facility Commander application to correct the CPU usage problem Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 407 Appendix B Troubleshooting Information Table 146 List of Common Problems with Possible Causes and Solutions Problem Possible Causes and Solutions Images imported from a non mapped This is a known problem with the JLOOX Graphics Engine network drive display as blank in the A workaround is to map a drive letter to the network location Graphics Editor and access the image from the mapped drive Video Console Video cannot be received from a There are several possible causes of the problem Examine digital video recorder DVR device the log file to obtain additional information 1 Verify that the host name or IP address specified for the DVR are correct and that communications with the device is working through the network 2 Verify that the password you specified for the DVR is correct Languages and Translations The user interface does not present This usually indicates that the language files were not data in the correct language as installed For the web browser interface the language files specified by the operator locale must be installed on the server For the client user interface the language fil
114. Linked to DYR NY BI DYR DYR Camera Input fi PTZ Controller NY B1 DVR v Bus Address a Figure 98 Configure Camera General tab 5 Select the General tab shown in Figure 98 and enter the information described in Table 56 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 56 Configure Camera fields and descriptions General tab Field Name REQ Description Linked to DVR Identifies the DVR where this camera is linked Refer to Linking Cameras to DVRs on page 141 for more information DVR Camera Input Identifies the DVR input associated with this camera PTZ Controller Use the drop down list to select the DVR that controls the PTZ device Bus Address Enter the value for the bus address Page 134 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Alarms Tab General Alarms Facility Camera Analytics Alarm xj Camera Trouble Alarm xi Motion Detection Alarm xi video Loss Alarm xj Figure 99 Configure Camera Alarms tab 6 Select the Alarms tab shown in Figure 99 and enter the information described in Table 57 A check mark indicates a required field Table 57 Configure Camera fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Camera Analytics Select the Camera Analytics alarm for this Alarm camera Camera Trouble Select the Camera Trouble alarm fo
115. List c 0 0 c0ecc lic R 224 System Events List 0 cccccccccseseseeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeesseeeessaeeesenees 225 Setting Event Monitor Options cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeessteeetenees 226 Changing the Event Types Filter 0 cc ceecseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeees 227 Event Types List c sccc cies estes n E eee geen eee 228 Customizing Window Name and Contents cccscccceessseeeeenees 230 Chapter 12 Configuring Intercom Devices 0sseee 231 OVOIVIOW oa eeccececeeeeceeceeceeeececeneeceeaeeeeaaeecaaeeseaaaeseeeeeseaeeseeneeessaeeseenees 232 TORMINQIOGQY sosise aa S 232 GhHecklist sriririsricr esnan coana ae aaa o ana araa 232 Configuring Intercom Exchanges ccccssceceeeeeeeseeseeeeeessaeeeeenees 233 Viewing Intercom Exchanges ceeesscceeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeeenenaes 233 Adding an Intercom Exchange eccccceeeeeseeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaaes 234 Configuring Intercom Stations ccccecceseeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeessaeesennees 240 Viewing Intercom Stations ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeees 240 Adding Intercom Stations 0 cccecceceseeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeseneeesnaeeeeaes 241 Tips for Creating Symbol Schemes ceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneeeeaes 246 Intercom Exchange Symbol Scheme cceeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeees 246 Intercom Master Station Symbol Scheme c ccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 247 Intercom Substatio
116. Lity 1 PP GLOBAL Sample Permissions and Contexts Sample Region Facility Unassigned Items Facility CameraMap N av i g at i on p IntercomMap intrusionmap RVING STREET w 2 z a 2 3 a H z amp 2nd Floor A Status Bar Text Label Symbols Hyperlink Symbol Figure 205 Graphics Viewer window Table 133 lists and describes the elements of the Graphics Viewer Table 133 Graphics Viewer window Element Description Title Bar e Displays Graphics Viewer and the window instance number Refer to Managing Multiple Windows on page 20 for more information e Displays the file name and custom window title Refer to Customizing Window Name and Contents on page 347 for more information Page 336 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 16 Viewing Graphic Displays Table 133 Graphics Viewer window Continued Element Description Navigation Pane Graphic displays are represented by a globe icon and are sorted in alphabetical order Click the globe icon to change the display The items that display in the navigation pane are determined by an operator s permission levels and context Splitter Bar and Pointers The Graphics Viewer is divided by a split bar with split pointers which can be used to change the size of the window Panes can be resized by moving the location of the splitter bar displayed between the panes or using th
117. P Address or Host Name Addresses Advanced Alarms Facility sarl2dvr12 Port fioza RS 485 Address p o ooo Auxiliary Address Auxiliary Port a ao Figure 92 Configure DVR Addresses tab 6 Select the Addresses tab shown in Figure 92 and enter the information described in Table 51 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 51 DVR fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description IP Address or Host Y Enter the DVR IP address or host name The Name host name is case sensitive Port Y Enter the port number Note If the Media server is installed on a Windows operating system and the firewall is ON all ports that are configured in the Digital Video Recorders page Addresses tab need to be added to the firewall exceptions list RS 485 Address Enter the RS 485 address For IP cameras enter 1 for the RS 485 address This is configured on the DVR and used for PTZ addressing Auxiliary Address If you are using a converter enter the address Auxiliary Port If you are using a converter enter the port number Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Advanced Tab User Name Password eeccee Confirm Password eeccee Status Polling Interval seconds 15 Command Retry Interval seconds 115 Figure 93 Configure DVR Advanced tab 7 Selec
118. Page fis x pictureofjamie J ag ame Description TA Boca RATON BOCA RATON ny i East Coast Region Includes Boca Raton and New York B Global Facility Contains all other facilities and their members B NEW YorK NEW YORK Th E PP GLOBAL PP GLOBAL fA Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility Contains sample permissions and contexts fA Sample Region Facility Sample region fA fies West Coast Region West Coast Region Figure 42 Facilities page Importing Facilities Select the access control facilities that you want to import The Picture Perfect Global Facility is renamed PPGLOBAL in Facility Commander The Global Facility in Facility Commander contains all other facilities gt To import facilities follow these steps 1 Select System Administration and then select Facilities The Facilities list page displays 2 Use the Server drop down list to select the Picture Perfect server with the facilities records you want to import to Facility Commander Page 68 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 4 Importing Records 3 Click Import The Import page as shown in Figure 43 displays Instructions Choose from the available entries and click Import Facility NEW YORK x Available LOS ANGELES SAN DIEGO eet te Figure 43 Import page 4 Select the destination facility where the imported facilities will be assigned You can se
119. Select the Facility tab as shown in Figure 157 and enter the information described in Table 97 A check mark indicates a required field Table 97 Configure Intercom Stations fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Assigned to Items can belong to more than one facility This is a read only field and cannot be edited Available va Use to assign or change the facility membership for this item The facilities that display in this list depend on the operator s context and permissions To assign the item to more than one facility select the first facility and press the Ctrl key while selecting the other facilities The selected facilities are highlighted Click Submit e If this item is already assigned to a facility listed in the Assigned To list press the Ctrl key before selecting the new facility assignment e To assign the item to all the listed facilities select the first facility in the list press the Shift key and select the last facility in the list All the facilities are highlighted Click Submit Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 245 Chapter 12 Configuring Intercom Devices Page 246 Tips for Creating Symbol Schemes Intercom stations have many states associated with them such as Intercom Master Call Answered Intercom Master Call Connected Intercom Master Call Ringing and many more Because there are so many states a system administrator could have a difficult time creati
120. Setup Tab Controls Monitors Devices Facility Permission one E Update Create Delete Operators o C o o Contexts O C O e C System Permissions Cc C O Cc C Facility Permissions o Cc 9 O C Facilities O C O c O Facility Commander Servers oj C C O C Workstations o C C Access Control Systems o 9 oO C Figure 77 Facility Permissions Setup tab 7 Select the Setup tab shown in Figure 77 For each permission such as Workstations select the appropriate permission level All permissions preceding the selected button are granted If Create is selected an operator has permission to view and update workstation records If View is selected an operator can only view workstation records and cannot modify or delete them 8 Review permission and select the appropriate permissions level Page 106 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 5 Assigning Permissions and Context Devices Tab Controls Monitors Setup Devices Facility Permission None iew Update reate Delete Access Points E C C C O a Digital Inputs o C O O C Logical Inputs c O C O Digital Outputs o 9 C Cc Digital Video Recorders Ce O O C Cameras o C e o r Intercom Exchanges Cc C 6 Intercom Stations c K c O Cc Analog Video Switchers Cc O CCTV Monitors ce oC O C C Intrusion Panels C Cc O O e aAa P r A xl Figure 78 Facility Permissions D
121. T 2004 Minimum Thread Pool Size Maximum Thread Pool Size Peak Number of Concurrent Threads Peak Threads Pending and Waiting For Service Elapsed Longest Pending Thread Wait Time msec a Current Number of Threads Assigned and Running Current Number of Threads Waiting to Run Assigned Threadpool thread 80 net casi platform management Manager 1342545 elapsed_runtime Assigned Threadpool thread 1 net casi platform diagnostic DiagnosticsManager DiagPipelineNode f2225f elapsed_runtime Assigned Threadpool thread 2 net casi platform core Timer ae97c4 elapsed ppb Figure 245 Thread Pool Diagnostics Page 380 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 19 Advanced Configuration This chapter describes how to customize the Facility Commander Launcher window verify the server s host name and change the host name Readers should be familiar with using a text editor application In this chapter Customizing Launcher Window on page 382 Verifying Computer Host Name on page 384 Changing the Host Name or IP Address on page 385 Enabling SSL Encryption for Picture Perfect on page 388 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 381 Chapter 19 Advanced Configuration Page 382 Customizing Launcher Window You can customize the Facility Commander Launcher window by changing the existing icons or by adding up to six additional applications such as WaveReader or any other applic
122. VR Event Search DVR General Playback DVR Motion Search Recorder Start Date Start Time Motion Area Kalatel 1 v Apr 5 2009 00 00 00 Camera End Date End Time camera _01_03 v Apr 5 2009 23 59 59 Undo Clear All Select All Camera Start Date Time End Date Time Text Type Figure 121 DVR Motion Search tab 3 Selected area shaded in red Search Clear Cancel Help Always on Top Enter the information described in Table 73 on page 174 to search for recorded video Search criteria includes recorder camera start date end date start time and end time Enter multiple values to narrow the search criteria Click and drag the cursor in the Motion Area pane to select an area to search This is the area within which the system will detect if motion has occurred The area selected will be shaded in red You can also click on Select All to detect motion in the camera s entire viewing area Click Clear All to remove all selected areas Click Search The number of matches found display in the Results pane Double click the result you want to view and the recorded video displays in the Video Console Click Clear to return to the default settings and remove any matches in the Results pane Click Close when you are finished viewing results Facility Commander Administrati
123. Video Console the additional panes are blank or inactive 2 To view video in an inactive pane select the frame and then select the camera from the navigation pane The control buttons reflect the active pane Double click any active frame to display a one up view ina separate Video Console If it is open already the Video Console moves to the foreground 3 To view recorded video see Viewing Recorded Video on page 165 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 177 Chapter 7 Using the Video Console Page 178 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 8 Event Action Mapping This chapter introduces the Event Action Mapping which allows you to select event sources and specify actions such as moving cameras to preset positions or tagging video events and more In this chapter Overview on page 180 Viewing Event Action Mappings on page 181 Tagging Video Events for Access Points on page 182 Tagging Video Events for Intercom Calls on page 183 Activating Digital Outputs on page 184 Events in Event Action Mapping on page 186 Actions in Event Action Mapping on page 190 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 179 Chapter 8 Event Action Mapping Overview Event Action Mapping is a powerful feature that allows system administrators to select event sources and program Facility Commander to take automatic actions For example when an alarm event is generated cameras can move to preset positions e mails
124. a blue print or wiring diagram Use 1 20 characters Page 82 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 4 Importing Records General Tab raphic Display NY Floor 01 7 Time Zone GMT 05 00 America New_York EST X Figure 57 Configure Digital Input General tab 5 Select the General tab as shown in Figure 57 and enter the information described in Table 35 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 35 Configure Digital Input fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Graphic Display Use the drop down list box to select the site plan to display when an alarm is generated for this digital input When a site plan is selected a globe icon displays on the Alarm Monitor and Event Monitor when an alarm event occurs indicating a site plan is available Time Zone Y Use the drop down list to select the time zone for this device This time zone displays on the Alarm Monitor or Event Monitor The default time zone setting is GMT Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 83 Chapter 4 Importing Records Facility Tab maiin Assigned to peo ens Available Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility Sample Region Facility West Coast Region Figure 58 Configure Digital Inout Facility tab 6 Select the Facility tab as shown in Figure 58 and enter the information described in Table 36 Table 36 Configure Digita
125. a_01_02 4P 169 1 0 DOOR 1_47LMFPA30 02 09 09 21 27 34 camera_01_02 camera_01_02 4P 169 1 0 DOOR 1_CSOUXLIYSP 02 09 09 21 24 23 F camera_01_02 camera_01_02 AP 169 1 0 DOOR 1_JQ7NNKSTID 02 09 09 21 14 04 camera_01_02 camera_01_02 AP 169 1 0 DOOR 1_SCMYPOGBA7 02 09 09 21 12 40 camera_01_02 camera_01_02 4P 169 1 0 DOOR 1_0OOB2EBFJA4I 02 09 09 21 03 01 camera_01_02 camera_01_02 4P 169 1 0 DOOR 1_HPMES4MUDN 02 09 09 21 01 15 camera_01_02 camera_01_02 4P 169 1 0 DOOR 1_USIAFGBYPZ 02 09 09 20 57 42 camera_01_02 camera_01_02 4P 169 1 0 DOOR 1_2N68TSI91F 01 22 09 17 02 11 camera_01_02 camera_01_02 4P 169 1 0 DOOR 1_Z42SFBKUDD 01 22 09 16 39 27 camera_01_02 camera_01_02 4P 169 1 0 DOOR 1_ZLQ PCV1ZK9 01 22 09 16 38 51 S Search Clear Cancel Help C Always on Top Figure 118 System Event Search tab with Select Date dialog 2 Enter the information described in Table 70 on page 168 to search for a video clip Search criteria includes start date start time end date end time event source event type recorder camera and text description Enter multiple values to narrow the search criteria to locate video clips 3 Click Search The number of matches found display in the Results pane Double click on the result you want to view and the recorded video displays in the Video Console 4 Click Clear to return to the default settings and remove any matches in the Results pane 5 Click Close when you ar
126. ad for more information Delete Use to delete a symbol scheme from the local computer x To delete a scheme from the Facility Commander server refer to Deleting a Symbol Scheme on page 295 Page 288 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 14 Creating Symbol Schemes Table 124 Symbol Editor fields and description Continued Continued Field Name Description Upload and Use to upload new or modified symbol schemes to the Download Facility Commander server be Use to download a symbol scheme from the server to the local computer to make changes After the scheme has been modified and you are ready to publish the changes click Upload Refer to Uploading a Symbol Scheme on page 294 and Downloading a Symbol Scheme on page 294 for more information Symbol Schemes Displays a list of previously defined symbol schemes in alphabetical order Scheme Name Use this field to enter a name identifying a new symbol scheme Use up to 128 characters Scheme names cannot contain any of the following characters A 2 lt gt Or Initial State Icon Displays the symbol representing the alarm in its initial state condition This symbol displays in the Graphics Editor Device Palette Refer to Device Palette on page 303 for more information Browse Click Browse to locate the folder with the symbols you want to use Refer to Figure 193 on page 291 Device Type Use this drop down list to s
127. aeesseeeessaeeesenees 404 Launch the Script Manually ceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeees 404 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page vii Appendix B Troubleshooting Information ccccecsseesneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 405 Contacting technical SUpport cecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaetees 408 Appendix C Error Messages sssseccsseseeeeeeeeneeeenseeeeeeeeeees 409 Appendix D Facility Permissions cccceesssseeeeeeneeeees 441 All Facility Permissions ecceeeeeeneeeeeeeeenneeeeeeenaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeneaees 441 Entry Level Guard Facility Permissions ccccseceeereeeesteeeeeeees 444 Guard Supervisor Facility Permissions ccccesceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 446 Intermediate Guard Facility Permissions n 448 Update Configuration Facility Permissions s 450 View Configuration Facility Permissions cccceeeseeeeteeeeteeees 452 Appendix E System Permissions cccscccssseeeesseeeeeeeeees 455 All System Permissions ccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeessaeeeteneees 455 Entry Level Guard System Permissions csccceecceeeeeeetteeeeeeees 457 Guard Supervisor System Permissions cccceeeeeeteeeeteeeeeeeeees 458 Intermediate Guard System Permissions Page viii Facility Commander Administration Guide About This Document This document describes Facility Commander and its components It a
128. age 234 Viewing Intercom Exchanges gt To view intercom exchange records follow these steps 1 Select Device Management 2 Select Intercom Exchanges The Intercom Exchanges page shown in Figure 145 on page 233 displays Intercom Exchanges Instructions View edit add or delete intercom exchanges 4Page 1 of i gt Go to Go Items per Page is x Tag Name Description Reference ID IP Address or Host Name Exchange Number Figure 145 Intercom Exchanges page Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 233 Chapter 12 Configuring Intercom Devices Adding an Intercom Exchange gt To add an intercom exchange follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then Intercom Exchanges The Intercom Exchanges page displays 2 Click Add Intercom Exchange The Configure Intercom Exchange page as shown in Figure 146 displays Configure Intercom Exchange Instructions View or edit the intercom exchange Intercom Exchange Information Tag Name j Description Reference ID Model Addresses Advanced Alarms Facility Model AlphaCam z Facility Commander Server Facility Commander Server z Time Zone GMT 00 00 GMT GMT ha Cancel Figure 146 Configure Intercom Exchanges page 3 Enter the information described in Table 87 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to add information on the tabbed pages 4 Click Submit to save the record Table 87
129. alarm Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 279 Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Page 280 Facility Tab General Alarms Figure Table 120 Configure Intrusion Inputs fields and descriptions Assigned to EN VOR Available BOCA RATON East Coast Region Global Facili PP GLOBAL Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility Sample Region Facility West Coast Region 187 Configure Intrusion Inputs Facility tab 7 Select the Facility tab as shown in Figure 187 and enter the information described in Table 120 A check mark indicates a required field Field Name REQ Description Assigned to Items can belong to more than one facility This is a read only field and cannot be edited Available Y Use to assign or change the facility membership for this item The facilities that display in this list depend on the operator s context and permissions e To assign the item to more than one facility select the first facility and press the Ctrl key while selecting the other facilities The selected facilities are highlighted Click Submit e If this item is already assigned to a facility listed in the Assigned To list press the Ctrl key before selecting the new facility assignment e To assign the item to all the listed facilities select the first facility in the list press the Shift key and select the last facility in the list All the facilities are highlighted Click Sub
130. ally by double clicking Player exe on the CD Note that the player program can take a long time to load when running it directly from the CD If you wish you may copy the contents of the CD to a hard drive and run it from there for faster response time Page 166 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 7 Using the Video Console Searching for Video Use the Video Search feature to search for video by system event DVR event DVR playback or area of motion in a camera s field of view System Event Search When investigating alarm events investigators or other operators may need to retrieve previously recorded video clips Use the System Event Search tab to locate video clips stored on the DVR devices by system event gt To search for previously recorded video clips follow these steps 1 From the File menu select Video Search The System Event Search tab shown in Figure 118 displays lt gt Video Search February w 2009 v System Event Search DVR Event Search DVR General Playback DVR Motio Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat 4 2 3 4 amp 6 fF Start Date Jan 1 2009 End Date Feb 11 2009 8 9 10 Ell 12 13 14 p 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 00 00 00 End Time 23 59 59 22 23 24 25 2 237 2 Recorder Camera Event Source Event Type f Ok Cancel Text Results 22 matches found Select Date dialog Num Camera Token i Time camera_01_02 camer
131. ame like System Administration and the menu expands to reveal the browser pages The menu is divided by tasks and function such as Environment to access the Window Filter and set operator preferences e Device Management to configure devices create alarm instructions event action mappings and more e Operator Administration to add operator records configure permissions and contexts e System Administration to configure Facility Commander and Picture Perfect servers workstations system parameters and more e System Diagnostics to view diagnostics used for troubleshooting Page 18 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 2 Getting Started Configuration Page Required Fields B GE Security Workstations Facilities Graphic Displays System Parameters Access Control Systems Facility Commander Servers Alarm Colors System Shutdown stem Diagnostics Browser Menu Current user Default System Account The configuration page as shown in Figure 9 allows you to enter new configuration information or edit existing records in the database The configuration page includes text boxes drop down lists check boxes and buttons Online Help Page Name Error Messages Version 2 2 108254 tc03 2009 02 06 10 47 56 Logout Help Administration Guide efine Workstation N49 Errors occurred Move mouse pointer over X for details atai or edit the works
132. ame position and display the custom title e The Graphics Editor displays the path name of the open file and window number using format 1 2 and 3 The path name follows the window number e The Alarm Response window displays the access point or device tag name and the alarm type An operator may have more than one alarm response window open at the same time Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 21 Chapter 2 Getting Started Customizing Window Name and Contents Use the Window Filter shown in Figure 11 to modify the current display of items displayed on the Alarm Monitor Event Monitor Video Console Multi Viewer and the Graphics Viewer This feature is used to limit the number of items that display in the navigation pane allowing an operator to view specific records such as those from New York and not from Boston or Chicago When an operator does not have permission to modify the items in the Change Window Filter the items are disabled The operator is able to view the items displayed in the window but not able to make any selections gt To filter items from view in the navigation pane follow these steps 1 From the View menu select Window Filter The Window Filter window in Figure 11 displays Window Filter Custom Title Boca Raton FL Facility Facilities System Administrator Context v Global Facility CHICAGO East Coast Region NEW YORK Sample Permissions and Contexts Fa
133. anced marms Facility l Access Control System Comm Failure Extemal Access System Comm Failure x Figure 26 Configure Access Control System Alarms tab 8 Select the Alarm tab as shown in Figure 26 and enter the information described in Table 18 Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 18 Configure access control System fields and description Field Name REQ Description Access System Use the drop down list to select the alarm that will Comm Failure activate when Facility Commander is unable to communicate with the access control system The items that appear in this list are defined in Alarm Profiles Refer to Creating Alarm Profiles on page 201 for more information Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 43 Chapter 3 Configuring the System Page 44 Facility Tab Address External System Advanced Alarms Facitty Assigned to a Available BOCA RATON CHICAGO DALLAS East Coast Region Global Facility LOS ANGELES PP GLOBAL Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility Sample Region Facility Figure 27 Configure Access Control Facility Tab 9 Select the Facility tab as shown in Figure 32 and enter the information described in Table 19 Table 19 Configure Access Control fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Assigned to Displays the facility or facilities for this workstation Items can belong to more than one facility This is a read on
134. ands such as locking and unlocking doors In this chapter Overview on page 56 Operator Records on page 58 Facilities on page 67 Window Filter on page 73 Access Points on page 74 Digital Inputs and Outputs on page 80 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 55 Chapter 4 Importing Records Page 56 Overview Importing Picture Perfect records allows the system administrator to identify which records to integrate with Facility Commander Before records are added to the Facility Commander database follow these steps Y Create an operator account for the Facility Commander administrator and remove the default operator account Refer to Adding Operators on page 60 for instructions Y Import facilities from Picture Perfect When you import facilities before importing any other records future imported records are assigned to the correct facility To prevent creating duplicate records there are two instances when you cannot import an existing record which are e When the record is added manually to Facility Commander using the Web browser interface e When the record has already been imported into Facility Commander the same record cannot be imported a second time After a record is deleted from the Facility Commander database the record is immediately available to import again Tag Names Descriptions and Record IDs Facility Commander uses tag names descriptions and reference IDs to identify i
135. appropriate Visible check boxes and the Graphics Editor displays the selected layers To view all the layers select all the check boxes 3 To modify a layer select the appropriate Active check box The Graphics Editor displays the active layer The remaining layers are visible while you make changes to the selected layer To view all the items on the active layer select the Edit menu and then Select All All the items on this layer are highlighted 4 To rearrange the layers click Move Down or Move Up 5 Click Close when you are finished making changes Page 324 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays Renaming a Layer gt Toremove a layer follow these steps 1 From the Layer menu select Rename Layer and the window in Figure 198 displays The New Layer Name field displays the current layer name CE x Old Layer Name New Layer Name cameras OK Cancel Figure 198 Rename Layer window 2 Type the new name in the New Layer Name field Each layer name should be unique and no longer than 64 characters If the name is longer the extra characters will be truncated The layer name is case sensitive Imported layers cannot be renamed 3 Click OK Removing a Layer If you create too many layers or if you do not need all the layers in the graphic display you can remove the extra layers The last layer cannot be removed gt To remove a la
136. are no incremental backups the program continues to the next step which is to restore the database Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 361 Chapter 17 Backup Restore Informix Databases Restore Database When the program begins to restore the Informix database a long pause occurs A window displays during this pause J root minserver Shell Konsole Beginning database restore Please be VERY patient Please mount tape 1 on dev tape and press Return to continue E Figure 228 Wait for database tape to be loaded gt To begin the restore process follow these steps 1 Insert the tape in the tape drive wait for computer system to recognize the tape and press Enter The program reads information from the tape and displays the details in the window as shown in Figure 229 la x ci J root minserver Shell Konsole ps 1 on sfx Archive CheckPoint Time 04 07 2003 14 19 48 Dbspaces flags fchunk nchunks flags owner i t N informix informix informix chk dbs offset size free bpages flags pathname 1 1 4 256000 190360 P0 fdev informixdb masterdbs 2 2 90 102400 96855 Po 1d2 informixdb DataGroup 3 3 0 1048575 731592 P0 1d3 informixdb HistoryGroupd 4 3 0 1048575 1048572 Po 1d3 informixdb HistoryGroupt Continue restore u nolll Figure 229 Restore details Page 362 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 17 Backup Restore Informix Databases 2 Type Y w
137. arm include the conditions set and reset Each state attribute and state condition is represented on the site map by a different symbol such as e initial state is represented by a gray door icon e set condition is represented by a red door icon e reset condition is represented by a green door icon Refer to State Associations and Conditions on page 295 for a complete list Before you can associate the symbols with event point types you need to import access points inputs input groups and outputs from Picture Perfect Refer to Importing Records on page 55 for more information When the devices are imported the system administrator selects which graphic display to use when an alarm event is generated To create site maps and link alarms use the following tools Symbol Editor allows you to associate device types such as access points and cameras with symbols representing alarm state conditions Use the Symbol Editor to create delete save upload and download symbol schemes Refer to Using the Symbol Editor on page 287 for more information e Graphics Editor allows you to place symbols representing devices such as doors and cameras and more on site maps Start with a floor plan and place symbols on the map to indicate their location and then link these symbols to event sources In addition you can add text to create labels and print the site maps Refer to Using the Graphics Editor on page 301 for more information
138. as F to complete a full backup I to complete an incremental backup This menu is also used to restore a backup or to exit this program Page 352 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 17 Backup Restore Informix Databases Informix Database The Informix database is backed up using the ontape utility application When the backup procedure is started the window in Figure 218 displays Ss D root minserver Shell Konsole BEE Commencing Level backup of the database Please mount tape 1 on dev tape and press Return to continue He ee Figure 218 Starting a full level database backup gt To begin the tape backup process follow these steps 1 Insert the tape in the tape drive wait for computer system to recognize the tape and press Enter The window in Figure 219 displays A message displays stating the type of backup Level O indicates a full backup while Level 1 indicates an incremental backup Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 353 Chapter 17 Backup Restore Informix Databases Commencing Level O backup of the database Please mount tape 1 on dev tape and press Return to continue 100 percent done Record the IDs of the Please label this tape as number 1 in the arc tape sequence logical logs to the backup This tape contains the following logical logs on the tape label _ Program over Ejecting media Figure 219 Database backup compl
139. as the root user 2 Enter the command cd usr Informix bin update 3 Enter the command sh update Importing data from a Picture Perfect system fails 1 Verify proper network communications between the Facility Commander and Picture Perfect servers Remember to verify that the DNS Domain Name Server is providing correct translation of host names to IP addresses when dynamic IP addressing is used on the network For Unix systems verify the host name entries in the etc hosts file 2 Verify that the Facility Commander license enables access to Picture Perfect systems and the database Examine the log file to determine this 3 Verify that the Facility Commander database record defining the Picture Perfect system has the correct user name and password to successfully log into the Picture Perfect system Examine the log file to determine this 4 Verify that the correct version of the eif External Interface package has been installed on the Picture Perfect system and that it has also been licensed on that system Examine the log file on the Picture Perfect system to determine this 5 Examine the Facility Commander server log file to see if a warning message is present indicating that there is a mismatch between the versions of the Facility Commander and Picture Perfect software If this is the case contact Customer Support for assistance 6 If encryption has been enabled between the Facility Commander and Picture Perfect ser
140. ation you use often The Facility Commander Launcher on Window client systems is modified by changing to the client properties file refer to e Adding Custom Icons Adding External Applications on page 383 Adding Custom Icons To add custom icons to the Launcher window follow these steps 1 On the Facility Commander client system open the client properties file using a text editor such as Notepad The client properties file is found in a directory similar to this C Program Files FacilityCommanderClient lib resources The path may differ depending on where Facility Commander was installed on the system 2 Enter the text shown in Table 139 for each icon you want to change Table 139 Add Custom Icons to Launcher window Application Alarm Monitor Add this text to client properties file workspace icon alarmMonitor c myPath myIcon gif Event Monitor Video Console workspace icon eventMonitor c myPath myIcon gif workspace icon cctvMonitor c myPath myIcon gif Graphic Viewer workspace icon graphicViewer c myPath myIcon gif Main Viewer workspace icon mainViewer c myPath myIcon gif Graphic Editor workspace icon graphicEditor c myPath myIcon gif Symbol Editor workspace icon symbolEditor c myPath myIcon gif Web Report Viewer Facility Commander Administration Guide workspace icon webReportViewer c myPath myIcon gif Chapter 19 Advanced Co
141. ayer sososssin iaasa AEA AERA AREARE 325 Removing a Laye ecneneso enin an S 325 Moving Objects Between Layers ccccceecceceseeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeetees 326 Managing Graphic Display Files 0 cccseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 326 Uploading Graphic Displays ccccccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 326 Downloading Graphic Displays cccccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeessneeeeeees 328 Deleting Unused Files ceeccccceeseccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeensneeeeeensenees 329 Editing Graphic Display Records ccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeetaaeeneees 330 Chapter 16 Viewing Graphic Displays cssssseeeeeeees 333 OVEIVICW eich Faistediciael Mein iated ens adi aoaia 334 Alarmi States css hecs ee dedbee ase Greece cecteesndveragsachedeededsaapesadiiaeceaavenaleed 335 Navigating the Graphics Viewer cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 336 Opening Graphic Displays cceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeseeeeeettaeeeeeeeees 338 Selecting Layers s ais e cceendhessie tessa niaaa ndia 339 ISSUING COMMANAS ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeseaeeesaaeeseeueeeenaaeeniees 340 Lock and Unlock Doors sscc cdee aie eee te 341 View Video from a Specific Camera cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneeees 342 View Video from Monitor Devices o oo see eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 343 Enable or Disable Input Devices eeecceeeeenneeeeeeeeteeeeeeeaees 344 Connect and Discon
142. base Transaction Diagnostics Back to Diagnostics Home Page Reset Statistics Statistics Creation Time Mon Jun 28 11 26 24 EDT 2004 Transaction Average Minimum Maximum milliseconds milliseconds milliseconds 60 60 All Transactions a 60 0 net casi datalayer transactions OperatorHistoryTransactions insert 1 60 0 60 60 ch lo Figure 238 Database Transactions Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 373 Chapter 18 Viewing Diagnostics Database Queries Diagnostics Use the Database Query Diagnostics page shown in Figure 239 to view the following statistics e Query name e Number e Average milliseconds e Minimum milliseconds e Maximum milliseconds The Database Query Diagnostics page displays the date and time the last event was written to a log Use this page to reset the statistics and to return to the Diagnostics list page Database Query Diagnostics Instructions View Database Query Diagnostics Back to Diagnostics Home Page Reset Statistics Statistics Creation Time Mon Jun 28 11 26 24 EDT 2004 All Queries SELECT id tag_name description reference_id timestamp timezone_key model address port rs485_address converter_address converter_port video_standard stat_poll_interval retries_poll_interval video_tagging_timeout number_of_inputs server_id username password running FROM dymr Average Minimum milliseconds milliseconds millis
143. be filtered to view selected facilities gt To filter facilities from view in the navigation pane follow these steps 1 Right click in the navigation pane and then select Window Filter The window filter in Figure 123 displays Window Filter x Custom Title Boca Raton FL Facility Facilities System Administrator Context Z Global Facility 7 CHICAGO v East Coast Region V NEW YORK v Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility v Sample Region Facility v Unassigned Items Facility v West Coast Region Figure 123 Window Filter window Page 176 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 7 Using the Video Console 2 Use the Custom Title field to identify a title to display on the Video Console title bar The maximum number of characters is 256 3 Select or clear the check boxes next to the facilities you want to display or hide from view in the navigation pane A check mark indicates the item is selected 4 Click Save The Video Console displays a window filter icon in the status bar indicating the list of items has filtered Display Additional Video Panes gt To display video in more than one video pane follow these steps 1 From the View menu select 2 Up or another number The Video Console displays two video panes The Video Console can display one two four nine or sixteen video panes When increasing the number of panes in the
144. ber since you may open more than one occurrence of the Multi Viewer Refer to Managing Multiple Windows on page 20 for more information Program Menu Bar The menu bar displays the menu names specific to the active pane Some menus contain similar commands such as Open Exit and Help Each program menu bar is different for each program For example the Alarm Monitor menu allows you to select columns customize the toolbar and display the various commands required for alarms Navigation Pane Program Title Bar Program Panes Split Bars and Pointers The navigation pane provides a hierarchal tree structure view of the links and group members When you are using a client application the navigation pane displays the facilities and items you have permission to access Double click on any item in the navigation pane to select the item Displays the client application name such as Alarm Monitor with the window instance number Refer to Client Application Title Bars on page 21 for more information Each pane represents separate viewing areas which allow multiple programs such as the Video Console the Graphics Viewer and the Alarm Monitor to display within a single window Columns within the pane can be resized by dragging either side of the column to its new position Each pane is divided by a split bar with split pointers which can be used to change the size of the window Panes can be resized by moving the location o
145. bes the fields on the Configure Mapped Event page Table 74 Configure Mapped Event fields and descriptions Event Source Event Type Condition Access Control Access System Comm Set Reset Failure Analog Switcher Analog Switcher Offline Set Reset Camera Video Loss Alarm Set Reset Motion Detection Alarm Set Reset Digital Input Input Alarm Set Reset Tamper Digital Video Recorder Digital Video Recorder Set Reset Comm Fail External Media Server Remote Media Server Set Reset Comm Failure History Table Rollover Table Rollover Event Set Intercom Exchange Intercom Exchange Set Reset Comm Failure Alarm Intercom Exchange Set Reset Alarm Intercom Exchange Set Reset Alarm Event Intercom Master Station Intercom Master Call Set Answered Intercom Master Call Set Connected Intercom Master Call Set Ringing Intercom Master Call To Set Busy Intercom Master Call To Set Private Intercom Master Busy Set Intercom Master Set Facility Commander Administration Guide Disconnected Chapter 8 Event Action Mapping Table 74 Configure Mapped Event fields and descriptions Continued Event Source Event Type Condition Intercom Master Reset Set Intercom Substation Intercom Substation Call Set Connected Intercom Substation Call Set Ringing Intercom Substation Call Set To Busy Intercom Substation Call Set To Private Intercom Substation Call Set R
146. ble 12 Configure Facility Commander Server fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Remote Media Use the drop down list to select the alarm that will activate Server Comm when the system is unable to communicate with the Media Failure server The items that appear in this list are defined in Alarm Profiles Refer to Creating Alarm Profiles on page 201 for more information Page 36 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 3 Configuring the System Facilities Tab Address E mail Server Advanced Alarms Facility Assigned to i YORK Available BOCA RATON CHICAGO DALLAS East Coast Region Global Facility LOS ANGELES PP GLOBAL Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility Sample Region Facility Figure 20 Configure Facility Commander Server Facilities tab 9 Select the Facilities tab as shown in Figure 20 and enter the information described in Table 13 A check mark indicates a required field Table 13 Configure Facility Commander Server fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Assigned to Displays the facility or facilities for this server Items can belong to more than one facility Available Y Use to assign or change the facility membership for this item The facilities that display in this list depend on the operator s context and permissions If this item is already assigned to a facility listed in the Assigned To list press the Ctrl key before
147. button to return you to that is already in use by the list screen where the another preset defined for the currently defined preset camera numbers for the camera are shown 00048 Everything is imported for the No data was available for 1 All data was imported facilities enabled in the window filter import when the operator clicked the Import button The cause of the unavailability if known is displayed in the error message line The most likely causes and actions to take are listed below already no further action is required 2 Window filter had disabled facilities enable the other facilities and retry the import operation 3 Communications network error retry the import operation 4 License expired log in again and retry the import operation Page 424 Facility Commander Administration Guide Appendix C Error Messages Table 148 List of error numbers messages causes and actions Continued Message Causes Actions 00049 Errors occurred Move mouse There were two or more Correct each error and retry pointer over X for details values entered by the the operation operator that were not valid This message is displayed in the error message line The specific error messages are shown for each field in error 00050 Screen definition error The configuration file Restore the listScreens xml Request could not be specifying the screen and editScreens xml screen performed conte
148. cation be down or there may be problems network communication Retry the operation when the problems server is up and network communications have been restored If the problem persists the System Administrator should examine the server log file and if necessary contact Customer Support for assistance 00077 Error in getting symbol schemes from server The attempt to retrieve the symbol files associated with the specified graphic display from the Facility Commander server failed The server may be down or there may be network communication problems Contact the System Administrator to determine if the server is down or there are network communication problems Retry the operation when the server is up and network communications have been restored If the problem persists the System Administrator should examine the server log file and if necessary contact Customer Support for assistance Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 431 Appendix C Error Messages Table 148 List of error numbers messages causes and actions Continued Message Causes Actions 00078 Error in getting palettes from The attempt to retrieve the Contact the System server symbol palette files Administrator to determine if associated with the specified the server is down or there graphic display from the are network communication Facility Commander server problems failed The server may be Retry the operation when the
149. ce if there is any difficulty Readers should use the vendor s documentation for instructions on how to use their products For information about device drivers refer to the vendor s Release Notes In this chapter Overview on page 122 Configuring Digital Video Recorders on page 124 Configuring Cameras on page 132 Configuring Cameras on page 132 Configuring IP Cameras on page 137 Configuring Camera Preset Positions on page 138 Linking Cameras to DVRs on page 141 Configuring Analog Video Switchers on page 143 Configuring CCTV Monitors on page 150 Associating Analog Video Switcher Devices on page 153 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 121 Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Page 122 Overview The digital video features in Facility Commander allow operators to view live and recorded video select and control different cameras direct cameras to a preset position and mark a video clip to playback later Refer to the following checklist for the configuration order to add media devices to Facility Commander Y Configure the Digital Video Recorders DVRs Refer to Configuring Digital Video Recorders on page 124 Configure the cameras Refer to Configuring Cameras on page 132 for more information Y Y Y Identify the preset camera positions Refer to Configuring Camera Preset Positions on page 138 for more information Link the cameras to the Digital Video Recorders DVRs Refer to Link
150. cess to a system administrator select All Facility Permissions Other contexts should limit access to this facility To grant partial access to a regional system administrator select No Facility Permissions at the Global Facility and select All Facility Permissions at the Regional Facility Unassigned This facility contains all newly created facility based items Items Facility When the new facility is assigned to its correct facility it is automatically removed from the Unassigned Items Facility Permissions Tab Permissions CECT Facilities Facility Permissions I Global Facility x C East Coast Region Doo NEW YORK A E Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility Loo Sample Region Facility Entry Leve sard Facility Perms 7 C unassigned Items Facility Loo West Coast Region E Figure 86 Define Context Permissions tab 4 Select the Permission tab shown in Figure 86 to choose one or more permissions to associate with this context definition Refer to Adding Facility Permissions on page 104 for more information Continue to enter information on the next tabbed page Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 115 Chapter 5 Assigning Permissions and Context Facility Tab Permissions cc Assigned to pane Permissions and Contexts Facility Available A RATON East Coast Region Global Facilit NEW YORI PP GLOBAL Hold the Ctrl key down for multiple selection Figure 87 D
151. characters Description Enter a description for this item Use 1 100 characters The description does not have to be unique Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 47 Chapter 3 Configuring the System Page 48 General Tab Hostname foctjlennon Time Zone GMT 05 00 America New_York EST nd M alarm Alert Enabled M auto Video Popup Enabled Intercom Station NY Intercom Bldg 1_Master Figure 31 Workstations General tab 5 Select the General tab as shown in Figure 31 and enter the information described in Table 21 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 21 Define Workstations fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Host Name vd Enter the workstation host name The host name is case sensitive Note The host name must be entered exactly as the hostname command returns it Time Zone Y Use the drop down list to select the time zone for this server This time zone displays on the Alarm Monitor and Event Monitor The default time zone setting is GMT Alarm Alert e Select this check box to enable the Alarm Alert window Enabled to display on this workstation when an alarm occurs e Clear the check box if you do not want the Alarm Alert window to display Auto Video e Select this check box to enable the Video Console to Popup Enabled automatically display on this workstation when an alarm occurs e Clear the
152. cility Sample Region Facility Unassigned Items Facility West Coast Region N NNN Save Cancel Help Figure 11 Window Filter window 2 Use the Custom Title field to identify a title to display on the Video Console title bar Maximum number of characters is 256 3 Select the check boxes to indicate the items you want to display in the navigation pane of the client application A check mark indicates the item is selected Clear the check boxes to remove the items from view 4 Click Save The client application displays a window filter icon in the status bar indicating the list of items has changed Page 22 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 2 Getting Started Error Messages Facility Commander displays error messages when the information being entered is incorrect or an option selected by an operator is not a valid action The Facility Commander configuration pages shown in Figure 12 display the error message number tabbed page and fields in an error condition In the example below there are multiple errors such as e 0049 Errors Occurred Move mouse pointer over X s for details e The text on the Addresses and Facility tabs turns red to identify the tabbed pages with errors e A red asterisk displays next to the field name to identify the location of the error The error could be caused by missing or invalid information e A tooltip displays the specific erro
153. cility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Linking Cameras to DVRs The Link Cameras page is used to link the cameras with DVRs The number of cameras is determined by the number of inputs usually 32 and is configured using the Configure Digital Video Recorder page gt To link the cameras to the DVR device follow these steps 1 Select Device Management 2 Select Digital Video Recorders The Digital Video Recorders page as shown in Figure 103 displays Digital Video Recorders Instructions View edit add or delete digital video recorders Add DVR 4Pagelofib Goto Go Items per Page fio x ny NY B1 DYR 3 18 148 51 Use to link a camera with a DVR Figure 103 Digital Video Recorders page 3 Click Link Cameras The Link Cameras page in Figure 104 on page 142 displays Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 141 Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Instructions Link Cameras to DYR Select the camera that is connected to each input of the DYR DYR Camera Input Linked Camera Input 1 nvcamtoo SC C C C C CCCCCCUCU WN Input 2 nyCam200 C J Input 3 caman Input 4 nyCcam300 lt C sS C C C S Yd Input 5 gy Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 13 Input 14 z Input 15 E E Submit Cancel Figure 104 Link Cameras page 4 Use the drop down lists to se
154. ck on that DVR in the navigation pane and select Browse This will take you to the manufacturer s configuration website for this DVR The login information will differ depending on the manufacturer 2 Navigate to the page where you will identify the IP camera for this DVR For Sym devices this can be configured on the Camera page 3 Enter the IP address of the IP camera in the Source Address field and then click Save To associate an IP camera to a DVR follow these steps 1 In the navigation pane right click on the IP camera you want to configure and then select Browse This will take you to the manufacturer s configuration website for this camera The login information will differ depending on the manufacturer 2 Navigate to the page where you will identify the archive device for this IP camera Streaming video from this IP camera will be sent to the archive device The name of this page will differ depending on the manufacturer For Legend IP Dome cameras this can be configured on the Configure page under Encoder streaming settings 3 In the Streaming Address field enter the IP address of the archive device you selected and then click Save Refer to the Model Tab on page 127 to identify the archive device Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 137 Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Configuring Camera Preset Positions When a camera has PTZ capabilities the camera presets are first configured using
155. ck up the logs y ndy Please mount tape 1 on var LogicalLogs Logs and press Return to continue Would you like to back up log 5 iyn y Please label this tape as number 1 in the log tape sequence This tape contains the following logical logs 5 Log salvage is complete continuing restore of archive Figure 231 Logical logs restored 5 After the logical logs are restored the process of restoring the database begins The window displays messages to describe the process When the database is restored this message displays Restore a level 1 archive If you have incremental backup tapes that you want to restore type Y The program repeats the process used to restore the database The window in Figure 232 displays next J root minserver Shell Konsole 14 50 45 Loading Module lt BUILTINNULL gt 14 50 49 Informix Dynamic Server 2000 Version 9 21 UC4 Software Serial Numb er AAD J245792 Informix Dynamic Server 2000 Initialized Shared Memory Initialized Dataskip is now OFF for all dbspaces Recovery Mode Physical Restore of masterdbs datagroup historygroup started Checkpoint Completed duration was 0 seconds Checkpoint loguniq 5 logpos Ox6db2b4 Checkpoint Completed duration was 0 seconds Checkpoint logunigq 5 logpos Ox6db2b4 Checkpoint Completed duration was 0 seconds Checkpoint loguniq 5 logpos Ox6db2b4 Physical Restore of masterdbs datagroup historygroup Completed Checkpoint Compl
156. ckup is comprised of multiple tapes this message displays each time a tape is restored Found end of volume Load next volume and press RETURN J root minserver Shell Konsole fusr informix etc lvers_conn fusr informix etc Connect cr fusr informix etc connf iles fusr informix etc installc fusr informix etc sqlhosts fusr informix etc onconf ig fusr informix etc infos mlnserver fusr informix etc conf mlnserver fusr informix etc oncfe_mlnserver 0 fusr informix etc fco_log_full conf fusr informix etc fco_log_full sh fusr informix etc ac_config std fetc BackupUtility fetc BackupUtility backup_paths fetc BackupUtility config fvar log BackupUtility fvar log BackupUtility F_200304061802 22 fvar log BackupUt ility F_20030407 1150 33 fusr BackupUtility Bact BackupUtility 12096 blocks Block count Figure 226 File restoration complete 7 Remove the tape and store it according to your organization s policy Page 360 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 17 Backup Restore Informix Databases Restore Incremental Backups After the files are restored the incremental backups should be restored The window in Figure 227 displays next Restore incremental backup lt CYJIN E Figure 227 Restore incremental backups gt To begin the restore process follow these steps 1 Type Y to indicate an incremental backup will be restored If you type N to indicate there
157. component s diagnostic page displays 4 Click Reset Statistics 5 Click Back to Diagnostics Home Page Page 370 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 18 Viewing Diagnostics ATS Panel Intrusion Use the Component Diagnostics page shown in Figure 236 to view the following statistics e Ping interval e Reconnect interval e Online e Connection state e Number of messages not acknowledged by panel e Number of messages received e Number of polling attempts sent e Number of panel events published e Number of input events published Number of invalid packets received The Component Diagnostic displays the date and time the last event was written to a log Use this page to reset the statistics and to return to the Diagnostic list page Component Diagnostics Instructions View Diagnostics Back to Diagnostics Home Page Reset Statistics Statistics Creation Time Mon Jun 28 11 26 26 EDT 2004 ATS Tecom Panel Name ATS Panel Address 123 123 11 1 Port 8400 Statistic Ping Interval Reconnect Interval Online Connection State Number of Messages Received Number of Polling Attempts Sent Number of Panel Events Published Number of Area Events Published Number of Input Events Published Number of Invalid Packets Received Figure 236 Component Diagnostics page Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 371 Chapter 18 Viewing Diagnostics
158. cords you want to input 3 Click Import The Import page as shown in Figure 61 displays Instructions Choose from the available entries and click Import Time Zone GMT 05 00 EST EST 7 Available LI 100101 BOCA COMPUTER ROOM LI 100200 BOCA SHIPPING DOCK LI 100201 BOCA CAFETERIA LI 100300 BOCA LOBBY WEST LI 100301 BOCA CONFERENCE ROOM LI 100400 BOCA LIBRARY LI 100401 BOCA TPAINING ROOM LI 101100 BOCA B1 NORTH STAIR LI 101101 BOCA B1 SOUTH STAIR LI 101200 BOCA B1 EAST STAIR LI 101201 BOCA B1 WEST STAIR LI 101300 BOCA B2 ACCOUNTING LI 101301 BOCA B2 ACCTS PAYABLE LI 101400 BOCA B2 ACCTS RECY LI 101401 BOCA B2 DATA CENTER LI 200116 NY FIRE ALARM zi ae Figure 61 Import page 4 Use the Time Zone drop down list to select the time zone where this device is located 5 Select the logical inputs you want to import Use the Shift key to select all the records or the Ctrl key to make multiple selections from the list 6 Click Import The Logical Input list page displays with the imported items from Picture Perfect Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 87 Chapter 4 Importing Records Editing Logical Input Records gt To make changes to a logical input follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then Logical Inputs The Logical Inputs list page displays 2 Locate the logical input you want to edit and select the link The Configure Logical Input list page in Figure 62 disp
159. ction Mapping page shown in Figure 124 on page 181 displays Click Add Event Action Mapping The Configure Event Action Mapping page as shown in Figure 125 displays Configure Event Action Mapping Instructions View or add the event action Event mapping Define the actions the system will take when the specified event occurs Action Event Source Type Door Access Point Event Sources AP 200200 NY SHIPPI AP 200401 NY TRAINI Set Door Forced Ala Set Door Held Alarm Set Door Prealarm Set Invalid Badge Alarm Set Lost Badge Alarm Set Suspended Badge Alarm Set Unknown Badge AP 200101 NY COMPUTER ROOM AP 200201 NY CAFETERIA Event Types By Condition Reset Door Forced Alarm Reset Door Held Alarm Reset Door Prealarm l Subsystems x Digital Video z Subsystem Actions l Camera Preset with Video Tagging Destination NG DOCK x AP 200300 NY LOBBY WEST mm cam AP 200301 NY CONFERENCE ROOM x rese AP 200400 NY LIBRARY NY Cam 300 Preset z NG ROOM rm Alarm E Fig 3 Page 182 ure 125 Configure Event Action Mapping page Use the Event Source Type drop down list to select the access point or device Use the Event Sources list to select one or more event sources This list is populated with items based on the selected event source type Press the Ctrl key while selecting multiple items Use the Event Types By Condition
160. ctive 10 01 14 04 15 35 5 System laccess Points Set Digital Video Video Ta Destination NY Cam 10 01 1 4 04 15 35 5 Alarm DOOR FORCED OPEN AP 200400 NY LIBRARY Alarm lactive fo ta 01 14104 20 35 5 System Media Action Event AP 200301 NY CONFERENCE Alarm NY Cam DOOR FORCED OPEN 01 14 04 15 35 5 Alarm DOOR FORCED OPEN AP 200401 NY TRAINING ROOM Alarm lactive fho low 4ing 15 35 5 System Access Points Set Digital video Camera Destination NY Cam 10 01 14 04 20 35 5 Alarm DOORFORCEDOPEN AP 201100 NY B1 NORTH STA lAlarm Actve 10 S 01 14 04 20 35 5 System Media Action Event AP 200401 NY TRAINING ROOM Alarm INY Cam DOOR FORCED OPEN 01 1 4 04 20 35 5 Alarm DOOR FORCED OPEN AP 201201 NY B1 WEST STAIR Alarm lactive 10 01 14 04 20 35 5 Alarm DOOR FORCED OPEN AP 201300 NY B2 ACCOUNTI Alarm lactive 10 01 14 04 20 35 Alarm DOOR FORCED OPEN AP 201401 NY B2 DATA CENT Alarm lactive hio Status Bar gt Figure 141 Event Monitor window Table 82 lists and describes the elements on the Event Monitor interface Table 82 Event Monitor description Element Description Title Bar Displays the title Event Monitor and the window instance number since you may open more than one occurrence of the Event Monitor Refer to Managing Multiple Windows on page 20 for more information Indicators Displays icons representing site maps and video associated with th
161. cture Perfect keys e The RANDOM and KEYFILE properties are uncommented to use the values from the examples Using the cat command you can view the output of a modified configuration file Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 395 Chapter 19 Advanced Configuration Table 143 EIF Request Manager Configuration File Original File SSL Disabled Modified File SSL Enabled Copyright C 2002 GE Interlogix All Rights Reserved eifreqmgr cfg eifreqmgr cfg 1 0 12 12 02 Supported Property Examples Non SSL connection PROTOCOL HTTP SSL connection PROTOCOL HTTPS PORT 8088 KEEP_ALIVE TRUE RANDOM cas db text random pem KEYFILE cas db text picture pem SESSION_TIMEOUT 10 MESSAGE_TRACE TRUE PROTOCOL HTTP PORT 8088 KEEP_ALIVE TRUE RANDOM cas db text random pem KEYFILE cas db text picture pem Copyright C 2002 GE Interlogix All Rights Reserved eifreqmgr cfg eifreqmgr cfg 1 0 12 12 02 Supported Property Examples Non SSL connection PROTOCOL HTTP SSL connection PROTOCOL HTTPS PORT 8088 KEEP_ALIVE TRUE RANDOM cas db text random pem KEYFILE cas db text picture pem SESSION_TIMEOUT 10 MESSAGE_TRACE TRUE PROTOCOL HTTPS PORT 8088 KEEP_ALIVE TRUE RANDOM cas db text random pem KEYFILE cas db text picture pem SSL_PASSWORD password Page 396 Facility Comman
162. d apply the default graphic attributes Double click in the area to display the Graphics Attributes window Use to adjust border lines and change the default attributes such as color pattern line brightness and more Refer to Graphic Attributes on page 306 for instructions 5 Right click to display the Change Linking Properties button Click again to display the Hyperlink Area Settings window as shown in Figure 195 on page 322 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 321 Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays Hyperlink Area Settings Link To Display Map CameraMap IntercomMap Intrusion DGP IntrusionMap _ Initially Transparent Alarm Hierarchy Indication Blinking O Custom Alarm Indication Color _ Launch New Window Cancel Figure 195 Hyperlink Area Settings window 6 Use the Link to Display Map list to select the site map you want to display when the hyperlink image is selected on the Graphics Viewer 7 Select the Initially Transparent check box if you want the hyperlink border to be transparent when there is no alarm condition Clear the check box to display the hyperlink border 8 Select how you want the alarm indication to display The options are Blinking causes the hyperlink image to blink when an alarm event occurs Custom Alarm Indication allows you to select a color The hyperlink border around the image changes to this color when an alarm event occurs
163. d cameras and monitors have their tag names constructed based on the tag name of the analog switcher If these items have already been created trying to create them a second time is not permitted because duplicate tag names are not allowed If the operator deletes that analog switcher with exactly the same tag name as the one that was deleted and attempts to import a configuration file the same situation occurs and the cameras and monitors cannot be created because they already exist The operator can manually select the appropriate cameras and monitors on the analog switcher inputs and outputs page because they already exist The operator can delete the cameras and monitors and retry the import operation When importing items such Items cannot be imported Name already exists as facilities from an external access control system one or more of those facilities had a description that matches an existing item in Facility Commander The description of an imported item becomes the tag name of the corresponding Facility Commander item Facility Commander items have a unique tag name not case sensitive All name conflicts will be shown on the The operator can continue with the import operation to import the items that do not have aname conflict Change the description of the item on the external access control system so that it does not conflict with an existing item on the Facility Commander system and pe
164. d in Table 61 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 61 Configure Analog Video Switcher fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Model VY Use the drop down list to select the correct model name Facility Y Use the drop down list to select the Facility Commander Commander server that controls communication with this analog video Server switcher Time Zone VY Use the drop down list to select the time zone for this analog switcher This time zone displays on the Alarm Monitor and Event Monitor The default time zone setting is GMT Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 145 Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Addresses Tab Alarms Facility Figure 108 Configure Analog Video Switcher Addresses tab 6 Select the Addresses tab shown in Figure 108 and enter the information described in Table 62 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 62 Configure Analog Video Switcher fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description IP Address or Y Enter the host name or IP address of the analog video Host Name switcher The host name is case sensitive Port Y Identify the TCP IP port on which the analog video switcher communicates with Facility Commander Page 146 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Advanced Tab
165. d layer Use this layer to display the building structure or site map Create additional layers to display different objects such as access points camera or inputs Some site maps may not require multiple layers gt To create a new layer follow these steps 1 From the Layer menu select Create New Layer and the window shown in Figure 196 displays with the layer number created when you selected this option Create new layer x New Layer Name Layer 2 Figure 196 Create New Layer window 2 Change the layer name to something more meaningful than Layer 2 such as Access Doors Click OK Refer to Removing a Layer on page 325 for instructions on how to delete layers Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 323 Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays Selecting a Layer Use the layer setting feature to select one or all of the layers to display When you are working with multiple layers you will need to make a layer active before you can make changes to the layer The layer setting feature also allows you to rearrange the layers by moving them up or down gt To select a layer follow these steps 1 From the Layer menu select Layer Settings The window in Figure 197 displays x Layer Name Visible Active Layer 0 y W Doors iv E Layer 2 iv v Move Down Move Up Close Figure 197 Layer settings window 2 To display a layer to view select the
166. d page number Continued Error Messages Page 00110 Items cannot be imported Name already exists page 439 00111 The bus address is already in use for this DVR Please page 440 select another 00112 Client version lt client version gt not compatible with page 440 server version lt Server version gt Table 148 List of error numbers messages causes and actions Message The page cannot be displayed Causes This message and the associated detailed information indicate that communications with the server were not successful or the operation timed out Unsuccessful communications may be due to the server being down a network communications problem or that the URL address for the server is not correct Successful communication between the workstation and server requires the use of static IP addresses or an accessible DNS domain name server to perform the translation of host name to IP address For Unix systems the etc hosts table may be used to provide the translation Actions If this error occurred when attempting to log in contact the System Administrator to ensure that the server is up that communications from your workstation to the server are functioning properly and that the URL address for the server is correct Retry the login operation If the error occurred while already logged in click the Back button on the browser to return to the last valid screen and t
167. ddressing is used on the network For Unix systems verify the host name entries in the etc hosts file Graphic Editor Symbol Editor and Graphic Viewer Graphic displays do not display on the list of candidates for deletion even though they exist on the server A graphic display cannot be deleted if another display links to it Graphic symbols or images do not display on the list of candidates for deletion even though they exist on the server Graphic symbols or images cannot be deleted as long as there is a graphic display that references them When adding an image to a symbol scheme the workstation becomes very slow and the Windows Task Manager indicates almost 100 CPU usage There is a known problem in the Java Swing library with certain GIF file formats If this problem occurs the image file cannot be used Choose or create another image file The operator must log off and exit the Facility Commander application to correct the CPU usage problem When viewing a graphic display the workstation becomes very slow and the Windows Task Manager indicates almost 100 CPU usage There is a known problem in the Java Swing library with certain GIF file formats This problem usually occurs because a Graphic Display was created containing a GIF file with a format that is not supported or it is using a Symbol that was created with a GIF file of a format that is not supported The GIF image must be deleted from the
168. der Administration Guide Chapter 19 Advanced Configuration Copying Certificate to Facility Commander Server Once you have created and configured the necessary files you should exit the telnet session to return to the Facility Commander system The commands are exit exit Connection closed by foreign host On the Facility Commander system navigate to the Facility Commander web applications directory and then to the Certificates directory Use the hostname command to verify the machine is the correct host system Use the pwd command to verify the directory structure Use the tp command to connect to the Picture Perfect system and to transfer the picture crt file created in the previous steps The file is transferred in binary mode c gt cd Program Files Facility CommanderServer webapps Merlin WEB INF classes resources certificates c gt ftp pphost Connected to pphost na ilxi net 220 pphost FTP server Version wu 2 6 1 20 ready Name pphost install install Password lt install s password gt 230 User install logged in Remote system type is UNIX Using binary mode to transfer files ftp gt bin 200 Type set to I ftp gt cd cas db text ftp gt get picture crt ftp gt quit Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 397 Chapter 19 Advanced Configuration Adding Picture Perfect Certificate The keytool command should be in the path The keytool command adds the certificate created i
169. described in Table 93 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages 4 Click Submit to save the record Table 93 Configure Intercom Station fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Tag Name Y Enter a unique name to identify this item Use 2 36 characters Description Enter a description for this item Use 1 100 characters The description does not have to be unique Reference ID Enter a name to associate this item to a blue print or wiring diagram Use 1 20 characters Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 241 Chapter 12 Configuring Intercom Devices General Tab C senera Monitoring Alarms Facility a ange AlphaCom Exchange Extension e200 M master Station Time Zone GMT 00 00 GMT GMT x Figure 154 Configure Intercom Station General tab 5 Select the General tab as shown in Figure 154 and enter the information described in Table 94 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 94 Configure Intercom Station fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Intercom Exchange f Use the drop down list to select the intercom exchange switch physically connected to the intercom station Extension Y Enter the extension number of the intercom station Master Station Select this check box to indicate if this is a master intercom station Time Zone Y U
170. dow shown in Figure 182 Camera NY Cam 100 NY Cam 200 NY Cam 210 NY Cam 300 Preset NY Cam 100 PS 01 2 Save Cancel Figure 182 Set Association window 3 Select the camera from the list that you want to associate to this symbol If the camera has preset positions select the preset position from the Preset drop down list 4 Click Save Continue to Adding Text Labels to the Site Map on page 313 Page 310 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays Associating Intercom Devices Use this option to associate a symbol icon to specific intercom device To associate an intercom symbol to a specific intercom device follow these steps 1 Right click on the icon to display the Set Association button as shown in Figure 180 on page 309 2 Click Set Association to display the window shown in Figure 183 Intercom Substation NY Bldg 1 Intercom Save Cancel Figure 183 Set Association window 3 Select the intercom device from the list that you want to associate to this symbol 4 Click Save Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 311 Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays Creating Intrusion Areas A symbol scheme must be created before this step to identify the fill pattern to use with the display A fill pattern may be a solid color cross hatch design gradient fill and more A symbol scheme usually identif
171. down or there may be server is up and network network communication communications have been problems restored If the problem persists the System Administrator should examine the server log file and if necessary contact Customer Support for assistance 00079 Display not found in server The attempt to retrieve the Contact the System specified graphic display file Administrator to determine if from the Facility Commander the graphic display was server failed This problem deleted from the server If it usually occurs when an was resave the workspace to operator logs in and the remove the reference or ask restored workspace the System Administrator to preferences specify a graphic restore the graphic display on display that no longer exists the server If not log out and on the Facility Commander log in again to see if the server problem persists If the problem reoccurs the System Administrator should examine the server log file to seek other causes such as network communications problems 00080 file name cannot contain any of the following characters V WV lt gt When saving a graphic display the operator entered one or more characters of V lt gt that are invalid for file names Attempt the save operation again after entering a name that does not contain any of the invalid characters Page 432 Facility Commander Administration Guide Appendix C Error Messages Table 148 List of error numbers me
172. e Intercom Devices Connect Disconnect Intrusion Area e Arm Area Disarm Area Intrusion DGP e Bypass DGP Unbypass DGP Start DGP Battery Test Cancel DGP Battery Test Intrusion Input Bypass Input Unbypass Input Acknowledge Alarm Intrusion Panel Set Panel Online Set Panel Offline Intrusion Keypad Bypass Keypad Unbypass Keypad Refer to the appropriate sections for more information about using these features Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 16 Viewing Graphic Displays Lock and Unlock Doors gt To lock or unlock an access door follow these steps Select the appropriate graphic display Refer to Opening Graphic Displays on page 338 AP 200100 NY LOBBY EAST Acknowledge Alarm Access Point gt Momentary Unlock View Graphic Display gt Duration Unlock Permanent Unlock Lock Door Figure 208 Site map with action menu 2 Locate the symbol representing the device If the device is in an alarm state Double click the symbol to launch the Alarm Response window as shown in Responding to Alarms on page 215 Right click the symbol to display the action menu The window shown in Figure 208 displays with the tag name and a list of actions available to the operator If the device is not in an alarm state Double click the symbol to perform the default action which is Momentary Unlock Right click the symbol to di
173. e alarm event e Displays an X to indicate communication with the Picture Perfect server has been lost Click the globe icon to launch the Graphics Viewer displaying the default site plan Refer to Editing Access Points on page 76 for information about associating a site plan to an alarm event e Click the camera icon to launch the Video Console The most recent video clip displays Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 221 Chapter 11 Using the Event Monitor Page 222 Table 82 Event Monitor description Element Description Device Time View the time an event occurred in one or more of the following four time stamps e GMT Greenwich Mean Time e Operator Default location of the operator e Server location of the server e Device location of the device associated with the event The format is month day year hour minute and seconds mm dd yy hh mm ss For example 12 10 02 16 28 04 The date format may change depending on the operator s locale Mapped Event Types There are three types of events alarm badge and system Refer to the following sections e Alarm Events Liston page 223 e Badge Events Liston page 224 e System Events Liston page 225 Description Description of the event Status Bar Window Filter Displays an icon indicating the list of available Facility Commander Icon facilities has changed When the facilities have been reset the icon no longer d
174. e background Imported layers display with a yellow Use the Edit Object feature to maintain the layers in the AutoCAD drawings otherwise the drawing is treated as one object To maintain the layers in the AutoCAD drawings follow these steps 1 Right click on a border or path in the drawing The shortcut menu in Figure 189 on page 317 displays This menu is not accessible again after you select the Edit option Re import Edit Objects Figure 189 Import DXF menu options 2 Select Edit Objects If you do not select this option the drawing remains as a single object on one layer When this option is selected Facility Commander identifies each layer of the imported drawing Note Importing a drawing with each separate layer may take some time to complete 3 From the Layer menu select Layer Settings The window in Figure 190 displays x Layer Name __ Visible Active Layer 0 r4 E Doors v Li Layer 2 v vj yi Active SOOOQUOOO OE SISIISUIS IS IS SIS ISIS Figure 190 Layer Settings with imported and non imported layers 4 To display a layer select the appropriate Visible check box and the Graphics Editor displays the selected layer 5 To modify a layer select the appropriate Active check box and the Graphics Editor displays the active layer The remaining layers are visible while you make changes
175. e split pointers Click the split pointer to move the window left or right of its current position Symbols Symbols represent devices such as e Cameras e Door Access Points e Digital Inputs e Logical Inputs e Digital Outputs e Intercom Devices e Intrusion Devices Refer to Issuing Commands on page 340 for more information Hyperlink Symbol Displays the default hyperlink symbol The hyperlink symbol can be customized and may display as a blinking icon Click the symbol to view the associated map Text Label Displays a text label which may identify the building name a link to another site map or identify a symbol icon on the site map Status Bar e Displays a window filter icon indicating the list of available Facility Commander facilities has changed When the facilities have been reset the icon no longer displays on the status bar Refer to Customizing Window Name and Contents on page 347 e Displays an icon indicating if the system with the Graphics Viewer is connected to the Facility Commander server Green indicates the Graphics Viewer is communicating with the server Red indicates the system is no longer communicating with the server Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 337 Chapter 16 Viewing Graphic Displays Opening Graphic Displays There are two methods to open a file tag name or menu option The navigation pane displays the tag name Select the tag name in the
176. e 313 Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays Saving the Site Map gt To save the file follow these steps 1 From the File menu and select Save The Save window displays 2 Enter the file name Click Save The file is automatically saved with a JLX extension When an alarm event is generated the icon associated with the alarm state displays on the map Importing AutoCAD Drawings Facility Commander allows you to import site maps or drawings created with AutoCAD Only two dimensional drawings are supported model information in drawings is not used When you import an AutoCAD drawing it must be saved in a DXF R12 format you can select which layers you want to import If you want the site map or drawing to remain as one object no further steps are required However if you want to maintain the layers use the Edit Objects feature after the drawing is imported These layers can be deleted later if not used Imported layer names cannot be changed Refer to Maintain Layers in AutoCAD Drawings on page 317 for more information gt To import an AutoCAD drawing follow these steps 1 From the File menu select Import AutoCAD Drawings The window in Figure 186 displays amp Import AutoCad Drawings Look Sen ai QA 110163001A R12 dxf C 530119004a dxf Bi 30475001B R12 dxf D card shop dxf i Drawing1 dxf File Name 30475001B R12 dxf Files of Type dxf x Import Cancel
177. e 61 Chapter 4 Importing Records External System Tab I External System Figure 38 Configure Operator External System tab 6 Select the External System tab as shown in Figure 38 and enter the information described in Table 27 Table 27 Configure Operator fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description External System Select this check box if this operator has an account on the Picture Perfect system When the check box is selected the operator has access to external Picture Perfect systems When the check box is not selected the operator does not have access to external Picture Perfect systems Page 62 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 4 Importing Records Facility Tab General External System Fommy Assigned to pee Available Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility Sample Region Facility Figure 39 Configure Operator Facility tab 7 Select the Facility tab as shown in Figure 39 and enter the information described in Table 28 Table 28 Configure Operator fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Assigned To Identifies the facility where the operator is assigned Items can belong to more than one facility This is a read only field and cannot be edited Available Y Use to assign or change the facility membership for this item The facilities that display in this list depend on the operator s context and permis
178. e 75 19 Y Digital Inputs Import the digital inputs and set the time zone The digital inputs are automatically assigned to the correct facility Refer to Importing Digital Inputs on page 81 20 Y Logical Inputs Import the logical inputs and set the time zone The logical inputs are automatically assigned to the correct facility Refer to Importing Logical Inputs on page 87 21 Y Digital Outputs Import the digital outputs and set the time zone The digital outputs are automatically assigned to the correct facility Refer to Importing Digital Outputs on page 92 22 U Alarm Create alarm instructions for Facility Commander only Instructions alarms Refer to Creating Alarm Instructions on page 199 23 Y Alarm Profiles Create alarm profiles for Facility Commander only alarms Refer to Creating Alarm Profiles on page 201 24 Y Alarm Colors Review the default alarm colors and make changes as needed Refer to Setting Alarm Colors on page 197 25 Y Digital Video Configure the Digital Video Recorders DVRs Refer Recorders to Configuring Digital Video Recorders on page 124 26 va Cameras Configure the cameras Refer to Configuring Cameras on page 132 27 Y Cameras Configure the camera preset positions Configuring Camera Preset Positions on page 138 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 29 Chapter 3 Configuring the System Page 30 Table 7 Checklist Continued Step REQ HTML
179. e defined in the Picture Perfect system while alarm instructions for Facility Commander are defined in Facility Commander Pre defined alarm responses are only defined in the access control systems and are available to Picture Perfect and Facility Commander systems Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 195 Chapter 9 Configuring Alarms Configuring the Alarm Monitor A system administrator should configure the following items to take advantage of all the Alarm Monitor features Refer to the following checklist for the server system settings and other configuration settings VY To configure Picture Perfect settings refer to the Picture Perfect Administration Guide or Picture Perfect Help for instructions e Alarm instructions are defined using Messages Alarm responses are defined using Responses e Alarm priorities are defined using Alarms VY To configure Facility Commander alarm settings refer to the following sections or Facility Commander Help Setting Alarm Colors on page 197 Creating Alarm Instructions on page 199 Synchronization The Alarm Monitor in the access control system and Facility Commander are completely synchronized This means when an alarm state changes the change is reflected on both systems and when an operator from either the access control system or Facility Commander responds to an alarm that response is sent to both systems Page 196 Facility Commander Administration Guide
180. e finished viewing results Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 167 Chapter 7 Using the Video Console Page 168 Table 70 lists and describes the System Event Search tab Table 70 System Event Search tab Element Description Start Date To search for a specific day click the Date button to End Date display the Select Date window shown in Figure 118 on page 173 e Use the drop down lists to select the month and year to display the calendar month Click the day of the month to select the Start Date and the End Date Start Time To search for a specific time End Time Type the Operator time in the Start Time field to begin the search Type the Operator time in the End Time field to end the search Use this format HH MM SS Event Source Use the drop down list to select the event source such as an access point logical input digital input or camera device Any video events matching this event source type display in the Token column Event Type Use the drop down list to select the event type associated with the event source such as an Invalid Badge or Door Forced alarm Any video events matching this event type display in the Token column Recorder Use the drop down list to identify the DVR device where the video event is stored Any video events from the specified recorder display in the Token column Camera Use the drop down list to identify the camera device used
181. e last event was written to a log Use this page to reset the statistics and to return to the Diagnostics list page System Status Diagnostics Instructions View System Status Back to Diagnostics Home Page Reset Statistics Statistics Creation Time Wed Jul 07 08 34 22 EDT 2004 Statistic Number of Application Servers FoServer Number of Remote Media Servers Number of DYMRS DVR 100_10 Connected Number of Client Workstations 2 FCclient connected FCClient 200 iea Number of Managed Proxy Components o Figure 244 System Status Diagnostics page Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 379 Chapter 18 Viewing Diagnostics Thread Pool Manager Diagnostics Use the Thread Pool Manager Diagnostics page shown in Figure 245 to view the following statistics e Minimum and maximum thread pool size e Peak number of concurrent threads e Peak threads pending and waiting for service e Elapsed longest pending thread wait time e Current number of threads assigned and running e Current number of threads waiting to run The Thread Pool Manager Diagnostics page displays the date and time the last event was written to a log Use this page to reset the statistics and to return to the Diagnostics list page Thread Pool Diagnostics Instructions view Thread Pool Diagnostics Back to Diagnostics Home Page Reset Statistics Statistics Creation Time Tue Jul 06 11 54 37 ED
182. e records from Picture Perfect gt To view digital inputs follow these steps 1 Select Device Management 2 Select Digital Inputs The Digital Inputs page as shown in Figure 54 displays Digital Inputs Instructions Import synchronize view edit or delete digital inputs 4 Page 1 of i gt Go to C Go Items per Page 30 gt emee Import Synchronize Ty DI 200116 NY FIRE ALARM 1 DI 200116 NY FIRE ALARM 1 pictureofjamie if DI 200117 NY FIRE ALARM B2 pictureofjamie Figure 54 Digital Inputs page Page 80 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 4 Importing Records Importing Digital Inputs gt To import digital inputs follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then Digital Inputs The Digital Inputs page displays 2 Use the Server drop down list to select the Picture Perfect server with the records you want to import 3 Click Import The Import page as shown in Figure 55 displays Instructions Choose from the available entries and click Import Time Zone GMT 05 00 EST EST x Available DI 200117 NY FIRE ALARM B2 meon a a ee Figure 55 Import page 4 Use the Time Zone drop down list to select the time zone where this device is located 5 Select the digital inputs you want to import Use the Shift key to select all the records or the Ctrl key to make multiple selections from the list 6 Click Import The Digital Inputs list page displays with the
183. e remainder from view gt To change the items in your view follow these steps 1 Select Environment and then Window Filter The Window Filter page as shown in Figure 47 displays 2 Select the check boxes to indicate the facilities whose items you want to view The default setting is all check boxes are selected A check mark indicates the facility is selected and operators are able to view data from the facility Clear the check boxes to remove the facility from your view No check mark indicates operators will not be able to view data from the facility 3 Click Submit to save the record Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 73 Chapter 4 Importing Records Page 74 Access Points Facility Commander imports door and reader records from existing Picture Perfect systems and creates access point records In Facility Commander an access point is made up of e Reader e Door Contact e Request to Exit REX Strike Use the Picture Perfect system to configure the devices used by an access point Use Facility Commander to configure the access points properties not defined in the Picture Perfect systems such as associated site maps and time zones Refer to the following sections for more information e Importing Access Points on page 75 e Editing Access Points on page 76 Viewing Imported Access Points Use the Access Points page to view import copy delete and synchronize records from Picture Perfect
184. e three pre defined guard level permissions which are e Guard Supervisor System Permission Intermediate Guard Permissions e Entry Level Guard Permissions The pre defined permissions can be copied to create new permissions but not deleted as they are permanent Facility Commander records gt To use one of the pre defined facility permissions follow these steps 1 Click the Copy icon next to the pre defined system permission that you want to use and the Configure System Permissions page as shown in Figure 80 displays 2 Enter the information required to modify a facility permission record Change the tag name and description Review the tabbed pages and make the appropriate modifications 3 Click Submit to save the record Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 5 Assigning Permissions and Context Viewing System Permission Use the System Permission page view add edit copy or delete system permission records Refer to the following e Using Pre defined System Permissions e Adding System Permissions on page 110 gt To view system permissions follow these steps 1 Select Operator Administration 2 Select System Permissions The System Permission page as shown in Figure 80 displays System Permissions Instructions Click to add a View edit add or delete system permissions system permission profile _ Add System Permission 4 Page 1 of 1 gt Go to E Go Ite
185. e when tampering with the DGP has occurred This is the generated alarm Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Facility Tab Assigned to a Facility Available Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility Sample Region Facility Hold the Ctrl key down for multiple selection Figure 172 Configure Intrusion DGP Facility tab 6 Select the Facility tab as shown in Figure 172 and enter the information described in Table 108 A check mark indicates a required field Table 108 Configure Intrusion DGP fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Assigned to Items can belong to more than one facility This is a read only field and cannot be edited Available Y Use to assign or change the facility membership for this item The facilities that display in this list depend on the operator s context and permissions e To assign the item to more than one facility select the first facility and press the Ctrl key while selecting the other facilities The selected facilities are highlighted Click Submit e If this item is already assigned to a facility listed in the Assigned To list press the Ctrl key before selecting the new facility assignment To assign the item to all the listed facilities select the first facility in the list press the Shift key and select the last facility in the list All the facilities are highlighted Click Submit Facility C
186. econds a E Ce O Ee a SELECT id timestamp username password name external external_id external_key context_id operator_preferences_id FROM operator WHERE username SELECT id tag_name description sys_perm_profile_id timestamp FROM context WHERE id SELECT id context_id facility_id fac_perm_profile_id timestamp FROM context_elerment WHERE context_id SELECT id timestamp operator_locale items_per page ER Figure 239 Database Queries page Page 374 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 18 Viewing Diagnostics Facility Membership Cache Use the Facility Membership Cache page shown in Figure 240 to view the following statistics maximum cache Size Current size Total misses Total hits Hit percent Cache purges The Facility Membership Cache page displays the date and time the last event was written to a log Use this page to reset the statistics and to return to the Diagnostics list page Database Connection Pool Instructions View Database Connection Pool Back to Diagnostics Home Page Reset Statistics Statistics Creation Time Mon Jun 28 11 26 24 EDT 2004 Connection pool size Number of lease obtained Average Lease Time Number of leases waits Highest Connection Used a 0 Average lease wait time 0 0 Figure 240 Facility Membership Cache page Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 375 Chapter 18 Viewing Diagnost
187. ect Launch and Symbol Editor or select the Symbol Editor icon from the Editors toolbar 2 The Symbol Editor shown in Figure 192 on page 288 window displays Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 287 Chapter 14 Creating Symbol Schemes 3A symbol Editor Window File Help Dex oe Symbol Schemes Scheme Name Initial State Browse hy Area scheme Input Camera l I Input Device Type m Intrusion Panel Monitor PP Schema eee ee PP Shema State Association _ Initially Transparent State Attributes State Conditions bols Active Intrusion Input Alarm Set 4 y Intrusion Input Alarm Event Reset y Intrusion Input Bypassed Reset v Intrusion Input Bypassed Set i v Intrusion Input Tamper Alarm Reset i v Intrusion Input Tamper Alarm Set 1 v Figure 192 Symbol Editor window Table 124 lists and describes the Symbol Editor fields and buttons Table 124 Symbol Editor fields and description Field Name Description Title Bar Displays Symbol Editor and the window instance number Refer to Managing Multiple Windows on page 20 for more information New Use to create a new symbol scheme Refer to Creating a in Symbol Scheme on page 291 for more information Save Use to save a symbol scheme to the local computer To publish the scheme for use with the Graphics Editor the scheme must be uploaded to the Facility Commander server Refer to Upload and Downlo
188. ect a line color and click OK Fill Color Click Fill Color to display the Fill Line Color palette Select a fill color and click OK Pattern Click to display the fill color in the drawn image or a Transparency shape drawn with the Create Hyperlink Area tool j v Click to remove the fill color When you remove the fill gt color only the pattern displays with a white background Patterns Click to apply a pattern to the image Use Line Color to select a color for the pattern Line Styles Select the line type such as solid dotted or arrows Brightness Use the slider to indicate the brightness of the line and fill color 100 is the brightest Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 307 Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays Creating a Graphic Display A graphic display is composed of a basic site map and the symbols that represent devices or access points Symbol schemes must be created before this step to identify the symbols that will be used with the display If the symbols do not display use the Symbol Editor to upload the symbol scheme to the Facility Commander server gt To create a graphic display follow these steps 1 From the Facility Commander Launcher window select Launch and Graphics Editor or select the Graphics Editor icon from the Editors toolbar The Graphics Editor window displays 2 Using the Graphics Editor drawing tools create the graphic display If you have an existing
189. ect the appropriate option to indicate how the hyperlink image changes when an alarm event is generated The options are Select Blinking if you want the hyperlink image to blink when an alarm event is generated Select Custom Alarm Indication Image if you want to select a different hyperlink image to display when an alarm event is generated Use the Browse button to navigate to the folder with the graphic image you want to display on the site map representing an alarm event 11 Select the Launch New Window check box if you want the associated site map to display in a new Graphics Viewer window If you want the associated site map to display in the same Graphics Viewer window do not select this check box 12 Click Save 13 In the Graphics Editor window use the text tool to add a label to identify the link Adding Text Labels to the Site Map on page 313 14 Save your work and upload the new site map to the Facility Commander server for distribution Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 319 Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays Building Hierarchical Displays Using the Create Hyperlink Area icon in the Graphics Editor application to draw a hyperlink path around an object on a site map This feature is useful to associate multiple site maps in a heroically arrangement When an alarm event occurs the designated hyperlink icon reflects the alarm state condition on each level or site map in the hierarchy as shown
190. ed Intrusion Input Alarm Event Intercom Substation Call Button Alarm Intrusion Input Bypassed Intercom Substation Call Button Alarm Event Intrusion Input Bypassed Alarm Intercom Substation Call Connected Intrusion Input Detector Dirty Intercom Substation Call Ringing Intrusion Input Detector Low Battery Intercom Substation Call To Busy Facility Commander Administration Guide Intrusion Input Detector Supervision Chapter 11 Using the Event Monitor Table 86 Event Monitor Event Types Continued Event Types Event Types Intercom Substation Call To Private Intercom Substation Disconnected Intrusion Input Fault Intrusion Input Fault Alarm Intrusion Input Holdup At Night Intrusion Input Holdup At Night Intrusion Input Tamper Intrusion Input Tamper Intrusion Input Tamper Alarm Intrusion Input Tamper Alarm Intrusion Keypad Bypassed Alarm Invalid Badge Event Intrusion Keypad Offline Alarm Logical Input Alarm Intrusion Keypad Tamper Alarm Intrusion Input Tamper Alarm Intrusion Low Panel Battery Lost Badge Alarm Intrusion Panel Burglar Alarm Cancelled Mapped Event Action Audit Intrusion Panel Code Entered Media Action Event Intrusion Panel Exit Fault Intrusion Panel Main Power Failure Intrusion Panel Main Power Failure Alarm Motion Detection Alarm Reader Supervised Exit Alarm Remote Media Server Comm Failu
191. ed in and is recording 3 Try turning the power to the DVR on and off 4 If you are using a GE Security DVR you can use a Web browser to reset it Right click on the DVR in the navigation pane and select Browse or follow these steps a Use the IP address of the DVR to construct the following URL http DVR IP Address index ssi b Select Configure then Reboot 5 Try to ping the DVR again If the ping command is successful use the Alarm Monitor to reset the DVRCommFail Alarm Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 7 Using the Video Console This chapter describes how to use the Video Console to view live and recorded video This chapter also includes instructions to take snapshots select cameras and search for video clips In this chapter Overview on page 158 Navigating the Video Console on page 160 Controlling Cameras on page 163 Viewing Live Video on page 165 Viewing Recorded Video on page 165 Searching for Video on page 167 Customizing the Video Console on page 175 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 157 Chapter 7 Using the Video Console Overview The Video Console allows operators to view live video select and control any camera retrieve a marked video clip or direct cameras to a preset position For cameras with PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom capabilities you can use the mouse to control movement This feature is not available if another operator has control of the camera Refer to Contr
192. eeeeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaas 12 Logging In Using the Web Application 20 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 Using the Web Browser Application ccecsceeeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeenaaes 14 LAST PAGS soisin innn a even cardenaaeceaneblvivideadetensdeinweresnette 15 Browser Ment sy s2sccivsesgecagecviagenceess n a 18 Gonfiguration PAGE zens tssecctues aseecnis weeveseeveaseeneebeancctlunniaeercetteveeneyh 19 Managing Multiple WindOWS 00 eeccceeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeseenaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaes 20 Client Application Tithe Bars ccecccceeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeseceeeessaaeeteneees 21 Customizing Window Name and Contents scceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 22 ENO MESSAGES er aae E AE 23 Navigating the Multi Viewer 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaees 24 Customizing the Multi Viewer ccceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 25 Chapter 3 Configuring the System c cccsssseeeeseeeeeeneeeees 27 GNGCKISE cieceveecetvuete vesecelstenteesusohadeunsytaee uber assent a aaa aaa 28 Facility Commander Servers c cccseeeeceeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeaes 31 Viewing Facility Commander Servers cccecceeeceeeeeeeeeteteeseeees 31 Adding a Facility Commander Server cccccceseeeeeeeeeessteeeeeees 32 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page i Access Control Systems 0 cccccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeaeeseeeeeesaeeeeeneees 38 Viewing Access Control Systems
193. eeeereerereern 369 Resetting Diagnostics Statistics ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 370 ATS Panel IntruSion srein ninian aaia i aaan anaiai 371 Database Connection Pool s sssssssessssresssissrrsssnrsrnnssnnnsnnnsrnnsnnnsrnee 372 Database Transactions Diagnostics eeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeerresrerrnesrens 373 Database Queries Diagnostics ssesseeseeessressseeererenresrieerrresrn 374 Facility Membership Cache essseessssnessressrrssrnsssrssrnnsrnnssrrnsrrrnsre 375 UN MiStatiStiCs ssion iip adea a aE aaa E EE ap aE 376 Media DIaQnOStiCs vv cstccorts insink onan cnet ined 377 Service Framework Diagnostics ccccceesececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeteenees 378 System Status Diagnostics ccecccceseceeceeceeceeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeessaeeeeneees 379 Thread Pool Manager Diagnostics ccceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeens 380 Chapter 19 Advanced Configuration ccssseecesseeeeeeees 381 Customizing Launcher Window ccccceeesseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaeeseneees 382 Adding Custom ICONS cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeseaaeeeeaeeesecaeeesaeeteaes 382 Adding External Applications eccceeeeeceeeeeenneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaes 383 Verifying Computer Host Name cceceeeeseeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeetaeeseneees 384 Changing the Host Name or IP Address ssn 385 Changing the Client Encryption ccccecccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseaeesennees 387 Changing the Host Name on Server
194. ees 156 Communication Failure cccccecsceeeseeceeneeeceeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeseaeesennees 156 Chapter 7 Using the Video Console cccccssssseeeeeeeeees 157 OVEIVICW E A E A E bees 158 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page iii Automatically Launch by Alarm Priority eeen 158 Navigating the Multi Viewer ceeeeteceeeeeeteeeeeeeetteeeeeettaeeeeeneaa 159 Drag and Drop Cameras c ccceeeeeeceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaaeeseeeeesiaaeeeenes 159 Navigating the Video Console cecccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeetees 160 Controlling Cameras ceccceeecececeteeeeeseee eens eeeeeeeseaeeeseeeeeseeeeeeaaeeee 163 Live VIGGO cia tetecc cai Pedcanden ee i ide a E iNET EOE AA EE 164 Recorded Vid60 nerra AE 164 Event Action Mapping eeeetceceeestneeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeeenateeeenenaees 164 Viewing Live ViId O 00 ceeccccceeeeseceeeeeneeeeeeeeeseeceeeeeneeeeeeeensneaeeneenneaees 165 Viewing Recorded Video eeeeeecceeeeeneneeeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeneaees 165 View a Single Video Frame ceccccceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeee 165 Create an Evidence CD 0 cecceeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 166 Searching for Video 0 cececceceeeeceeseee cence eeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeseeneeeteaeeeeeneeess 167 System Event Search ccecccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeees 167 DVR Event Search 2 c ncis ini heise eee 169 DVR General Playback Searc
195. efine Context Facility tab 5 Select the Facility tab as shown in Figure 87 and enter the information described in Table 46 Table 46 Define Context fields and descriptions Field Name Assigned to REQ Description Displays the facility or facilities for this context definition Items can belong to more than one facility This is a read only field and cannot be edited Available Vv Use to assign or change the facility membership for this item The facilities that display in this list depend on the operator s context and permissions To assign the item to more than one facility select the first facility and press the Ctrl key while selecting the other facilities The selected facilities are highlighted Click Submit e If this item is already assigned to a facility listed in the Assigned To list press the Ctrl key before selecting the new facility assignment e To assign the item to all the listed facilities select the first facility in the list press the Shift key and select the last facility in the list All the facilities are highlighted Click Submit Page 116 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 5 Assigning Permissions and Context Pre defined Contexts Facility Commander provides five pre defined contexts Table 47 shows the Facility Permissions and System Permissions associated with each context Table 47 Pre defined Contexts Contexts System Permissions Facilit
196. elect a device type which includes e Camera e Digital Input e Digital Output e Door Access Point Logical Input e Intercom Exchange e Intercom Master Station Intercom Substation Intrusion Area Intrusion DGP Intrusion Keypad Intrusion Input Intrusion Output e Monitor State Association Initially Transparent Select this check box to make the symbol for the initial state icon transparent until an alarm event occurs Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 289 Chapter 14 Creating Symbol Schemes Page 290 Table 124 Symbol Editor fields and description Continued Continued Field Name Description State Attributes Displays the attributes of the point type If Door Access Point is selected the attributes include Door Forced Door Held and different badge events Refer to Table 126 for a complete list State Conditions Displays the appropriate condition for the state attribute Refer to Table 126 for a complete list Symbols Displays the symbol associated with the state condition Use the Active check box to select the symbol Active Click the Active check box and the Attach window displays Select the graphic image you want to represent the state condition Click Attach A check mark displays to indicate this symbol When the Active check box is selected the graphic image can be used when creating graphic displays If you clear the check box to remove the symbol
197. elect a font type and font GE Light45 size The available fonts are determined by the GEsansLighta5 v workstation where the Graphics Editor is being used to b create drawings If fonts used in the drawing are unavailable on the workstation where the drawing is displayed substitute fonts are used Select the icons to make the font bold or italic Drawing Tools Refer to Drawing Tools on page 305 for instructions on how to use these drawing tools Create New Image Entry Click the Create New Image Entry icon to display the Open window which allows you to select a GIF or JPG file to use as the site map Page 302 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays Table 128 Graphics Editor icons tooltips and descriptions Continued Element Description Hyperlink Icon Use the Hyperlink icon to link two or more site maps o together A graphic image or icon displays on the site map when it is viewed with the Graphics Viewer Click the graphic image or icon on the default site map and the associated site map displays You can choose to have the associated site map display in the current Graphics Viewer window or to launch a new Graphics Viewer window Refer to Linking Graphic Displays on page 318 for instructions on how to link site maps together Create Hyperlink Area Use the Create Hyperlink Area icon to draw a border around an irregular shape creating a custom hy
198. ence of a software problem send the error message and corresponding information from the log file to Customer Support for assistance Page 416 Facility Commander Administration Guide Appendix C Error Messages Table 148 List of error numbers messages causes and actions Continued Message Causes Actions 00009 Error creating video player The DVR could not be Check that the DVR is turned Cause lt text gt connected to Also the video on and recording Verify on player datasource classes for the DVR configuration screen the specified protocol are not that the correct model was available selected Also make sure that no other applications are connected to the DVR Verify that the drivers for the requested protocol are installed on the client 00010 Video clip not found The video token stored in the If the video token was just database was not found on written to the DVR it might not the DVR It s possible the be available for playback yet video token was erased from so retry playing the clip Make the DVR or writing the token sure the DVR is recording to the DVR failed 00011 Video source not available The camera was configured Verify the camera but not physically installed on configuration on the DVR DVR Also see error message 00009 00012 Digital recorder not available The DVR connection was not The connection to the DVR Cause lt text gt available was lost Verify if the connection
199. enneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaees 271 Adding Intrusion Areas ou eeeecceeeeennneeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaes 272 Configuring Intrusion Inputs cecceceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesaeeseeeees 276 Viewing Intrusion Input occ eeeeeeeeeneeeeceeenaeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaes 276 Adding Intrusion INDUts srice 277 Configuring Intrusion Outputs ceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeesaeeeeneees 281 Viewing Intrusion Outputs ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeesetaeeeeaeeeeaes 281 Adding Intrusion Outputs ecceceeeseeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeceeesnaeeeeaes 282 Chapter 14 Creating Symbol Schemes ccsssseeeeeeeeeeees 285 COVENVICW gorian ann aa dee E ea vedec saws sedegsaeae betes 286 Using the Symbol Editor sssrinin natria aaarnas 287 Creating a Symbol Scheme sssssesseesieseersssiresirrssrnssrnssrnneensrnn nne 291 Creating an Intrusion Symbol Scheme ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 292 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page v Managing Symbol Editor Files 00 cccccesseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeetees 294 Uploading a Symbol Scheme c ccesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeetaeeeeeeeeees 294 Downloading a Symbol SCHEME ecceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 294 Deleting a Symbol Scheme ceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeseeeeeeseaeetenes 295 State Associations and Conditions cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeneeeees 295 Chapter 15 Creating Graphic D
200. enter a custom text response Use up to 255 Response characters Avoid using quote marks in the text as this character is not recognized by Picture Perfect Page 216 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 10 Using the Alarm Monitor Table 81 Alarm Response elements and descriptions Continued Element Description Buttons Acknowledge Click Acknowledge after entering a response The alarm remains on the Alarm Monitor and processing state changes from Active to Pending Remove Click Remove when all the responses have been recorded and the alarm is no longer being investigated The processing state changes to Completed The alarm is not removed from the Alarm Monitor until the alarm is reset If the alarm is not reset it will continue to display Purge Click Purge to remove the alarm from the Alarm Monitor regardless of the alarm state The action is allowed only if you have the correct permissions Contact your system administrator to make changes Cancel Click Cancel to return to the Alarm Monitor window Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 217 Chapter 10 Using the Alarm Monitor Page 218 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 11 Using the Event Monitor This chapter introduces the Facility Commander Event Monitor and describes its features It also describes how to use the Event Monitor to display different time zones and event types the Event Mo
201. er s name the Facility Commander server name and the user s context information Menu Bar Displays a menu bar that allows you to launch the client applications access the Facility Commander Web browser open the Online Help system and exit Toolbar Icons Select the appropriate icon from the toolbar to open a client application or Web browser interface Refer to Toolbar Icons on page 10 for a description of each icon Server Connection Indicates if the system with the client application is connected Icon to the Facility Commander server e Green indicates the client application is communicating with the server e Red indicates the client application is no longer communicating with the server Logging In from a Workstation To display the Launcher window follow these steps 1 Click Start Programs and then Facility Commander Client 2 Select Facility Commander Client The Facility Commander Login window in Figure 5 displays Facility Commander Login Screen User Name Password Figure 5 Facility Commander Login Screen 3 Enter a user name and password and click Log In For more information about Login window fields refer to Table 3 on page 13 Page 12 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 2 Getting Started Table 3 Login window fields User Name Y Enter a valid user s name The first time you log in you must log in with the name indicated by the System Admini
202. er No Yes Yes No No Intrusion Panels No Yes Yes No No Intrusion Areas No Yes Yes No No Intrusion Inputs No Yes Yes No No Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 451 Appendix D Facility Permissions View Configuration Facility Permissions Table 154 View Configuration Facility Permissions Enabled None View Update Create Delete Controls Lock Unlock No Access Points Activate Reset No Digital Outputs Control PTZ Cameras No Enable Disable No Digital Input Monitoring Enable Disable No Logical Input Monitoring Monitors Purge Alarms No Remove Alarms No Acknowledge Alarms No View Live Video No View Recorded Video No Setup Operators Yes No No No Contexts Yes No No No System Permissions Yes No No No Facility Permissions Yes No No No Facilities Yes No No No Facility Commander Yes No No No Servers Workstations Yes No No No Access Control Systems Yes No No No Page 452 Facility Commander Administration Guide Appendix D Facility Permissions Table 154 View Configuration Facility Permissions Enabled None View Update Create Delete Devices Access Points Yes No No No Digital Inputs Yes No No No Logical Inputs Yes No No No Digital Video Recorders Yes No No No Cameras Yes No No No Intercom
203. er items can be a member of any number of facilities at any given time which means they can have more than one parent facility Items include all the objects that someone can view control or modify such as access points DVRs or alarm colors and the Facility Commander system itself Facility Commander provides pre defined and sample facility definitions and context to use when creating new facilities The definitions include e Global Facility is the top level facility and contains all the other facilities and their associated items Sample Profiles and Context Facility is where sample contexts system permissions and facility permissions are located Use these to create context and permissions tailored to meet your organization s needs e Sample Region Facility is only referenced by the sample contexts Refer to the following sections for more information e Viewing Facilities on page 68 Importing Facilities on page 68 Creating a Facility on page 70 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 67 Chapter 4 Importing Records Viewing Facilities Use the Facilities page to view import add edit copy or delete facility records gt To view the Facilities list page follow these steps 1 Select System Administration 2 Select Facilities The Facilities page as shown in Figure 42 displays Instructions Import view edit add or delete facilities Add Facility 4Pagelofib Goto l Go Items per
204. er pages do not refresh dynamically The page does not refresh until the operator selects another page or clicks Submit on a page When the operator takes either of these actions the message bar displays the message System shutdown in progress When the time expires and the operator again selects another page the Login page is displayed with this message System has been shutdown After a shutdown Facility Commander must be rebooted The Facility Commander system is automatically started as part of the reboot process Shutting Down the System gt To begin a system shutdown follow these steps 1 Select System Administration and then System Shutdown The Shutdown System page as shown in Figure 34 displays Shutdown System Instructions Specify the number of minutes delay before system shutdown and then click Shutdown Shutdown Delay Time minutes 5 Initiate System Shutdown Procedure Shutdown Cancel Figure 34 Shutdown System page 2 Enter the number of minutes to delay before the system performs the shutdown The default setting is five minutes 3 Click Shutdown Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 53 Chapter 3 Configuring the System Page 54 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 4 Importing Records This chapter describes the how Facility Commander uses existing Picture Perfect records Imported devices can be assigned a time zone and used on graphic displays to issue comm
205. er server webapps Merlin WE B INF classes resources certificates c gt ftp pphost Connected to pphost na ilxi net 220 pphost FTP server Version wu 2 6 1 20 ready Name pphost install install Password lt install s password gt 230 User install logged in Remote system type is UNIX Using binary mode to transfer files ftp gt bin 200 Type set to I ftp gt put server cer ftp gt quit Page 390 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 19 Advanced Configuration Moving File to Picture Perfect Move the Facility Commander Certificate to cas db text These commands describe logging in to the Picture Perfect system as install and then becoming root to copy the file c gt telnet pphost Trying Connected to pphost na ilxi net Escape character is Kernel 2 4 9 31 on an i686 login install Password lt install s password gt Last login Wed Dec 18 15 06 20 from bctrenegade su Password lt root s password gt cp server cer cas db text Generating Picture Perfect Key File Use these commands to produce a key file which will be used to create the Picture Perfect certificate You should be in the cas db text directory when the openssl command is run You are required to supply your own password PEM pass phrase for the key file You will also use this password later in the configuration cd cas db text openssl genrsa des3 out picture key 512 1024 Genera
206. ermissions on page 104 for more information Review the system level permissions and create new permissions if necessary System level permissions are used to grant permission to use the client applications such as the Alarm Monitor create event action mappings or shut down the system Refer to Adding System Permissions on page 110 for more information Review the context definitions and create new contexts if necessary The context determines which items an operator can view and what actions they may take To define a context select the appropriate system permission and then select the appropriate permissions for each facility Refer to Adding Context Definitions on page 114 for more information Assign a context to each operator Context determines which items the operator can see and what actions they can take Refer to Adding Operators on page 60 for more information Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 101 Chapter 5 Assigning Permissions and Context Page 102 Facility Permissions Use Facility Permissions to grant or deny permissions to monitor and control items such as locking or unlocking door access points or control PTZ cameras view live or recorded video acknowledge alarms and more A system administrator may need permissions to create or modify items such as door access points while another operator may need only view permissions for applications such as the Alarm Monitor Facility Comma
207. es must be installed on both the server and client workstation Administration Guide After selecting the Administration This can happen the first time you try to view a PDF file The Guide link the window displays a Acrobat Reader program requires the user to accept the terms white background and the document of the license the first time the application is used does not display in the window Unfortunately the window to accept the license is presented behind other windows and is hidden from view Minimize the other windows until you see the license agreement window Accept the license and click OK The document then will display Contacting technical support For assistance installing operating maintaining and troubleshooting this product refer to this document and any other documentation provided If you still have questions you may contact technical support during normal business hours Monday through Friday excluding holidays between 8 a m and 8 p m Eastern Time GE Security United States 1 888 GE SECURITY 1 888 437 3287 Asia 852 2907 8108 Australia 61 3 9259 4700 Europe 48 58 326 22 40 Latin America 503 885 5700 Page 408 Facility Commander Administration Guide Appendix C Error Messages Appendix C Error Messages Table 147 Error messages numbers and page number This section identifies error messages that may be displayed by the Facility Commander user interface Error messages are iden
208. es representing a corporate office e San Francisco representing a sales office e New York representing a corporate office e Boston representing a data center To further organize the facilities two additional facilities are created West Coast Region and East Coast Region These regional facilities are used to group the individual area facilities which includes New York Boston Los Angeles and San Francisco By creating the regional levels a hierarchy is established Permissions do not have to be explicitly defined at the individual area level but rather can be inherited from their regional facility By granting access to the each regional administrator the administrator has access to everything below in the hierarchy The permissions are inherited from the facility above unless explicitly specified In this example e The system administrator is assigned the System Administrator Context and therefore given full access to all items in the system Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 5 Assigning Permissions and Context e A regional system administrator is assigned the Regional Administrator Context and therefore given access to items in their regional facility This administrator would not have access to items in another regional facility unless permission is specifically granted e Operators assigned to a lower level facility such as New York might be granted permissions to view and control the items assoc
209. eset Button Alarm Intercom Substation Busy Set Intercom Substation Set Disconnected Intercom Substation Call Set Button Event Intercom Substation Set Reset Intrusion Area Intrusion Area Alarm Set Reset Event Intrusion Area Disarmed Set During Alarm Intrusion Area Failed to Set Arm Intrusion Area State Set Armed All Clear Intrusion Area Armed and Set Reset In Alarm Intrusion Area Armed and Set Reset In Alarm Event Intrusion Area State Set Disarmed Intrusion Area State Set Unknown Intrusion DGP Intrusion DGP Battery Set Reset Low Intrusion DGP Battery Set Reset Missing Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 187 Chapter 8 Event Action Mapping Page 188 Table 74 Configure Mapped Event fields and descriptions Continued Event Source Event Type Condition Intrusion DGP Battery Set Test Fail Intrusion DGP Battery Set Reset Test Start Intrusion DGP Fuse Set Reset Failure Intrusion DGP Bypassed Set Reset Intrusion Main Panel Set Reset Failure Alarm DGP Offline Alarm Set Reset DGP Polled Set Reset DGP Siren Monitor Fail Set Reset DGP Tamper Alarm Set Reset DGP Tamper Set Reset Intrusion Keypad Offline Set Reset Intrusion Input Intrusion Input Alarm Set Reset Intrusion Input Alarm Set Reset Event Intrusion Input Bypassed Set Reset Intrusion Input Detector S
210. et Reset Dirty Intrusion Input Detector Set Reset Low Battery Intrusion Input Fault Set Reset Intrusion Input Holdup at Set Reset Night Intrusion Input Tamper Set Reset Intrusion Input Tamper Set Reset Alarm Intrusion Keypad Intrusion Keypad Set Reset Bypassed Intrusion Duress Alarm Set Reset Intrusion Duress Set Reset Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 8 Event Action Mapping Table 74 Configure Mapped Event fields and descriptions Continued Event Source Event Type Condition Intrusion Keypad Offline Set Reset Keypad Tamper Alarm Set Reset Keypad Tamper Set Reset Intrusion Keypad Set Reset Inhibited Intrusion Panel Intrusion Panel Burglar Set Alarm Cancelled Intrusion Panel Code Set Entered Intrusion Panel Duress Set Reset Code Entered Alarm Intrusion Panel Exit Fault Set Intrusion Panel Offline Set Reset Alarm Intrusion Panel Tamper Set Reset Alarm Intrusion Panel Tamper Set Reset Door Access Point Door Forced Alarm Set Reset Door Held Alarm Set Reset Door Prealarm Set Reset Invalid Badge Alarm Set Lost Badge Alarm Set Suspended Badge Alarm Set Unknown Badge Alarm Set Invalid Badge Event Invalid Badge Valid Badge Event Valid Badge Logical Input Logical Input Alarm Set Reset Tamper Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 189 Chapter 8 Event Action Mapping Acti
211. ete 2 A message displays with the process of the backup When the backup is complete a message displays reporting which logical logs were recorded to the tape during the backup process Record the identification of the logical logs written to the backup on the tape label J root minserver Shell Konsole 100 percent done Please label this tape as number 1 in the arc tape sequence This tape contains the following logical logs 5 Program over ommencing backup verification Informix Dynamic Server 2000 Yersion 9 21 UC4 archecker 11 30 00 09 32 11 30 00 09 34 on Linux 2 2 12 20smp 1 SMP Mon Sep 27 10 34 45 Backup _ gt verification process tmp tmp ac_msg log on fdev tape 16 Please put in tape number 1 pe 1 lt return gt or to end Figure 220 Backup verification Page 354 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 17 Backup Restore Informix Databases 3 Insert tape number one when the verification is complete and type 1 to continue Press Enter As each tape is verified a prompt displays to insert the next tape in the series When the last tape in the series has been verified or if you do not want to continue type 0 Press Enter Backing Up Files After the database backup verification is complete the process of backing up files begins The window in Figure 221 displays Commencing backup of files Please load a writable tape in dev tape and press
212. eted duration was 0 seconds Checkpoint loguniq 5 logpos Ox6db2b4 Restore a level 1 archive y n n Do you want to restore log tapes u ndnill Figure 232 Restore log tapes 6 Type N to skip this step Use the logical logs to recover transactions that have occurred since the last regular backup It is Page 364 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 17 Backup Restore Informix Databases not recommended to use the logs unless you are familiar with this process which is not described in this document The window in Figure 233 on page 365 displays next Do you want to restore log tapes y n n fusr informix bin onmode sy Program over Physical Recovery Started at Page 1 884 Physical Recovery Complete 0 Pages Examined O Pages Restored Logical Recovery Started 10 recovery worker threads will be started Logical Recovery Complete 0 Committed O Rolled Back 0 Open 0 Bad Locks 3533 Bringing system to Quiescent Mode with no Logical Restore Shutting down the database Quiescent Mode Checkpoint Completed duration was 0 seconds Checkpoint loguniq 5 logpos Ox64dc018 Informix Dynamic Server 2000 Stopped Reboot system to start database Y N gt M Figure 233 Reboot system to start database 7 The program ends the tape is ejected from the tape drive and you are prompted to reboot the system to start the database Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 365 Chapter 17 Backup Rest
213. evices tab 9 Select the Devices tab shown in Figure 78 For each permission such as Camera Permission select the appropriate permission level Permission is granted to all the actions preceding the selected option If Create is selected an operator has permission to view and update the camera device records If View is selected an operator can only view camera records and cannot modify or delete them 10 Review each item and select the appropriate permissions When you select one of these option buttons permission is granted to all of the actions preceding the selected option button Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 107 Chapter 5 Assigning Permissions and Context Page 108 System Permissions Use System Permissions to grant or deny access to system applications such as the Alarm Monitor or Event Monitor or other items that are not assigned to facilities Examples of items that are not in facilities include alarm colors alarm instructions and alarm profiles Using Pre defined System Permissions Facility Commander provides pre defined System Permissions that can be modified which include All System Permissions Grants all permissions including view update create and delete for system level items This also grants permission to use applications such as the Alarm Monitor or permission to configure event action mapping definitions e No System Permissions Grants no permissions There ar
214. evious instance of the is minimized on the Facility Commander client workstation If the previous aborted unexpectedly leaving instance of client aborted the network communication unexpectedly reboot the port allocated A third workstation to free up the possible cause is that another port If the problem persists program running on the contact the System workstation is using the port Administrator to change the number configured for the value of the Facility Commander client workspace port_number parameter in the client properties file to a port that is not in use by another program running on the workstation 00071 Port number lt number gt This message always Contact the System specified in the appears together with Administrator to change the client properties file is already message 00070 if the Facility value of the in use Commander client can workspace port_number determine that the network parameter in the port number is being used by _ client properties file to a port another program that is not in use another program running on the workstation 00072 Error in recording clip no The DVR was not in record Verify that the DVR is video available mode or the connection was recording and that a valid lost connection exists 00073 Alarm instructions currently unavailable This message appears on the Alarm Response dialog in the Instructions field if the External Access Control System that is the source of the alarm
215. f 10 MB Network 0 0 Percentage Of 100 MB Network 0 0 Statistics Creation Time Mon Jun 28 11 26 25 EDT 2004 DYRs and Workstation Host Names Current KiloBytes Per Second Current Frames Per Second Figure 242 Media Diagnostics page Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 377 Chapter 18 Viewing Diagnostics Service Framework Diagnostics The Service Framework Diagnostics page displays the date and time the last event was written to a log Use this page to reset the statistics and to return to the Diagnostics list page e Peak delay through service framework queue for an event msec e Average delay through service framework queue for an event msec e Peak time that an event waited in a mailbox msec e Average time that an event waited in a mailbox msec e Time to wait before processing a mailbox msec e Peak number of client mailboxes serviced e Minimum remote mailbox dispatch time msec e Maximum remote mailbox dispatch time msec e Maximum total remote mailbox dispatch time msec e Current number of concurrent mailbox dispatch threads e Peak number of concurrent mailbox threads e Peak number of concurrent mailbox dispatch threads e Average number of events sent per xml rpc mailbox transactions e Average time it took to filter an event msec Total number of dropped events e Total number of events delivered e Total number of xml rpc requests sec e Max measured deadline timing error msec e Max mea
216. f the splitter bars displayed between the panes or using the split pointers Click the split pointer to move the window left or right of its current position Customizing the Multi Viewer Facility Commander allows you to customize the Multi Viewer window by selecting which client application displays The default applications are the Graphics Viewer Video Console and the Alarm Monitor The Event Monitor can be displayed as well Use any combination of these applications or select three of the same application To close a window use the Window menu and select Exit To open a window right click in the empty pane Select the application name from the menu Or select Launch from the Multi Viewer window and choose the application Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 25 Chapter 2 Getting Started Page 26 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 3 Configuring the System This chapter describes how to configure the Facility Commander components such as Facility Commander servers and Picture Perfect systems and more A checklist is provided to guide system administrators in setting up Facility Commander In this chapter Checklist on page 28 Facility Commander Servers on page 31 Access Control Systems on page 38 Workstations on page 45 System Parameters on page 50 System Parameters on page 50 System Shutdown on page 53 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 27 Chapter 3 Configuring the Syste
217. fied priority level causes the Video Console to launch If a range is not specified the Video Console does not automatically launch e Use Event Action Mapping to associate the alarm event and video tagging instructions which include camera presets camera preset with video tagging and video tagging Refer to Tagging Video Events for Access Points on page 182 for more information e Identify the workstations where you want the Video Console to launch automatically when an alarm event occurs Refer to Workstations on page 45 for more information e Open the Alarm Monitor to display alarm activity If the Alarm Monitor is not opened the Video Console does not automatically launch Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 10 Using the Alarm Monitor Alarm Alert The Alarm Alert window shown in Figure 135 displays on the client workstation when an alarm event occurs and cannot be closed However the Alarm Alert window displays only when there are alarms if the total number of alarms equals zero the window does not display The Alarm Alert window displays a count of all the alarms in an operator s context The window filter does not filter any alarms in this window so all alarms that the operator can view are included in the alarm count To configure the Alarm Alert refer to Workstations on page 45 for more information Alarm Alert x Silence Figure 135 Alarm Alert window Refer to Table 78 for a descri
218. file Verify the syntax of the be incorrect or the model file specified in the file may not be the same model of the switcher record you are attempting to import the data for 00107 The input number is already The operator entered aninput Choose a different input in use for this area number on the intrusion input number not already in use by configuration screen that has existing intrusion inputs for already been used by another the specified intrusion area intrusion input assigned to the same intrusion area 00108 Choose a different area The area number is already in use for this panel The operator entered an area number on the intrusion configuration screen that has already been used by another intrusion area assigned to the same intrusion panel number not already in use by existing intrusion areas for the specified intrusion panel Page 438 Facility Commander Administration Guide Appendix C Error Messages Table 148 List of error numbers messages causes and actions Continued Message Causes Actions 00109 00110 Switcher configuration has already been imported This message can occur when you attempt to import an analog switcher configuration file The operator already imported this switcher configuration with the option to automatically create cameras and monitors and is now attempting to perform this operation a second time for the same analog switcher The create
219. from these options e Access control to issue commands such as locking or unlocking doors or activating an output e Analog Video Switcher to e Intrusion to issue commands such as arming or disarming an area Intercom to take an action such as making a call to an intercom station e E mails can be sent automatically to alert the appropriate staff members so that they can respond to the alarm condition e Video to tag video events or direct cameras to preset positions Refer to Tagging Video Events for Access Points on page 182 for instructions Page 180 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 8 Event Action Mapping Viewing Event Action Mappings Use the Event Action Mappings page to add copy or delete event action mapping records These records cannot be edited Instead copy an existing record and make the necessary changes to create a new record gt To view event action mapping records follow these steps 1 Select Device Management 2 Select Event Action Mappings The Event Action Mappings page shown in Figure 124 displays Event Action Mappings Request was successful Instructions View add or delete event action mappings Define actions the system will take when a specified event occurs The event action mappings in the list below are sorted first _ by event source and then by subsystem Add Event Action Mapping 4Pagelofib Goto Go Items per Page fio x
220. ges Table 148 List of error numbers messages causes and actions Continued Message Causes Actions 00020 Deletion of predefined data The operator attempted to The operator should not not permitted delete an item from the attempt to delete data where database that cannot be the delete icon has been deleted The Facility disabled If this message Commander user interfaces continues to occur examine prevent such deletion the log file for evidence of an attempts so this error attempted security breach or message may indicate an a software problem and send attempted security breach an the relevant information to attempt to bypass normal Customer Support for operations of the user assistance interface or a software problem 00021 Requested data not found The requested read operation Revisit the current screen to Data may have been deleted failed most likely due to a verify that the requested by another operator situation where another operation is still available If operator deleted an item that on a list screen use the was required for the appropriate entry in the requested operation This navigation menu to refresh problem can occur when the list screen You may multiple operators with observe that the record you configuration delete were attempting to delete is permission are altering the no longer present system configuration in an If on the DVR Link Camera uncoordinated manner An screen click on the Digital examp
221. gif LC fire1NoState git GB intrusion 1NoState gif FileName Files of Type gif jpeg ipg ee Attach Cancel Figure 193 Attach window with available symbols 6 Select the file you want to use as a symbol to represent the state condition Click Attach The symbol displays in the Initial State Icon window The Graphics Editor will use this image to represent the scheme 7 Select the Active check box to display the Attach window Select the image you want to display for each state condition Click Attach This image displays on the map when an alarm is generated and the state condition changes The Active check box displays a check mark indicating this image has been associated with the alarm state condition 8 Click Save when you are finished If you want to create another symbol scheme click New to clear the information and continue making new selections To create multiple schemes using the same point types select the scheme you want to use change the scheme name and click Save From the Windows menu click Exit to close the Symbol Editor window Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 291 Chapter 14 Creating Symbol Schemes Creating an Intrusion Symbol Scheme A symbol scheme for an intrusion area is different than symbol schemes for other devices Instead of using an icon representing a device the intrusion area is represented by a pattern gt To create an
222. guration should reflect the intrusion panel s internal configuration In this chapter Overview on page 250 Connecting Intrusion Panels on page 251 Configuring Intrusion Panels on page 254 Configuring Intrusion DGPs on page 261 Configuring Intrusion Keypads on page 266 Configuring Intrusion Areas on page 271 Configuring Intrusion Inputs on page 276 Configuring Intrusion Outputs on page 281 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 249 Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Overview The intrusion feature in Facility Commander allows operators to view intrusion areas using the Graphics Viewer view alarms and events from an intrusion panel and arm or disarm an intrusion area The following sections describe the feature in more detail e Terminology Connecting Intrusion Panels on page 251 Configuring Intrusion Devices on page 251 Terminology The security industry sometimes uses different terminology to describe intrusion devices Facility Commander uses the terms defined below Area A collection or group of input devices An area may be armed which means that an alarm is generated when the intrusion device is triggered Arm Disarm The arm state means the inputs associated with the area can generate alarms when an input is active The disarm state means the inputs will not generate alarms even if the input is active Data Gathering Panel DGP Input A type of intrusion s
223. h 0 ccccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeees 171 DVR Motion Search ccceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseneeseaeeeeaaeeseceeeeaaeetnes 173 Customizing the Video Console c ccccceeeeesceeseteeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 175 Creating Custom VIEWS cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeaeeeteneeeteeeeeeaaeeees 175 Create a window filter ceeecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeseaeeeseeeeeeaeeees 176 Display Additional Video Panes o oo eeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaaas 177 Chapter 8 Event Action Mapping ccccssseeeesseeeeeeeeees 179 OOVEIVICW eit E A E 180 Viewing Event Action Mappings sesesssesseerssssirssserrresrrrrnssrsrrnssne 181 Tagging Video Events for Access Points ueeeseeeeereeeeeresrrenesn 182 Tagging Video Events for Intercom Calls c cccceeceeeteessteeeeeneees 183 Activating Digital Outputs eccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeestaeeeteneees 184 Sending Automatic E mails ccceceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 185 Events in Event Action Mapping cccceeeeseeeeeeeenneeeeeetneeeeeeeee 186 Actions in Event Action Mapping cceeeeeesseeeeeeenneeeeeeenaeeeeeenaas 190 Chapter 9 Configuring Alarms cccsssseeceseeneeeeeseeeteeeeeees 193 OVEIWICW siipii ienien a ied ce ee 194 Configuring the Alarm Monitor cccccccseseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 196 SYNCHHONIZATION s 2cc e005 sh s hoes aide eesardede eebhaienbesd ivi eiaddistineee 196 Set
224. h the DVR DVR Health Fail Use the drop down list to select the DVR Alarm Health Fail alarm for this DVR DVR Health Trouble Use the drop down list to select the DVR Alarm Health Trouble alarm for this DVR Disk Full Alarm Use the drop down list to select the Disk Full alarm for this DVR Page 130 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Facility Tab Model Addresses Advanced Alarms C Foamy N Assigned to i YORK Available BOCA RATON CHICAGO DALLAS East Coast Region Global Facility LOS ANGELES PP GLOBAL Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility Sample Region Facility Figure 95 Configure DVR Facility tab 9 Select the Facility tab shown in Figure 95 and enter the information described in Table 54 A check mark indicates a required field Table 54 Configure DVR fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Assigned to Displays the facility or facilities for this device Items can belong to more than one facility This is a read only field and cannot be edited Available Vv Use to assign or change the facility membership for this item The facilities that display in this list depend on the operator s context and permissions e To assign the item to more than one facility select the first facility and press the Ctrl key while selecting the other facilities The selected facilities are highlighted Click Submit e If this item
225. hange Window Filter No Change Locale No Shutdown System No Run Configure No Diagnostics Alarm Colors No System Parameters No Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 457 Appendix E System Permissions Guard Supervisor System Permissions Table 157 Guard Supervisor System Permissions Enabled None View Update Create Delete Applications Alarm Monitor Yes Event Monitor Yes Video Console Yes Graphic Viewer Yes Editors Event Action Mappings Yes No No No No Alarm Instructions Yes No No No No Alarm Profiles Yes No No No No Graphic Editor Yes No No No No Symbol Editor Yes No No No No Operations Change Window Filter Yes Change Locale Yes Shutdown System No Run Configure No Diagnostics Alarm Colors No System Parameters No Page 458 Facility Commander Administration Guide Appendix E System Permissions Intermediate Guard System Permissions Table 158 Intermediate Guard System Permissions Enabled None View Update Create Delete Applications Alarm Monitor Yes Event Monitor Yes Video Console Yes Graphic Viewer Yes Editors Event Action Mappings Yes No No No No Alarm Instructions Yes No No No No Alarm Profiles Yes No No No No Graphic Editor Yes No No No No Symbol Editor Yes No No No No Operations Change Window Filter Yes Change Locale Yes Shutdown Sy
226. hat can be assigned to operators These pre defined permissions can be copied to create new permissions but they cannot be deleted The Delete icon is dimmed Refer to the Examples on page 118 to see how a typical system can be configured Facility Commander provides sample facility permission and context definitions This checklist is provided to describe to the system administrator all the tasks needed to implement the facilities permissions and context features The tasks begin with importing Picture Perfect facilities and end with assigning context to an operator Begin by importing existing Picture Perfect facilities Imported facilities are automatically be assigned to the same facility as in Picture Perfect Refer to Importing Facilities on page 68 for more information Review the imported facilities and examine their relationship Decide if the existing facility structure is suitable or if new facilities are needed lf you want to maintain the same facility structure as defined in Picture Perfect assign the imported facilities to the Global Facility If not create new facilities and move the imported facilities as needed Refer to Creating a Facility on page 70 for more information Review the facility level permissions and create new permissions if necessary Facility level permissions are used to grant permission to lock and unlock access points view video purge alarms and more Refer to Adding Facility P
227. hat should be synchronized with Facility Commander 4 Click Synchronize Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 97 Chapter 4 Importing Records Page 98 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 5 Assigning Permissions and Context This chapter describes how facilities permissions and context are assigned to operators and used to control access to features and visibility to items in the database In this chapter Overview on page 100 Checklist on page 101 Facility Permissions on page 102 System Permissions on page 108 Contexts on page 113 Examples on page 118 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 99 Chapter 5 Assigning Permissions and Context Page 100 Overview Facilities Facilities permissions and context are used to control access to features and visibility to items in the database such as the ability to view and edit device records or issue commands to lock and unlock access points Facilities Permissions Context Figure 72 Context definition In the equation above facilities determine which items an operator can see permissions determine what actions an operator can take and together make up the operator s context Facilities determine which items an operator can view or access The facilities feature partitions the Facility Commander database into logical segments or grouping of items Items include all the objects that an operator can view control or m
228. he Analog Switcher Inputs and Outputs page displays to allow the operator to make additional changes If any changes are made click Submit again to save the edited records Click Cancel to end the task and delete the camera and monitor records If another page is accessed these records remain in the database and will need to be removed manually Table 67 lists and describes the elements and descriptions Table 67 Analog Video Switcher Inputs and Outputs elements and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Inputs Port Identifies the port number The number of ports is dependent on the switcher model Camera Alias Identifies the camera alias This is assigned automatically by the configuration file Camera Title Displays a camera title This is assigned automatically by the configuration file Camera Use the drop down list to select to select the camera if you want to change the camera assignment Outputs Port Identifies the monitor port number Monitor Alias Identifies the monitor alias Monitor Use the drop down list to select the monitor to associate with the camera Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Troubleshooting Steps This section describes procedures to troubleshoot Facility Commander if you are experiencing problems with video If these steps do not resolve the problem contact Customer Support for assistance Configuration Tab
229. he Picture Perfect PEM file Refer to page 393 Update the EIF Event Manager Configuration file to enable SSL Refer to page 393 Update the EIF Request Manager Configuration file Refer to page 395 Copy the certificate to the Facility Commander server Refer to page 397 Add the Picture Perfect Certificate Refer to page 398 QIN SF S NER NYP RING SN Enable the SSL communication between Picture Perfect and Facility Commander Refer to page 399 The server certificate on the Facility Commander system is used by the Picture Perfect SSL library The following commands use FTP to transfer the certificate server cer in binary mode from a Windows server to Picture Perfect Copying File from Facility Commander The server cer file is located in the certificates directory under the Facility Commander web application as shown below These directories are the default installation paths which may not be the same if a different path was chosen during Facility Commander installation Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 389 Chapter 19 Advanced Configuration e Linux and AIX The file is located in the following directory var FacilityCommanderServer server webapps Merlin WEB INF classes resources certificates e FTP the File to Picture Perfect Copy the server cer file and follow these instructions to connect to the remote Picture Perfect system c gt cd Program Files FacilityCommanderServ
230. he alarm has not been acknowledged within a specified time and has been sent to one or more specified Picture Perfect workstations e Notified used by Network Alarm Notification NAN in a Picture Perfect Enterprise system alarms that are received by the alarm monitor on a subhost but are not acknowledged in a defined amount of time and are forwarded through a login window to a pre defined terminal on the network host Remote Notified used by Remote Alarm Notification RAN Refer to the Picture Perfect Administration Guide for more information Displays number of times the alarm has been set and reset Status Bar Total Alarms Displays the total number of alarms received This includes alarms generated by the access control system and Facility Commander Unacknowledged Displays the total number of alarms that are unacknowledged Highest Priority Displays the highest priority number of the alarms The alarm priority is defined in Picture Perfect Window Filter Icon Displays an icon indicating the operator has reduced the number of facilities in their view When all of the facilities are selected the icon no longer displays on the status bar Refer to Changing Window Name and Contents on page 211 for instructions to add window titles Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 10 Using the Alarm Monitor Table 79 Alarm Monitor descriptions Continued Element Descrip
231. he file will have a JLX extension 4 Click the Create Hyperlink icon on the toolbar as shown in Figure 192 The icon displays in the upper left hand corner of the drawing area 5 Drag the icon to the appropriate location on the site map 6 Right click the Create Hyperlink icon to display the Change Linking Properties button as shown in Figure 192 Figure 192 Change Linking Properties button Page 318 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays 7 Click Change Linking Properties to display the Hyperlink Settings window in Figure 193 on page 319 Hyperlink Settings x Link To Display Map 1st floor plan 1st floor plan 10_07 acme campus card shop 2003 fla site_boca fla sites Custom Hyperlink Image Alarm Hierarchy Indication Blinking Custom Alarm Indication Image c aProgram Files F acilityCommanderClien New Window _ gt r Launch New Window Save Cancel Figure 193 Hyperlink Settings window 8 Use the Link to Display Map list to select the site map you want to display when the hyperlink icon is selected on the Graphics Viewer 9 To use a custom graphic image instead of the red hyperlink icon use the Browse button to locate the graphic image The path name displays in the Custom Hyperlink Image field This icon displays on the site map representing a link to an associated map 10 Sel
232. he text editor This completes the procedure for changing the host name Enabling SSL Encryption for Picture Perfect This section describes how to configure SSL support between the Picture Perfect server and the Facility Commander server Using SSL enables a secure communication channel between these two systems The steps in this section are very technical and should only be performed by an IT Network Administrator who is knowledgeable about SSL Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 19 Advanced Configuration The following commands apply to a Windows Facility Commander server and a Linux Picture Perfect server Because your system configuration may be different ask your Network Administrator who will know how to execute these commands on your system To enable SSL encryption follow the steps listed inTable 141 Table 141 Overview of SSL Instructions for Picture Perfect Procedures WY Copy the Facility Commander Certificate to Picture Perfect Refer to Copying File from Facility Commander on page 389 e Linux and AIX on page 390 FTP the File to Picture Perfect on page 390 Move the Facility Commander Certificate to cas db text Refer to page 391 Generate Picture Perfect Key file Refer to page 391 Generate the Picture Perfect Certificate Request from the Picture Perfect Key Refer to page 392 Generate the Picture Perfect Signed Certificate Refer to page 392 Generate t
233. hen this message displays Continue restore 3 Type Y when this message displays Do you want to back up the logs The logs contain details of the database transactions database already residing on disk drive If you have problems with your database these logs may be used to recover transactions that have occurred since the last backup J root minserver Shell Konsole Flags fchunk nechunks flags owner 1 N informix informix informix size free bpages flags pathname P0 256000 190360 fdev informixdb masterdbs 102400 96855 PO ld2 informixdb DataGroup 1048575 731592 P0 1d3 infor mixdb HistoryGroupd 1048575 1048572 PO 1d3 informixdb HistoryGroup1 Continue restore ty ndy Do you want to back up the logs tyny Please mount tape 1 on var LogicalLogs Logs and press Return to continue I Figure 230 Prompt for salvaging logs 4 Insert the tape to store the logical log files The device name listed is a file stored on the disk drive Press Enter and the window in Figure 231 displays Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 363 Chapter 17 Backup Restore Informix Databases informix chk dbs offset size free bpages flags pathname 1 1 4 256000 190360 P0 fdev informixdb masterdbs 2 0 102400 96855 Po 1d2 informixdb DataGroup 3 0 1048575 731592 PO 1d3 informixdb HistoryGroupo 3 0 1048575 1048572 P0 ld3 informixdb HistoryGroup 4 Continue restore y ndy Do you want to ba
234. his check box only if this server is a Media server The default value is the check box is not selected Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 33 Chapter 3 Configuring the System Page 34 E mail Server Tab Address E mail Server Advanced Alarms Facility I SMTP Enabled SMTP IP Address or Hostname p __ SMTP Port i aa SMTP User Name pe ooo Password p Confirm Password acacacacack Figure 17 Configure Facility Commander Server E mail Server tab 6 Select the E mail Server tab as shown in Figure 17 and enter the information described in Table 10 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 10 Configure Facility Commander Server fields and description Field Name REQ Description SMTP Enabled Select the check box to enable the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP settings to send e mail messages The check box is clear by default SMTP IP Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server Address or Host Contact the IT department for this information if necessary Name The host name is case sensitive SMTP Port Required if the SMTP Enabled check box is cleared The default value is 25 SMTP User Enter a valid user name Contact the IT department for this Name information Password Enter the password Contact the IT department for this information Confirm Enter the password again Password Fac
235. iated with the New York facility but not others To accomplish this the context definitions would look like this System Adminisirator Context System Administrator System Permissions All System Permissions Facility Permissions All Facility Permissions for Global Facility East Coast Regional Administrator Context East Coast Regional Administrator System Permissions All System Permissions Facility Permissions All Facility Permissions for East Coast Facility Because the East Coast Facility is the parent facility of New York and Boston the regional administrator will automatically be given full access to New York and Boston items West Coast Regional Administrator Context West Coast Regional Administrator System Permissions All System Permissions Facility Permissions All Facility Permissions for West Coast Facility Because the West Coast Facility is the parent facility of Los Angeles and San Francisco the regional administrator will automatically be given full access to Los Angeles and San Francisco items Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 119 Chapter 5 Assigning Permissions and Context Page 120 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices This chapter describes how to configure video devices cameras and camera preset positions CCTV monitors and switchers Troubleshooting steps are provided for extra assistan
236. ible because of a system malfunction you can use the backup data to restore the lost or damaged data This chapter describes how to back up selected files and folders and restore the backed up files to the original hard disk or a new hard disk Backup Modes Facility Commander provides a backup utility for backing up files and database records to a tape device which is the default setting If you want to back up the files to disk you will need to edit two configuration files to change the output destination to disk To edit the configuration files refer to Appendix A on page 401 which includes Editing the Informix Configuration File on page 403 e Scheduling the Backup Utility on page 404 Use Table 137 to select the appropriate mode and device to back up the Facility Commander database records e Back up the Informix database to a tape device or disk To do this you must edit the backup utility and Informix configuration files to redirect the output to disk Once you edit the configuration file to change the output to disk instead of tape the backup utility will not be able write to tape because of the changes in the configuration file Table 137 Databases and Backup Modes Database Mode Backup Device Informix Interactive Tape or disk Informix Scheduled Cron Disk only Page 350 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 17 Backup Restore Informix Databases Backup Types There are two types of
237. ical software generated Input Group or Input Communications Failure such as Micro Comm Fail or Reader Comm Fail Prepend LI to the Picture Perfect description Output Output physical Digital Prepend DO to the Picture Perfect description Output Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 57 Chapter 4 Importing Records Operator Records Facility Commander recognizes two types of operator records external operators and local operators e External operators defined in the Picture Perfect system are imported into Facility Commander e Local operators are defined only in the Facility Commander system and not in the Picture Perfect system To log in to Facility Commander operators must be defined in Facility Commander as well Operators can be added manually or imported from the Picture Perfect system Refer to Importing Operators on page 65 for instructions Facility Commander provides a system administrator account called admin Change the password for this account to prevent unauthorized persons from accessing the system In the event the Picture Perfect system is offline this account will allow access to Facility Commander The default system account identifies a local operator only when there are no other operators defined in the system The default account allows you to add local operators or import external operators and begin to configure other parts of the system Operator Passwords Operator passw
238. ics JVM Statistics Use the JVM Diagnostics page shown in Figure 241 to view the following statistics e Maximum amount of memory available Total memory claimed e Free memory available The number of available processors is also listed on this page The JVM Diagnostics page displays the date and time the last event was written to a log Use this page to reset the statistics and to return to the Diagnostics list page JVM Diagnostics Instructions View JVM Diagnostics Back to Diagnostics Home Page Reset Statistics Available processors 1 Statistic Value Maximum amount of memory available 65088K Total memory claimed 56892K Free memory available 14218K Figure 241 JVM Diagnostics page Page 376 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 18 Viewing Diagnostics Media Diagnostics Use the Media Diagnostics page shown in Figure 242 to view the following statistics e Total KB per second e Percentage of 10 MB network e Percentage of 100 MB network e DVRs and workstation host names e Current kilobytes per second e Current Frames per second The Media Diagnostics page displays the date and time the last event was written to a log Use this page to reset the statistics and to return to the Diagnostics list page Media Diagnostics Instructions i view Media Diagnostics Back to Diagnostics Home Page Reset Statistics Total KB Per Second o Percentage O
239. ide Chapter 1 Introduction This illustration describes the events when an operator using the Video Viewer on the client system requests video from camera three This camera device is located at site two which is managed by the Media server as shown in Figure 2 The client system sends a message to Facility Commander server requesting a connection to camera three The Facility Commander server performs a lookup in the database to identify which DVR the camera is connected to and which system controls and manages the components The Facility Commander sends a message to the remote Media server to expect a connection from the client system The client system opens a TCP IP connection socket to the Media server with the server configuration to receive the video stream The remote Media server sends compressed video from the associated DVR to the client workstations Using the Video Viewer application the operator is able to view the video stream from camera three The Media server guarantees that local video does not have to be processed by a Facility Commander server located remotely but by the Remote Media server that is closer to the client workstations Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 5 Chapter 1 Introduction Page 6 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 2 Getting Started This chapter describes how to log in and use the Facility Commander Launcher to open other applications and how to use the
240. ideo management The key feature of Facility Commander is integrated digital video There are two architectural configurations available depending on the organization s size and geographic locations If the site is relatively small or in one central location then the Media server can be installed on the Facility Commander Application server to manage the video services In large environments with several geographically distributed sites it may be undesirable to transmit video clips across the network In this case adding a Remote Media server to the system improves the video transmission process Centralized video management Using a single server configuration this example describes the events that occur when an operator wants to view video The Media server installed on the Facility Commander Application server shown in Figure 1 has two DVRs with four cameras and two client workstations Figure 1 Single server with centralized video Access Control Facility Commander server server Media server ial Ea Be Facility Commander Clients DVR 1 DVR 2 v wV w w Cam 1 Cam 2 Cam3 Cam 4 The illustration includes the following process e The client workstation sends a message to the Facility Commander Application server requesting a connection to camera three e The Facility Commander Application server performs a lookup in the database to identify which DVR the camera is connected to and which sy
241. ies a symbol or icon to place on the graphic display representing a door access point or another device However when you create an intrusion area a pattern is used to identify the intrusion area state such as Armed All Clear Disarmed and more gt To define an intrusion area follow these steps 1 Select the Device Palette icon to display the Device Palette window as shown in Figure 184 A Graphics Editor 1 C Jamie Merlin maps working 5th floor plan w_intrusion_jlx Window File Edit Placement Transform Utilities Zoom Layer Help Di te g petan x b z e A o o PARNASSUS AVENUE aloje a 3 IRVING STREET Create a symbol scheme to define the pattern used to identify the intrusion area Figure 184 Graphic Editor with defined intrusion area 2 Select the Intrusion Area tab to display the defined intrusion area symbols or patterns Select the appropriate symbol using tooltips to display the scheme name 3 Move the mouse cursor to the drawing area the cursor changes to a crosshair shape Click in the drawing area to create the first point on the site plan Trace the area using horizontal vertical or diagonal lines created by clicking to create an anchor point and moving the cursor to the next anchor point Page 312 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays Use the Zoom menu to increase the
242. ies the current or active camera that is sending video to the Video Console The camera label identifying the camera is comprised of the tag name and description Refer to Controlling Cameras on page 163 for more information Window Filter aF Displays an icon indicating a window filter has been applied Right click in the navigation pane and select Window Filter The contents of the list in the navigation pane are determined by which Facility Commander facilities are selected Refer to Create a window filter on page 176 Server Connection Indicator d Displays an icon indicating if the system with the Video Console is connected to the Facility Commander server e Green indicates the system is communicating with the server e Red indicates the system is no longer communicating with the Facility Commander server Controlling Cameras This section describes how to view live video recorded video and use Event Action Mapping to control the camera and capture video Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 163 Chapter 7 Using the Video Console Page 164 Live Video An operator selects a camera from the navigation pane and the Video Console displays live video from that camera If that camera has pan tilt zoom capabilities only one operator can control the camera When an operator attempts to control the camera in use by another operator a message displays stating PTZ device currently in use Af
243. ig xml file accessible through the The database name or URL network Contact the local address may be invalid or the network Administrator for database host may not be assistance accessible through the network The host containing the database may be down disconnected from the network or the name server may not be providing translation of the host name to a valid IP address For Unix systems verify that entries in the etc hosts file are correct 00028 No database configured The systemConfig xml file The System Administrator that defines the database should verify the location and location could not be found or content of the file and correct did not have the correct as required and restore it format from a backup if needed 00029 Input value to validator is not Indicates a software problem Provide this error message correct type and the relevant information from the system log file to Customer Support for assistance 00030 Incorrect number of criteria Indicates a software problem Provide this error message provided to validator and the relevant information from the system log file to Customer Support for assistance 00031 Criterion value is not correct type Indicates a software problem Provide this error message and the relevant information from the system log file to Customer Support for assistance Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 421 Appendix C Error Messages Table 148 List of error nu
244. ility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 3 Configuring the System Advanced Tab Addresses E mail Server Advanced Alarms Facility Minimum Thread Pool Size a0 Maximum Thread Pool Size 1100 Figure 18 Configure Facility Commander Server Advanced tab 7 Select the Advanced tab as shown in Figure 18 and enter the information described in Table 11 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 11 Configure Facility Commander Server fields and description Field Name REQ Description Minimum Y These values are used to control the number of concurrent Thread Pool activities Enter the minimum value The default value is Size 80 Maximum Y These values are used to control the number of concurrent Thread Pool activities Enter the maximum value The default value is Size 100 As the application server grows the thread pool size will dynamically grow Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 35 Chapter 3 Configuring the System Alarms Tab Address E mailServer Advanced Alarms Facility Remote Media Server Comm Failure Remote Media Server Comm Failure z Figure 19 Configure Facility Commander Server Alarms tab 8 Select the Alarms tab as shown in Figure 19 and enter the information described in Table 12 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Ta
245. imported items from Picture Perfect Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 81 Chapter 4 Importing Records Editing Digital Inputs Edit each digital input to change a time zone or to specify which graphic display shows in the Graphics Viewer when an alarm event occurs gt To make changes to a digital input follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then Digital Inputs The Digital Inputs list page displays 2 Locate the digital input you want to edit and select the link The Configure Digital Input page as shown in Figure 56 displays Configure Digital Input Instructions View or edit the digital input Digital Input Information Tag Name P1200116 NY FIRE ALARM 1 Description Dl 200116 NY FIRE ALARM 1 Reference ID General NCE Graphic Display NY Floor 01 z Time Zone GMT 05 00 America New_York EST E Cancel Figure 56 Configure Digital Input page 3 Enter the information described in Table 34 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages 4 Click Submit to save the record Table 34 Configure Digital Input fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Tag Name Y Enter a unique name to identify this item Use 2 36 characters Description Enter a description for this item Use 1 100 characters The description does not have to be unique Reference ID Enter a name to associate this item to
246. in Figure 188 If an alarm is generated at an access point or other device on a lower level map the alarm condition displays on each level of the map a ewe Oo Window File Layer View Help Alarm condition lt Facility View W pes E amp Global Facility reflected on three Facwity 1 PP GLOBAL maps Sample Permissions and Contexts Sample Region Facility Unassigned Items Facility CameraMap intercom intrusioni a ewe a Window File Layer View Help Facility View K E Global Facility gi 5 a Facury1 Facilities E PP GLOBAL FU E Sample Permissions and Contexts E Sample Region Facility E Unassigned Items Facility CameraMap hriercomttap Miami IntrusionMap a Oo Window File Layer View Help p 4 is erara Boca Raton Global Facility Facuwty1 PP GLOBAL Sample Permissions and Contexts F Sample Region Facility Unassigned Items Facility CameraMap intercommap intrusionmap a IRVING STREET masi AVENUE o Fk ia O Figure 194 Hierarchical map arrangement In this example there are three site maps United States Florida and Boca Raton e The United States map has three states designated as hyperlink images including California Florida and New York When an alarm is generated in Boca Raton the outline around Florida is configured
247. in as the newly imported system administrator 10 va Operators Change the admin operator password Refer to Adding Operators on page 60 11 Y Facilities Import the Picture Perfect facilities and assign the records to Global Facilities Refer to Importing Facilities on page 68 12 Facilities Create Facility Commander facilities and define their relationship to the Picture Perfect facilities 13 va System Define the system permissions such as viewing the Permissions Alarm Monitor Refer to System Permissions on page Facility Commander Administration Guide 108 Chapter 3 Configuring the System Table 7 Checklist Continued Step REQ HTML Action 14 VY Facility Define the facility permissions such as locking or Permissions unlocking doors control cameras and acknowledge alarms Refer to Facility Permissions on page 102 15 va Contexts Define the contexts which defines the items an operator can view and what actions they can take Refer to Contexts on page 113 16 Y Operators Import all other Picture Perfect operators and assign the records to Global Facility Refer to Importing Operators on page 65 17 va Operators Assign the appropriate context to each operator Refer to Adding Operators on page 60 18 va Access Points Import the access points and set the time zone The access points are automatically assigned to the correct facility Refer to Importing Access Points on pag
248. ing Cameras to DVRs on page 141 for more information Assign the equipment to the appropriate facility Refer to Facilities on page 67 for more information Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Define digital video recorders Facility Commander supports the following digital video multiplexer recorders Table 48 Supported Video Devices Provider Model Description Version GE GE DVMRe 4 CD Requires duplex PPC firmware Version 3 18 or GE DVMRe 10 CD later and MUX firmware Version 3 24 or later GE DVMRe 16 CD GE DVMRe CT StoreSafe Pro 4 Requires triplex firmware Version 5 x or later GE DVMRe CT StoreSafe Pro 10 CT StoreSafe and StoreSafe Pro series GE DVMRe CT StoreSafe Pro 16 recorders are part of the family of wavejet compression based technology products GE DVMRe CT II StoreSafe Pro Il 4 CT Il and StoreSafe Pro Il series recorders are GE DVMRe CT II StoreSafe Pro Il 10 part of the family of wavejet compression based GE DVMRe CT II StoreSafe Pro Il 16 technology products GE Discovery 300 VOS Version 3 x GE Discovery 2400 These recorders are part of the family of VisioWave video products GE Discovery 105E VOS Version 4 x GE Discovery 1205 These recorders are part of the family of GE Discovery 2405 VisioWave video products GE Discovery 2415 GE Evolution 2800 GE Evolution 2809 GE Evolution 3005 GE ECVRS SymDec 16 1 47k SymSafe 1 28i SymSafe Pro 1 28i
249. ings Refer to Viewing Mapping Event Action Mappings on page 181 42 Y Workstations Configure the workstations and open the Facility Facility Commander Administration Guide Commander Launcher on each workstation to verify the settings Browser only workstations are not configured Refer to Logging In from a Workstation on page 12 Chapter 3 Configuring the System Facility Commander Servers The Servers page displays a list of the defined servers which can include an Application server and Media servers Use the SMTP settings when you plan on sending alarm alerts by e mail to people in your network configuration Contact your Information Technology IT department for the correct SMTP address Viewing Facility Commander Servers Use the Servers page to view add edit copy or delete a Facility Commander server record You may need to edit this information if you make changes in the network configuration or if you want to change any of the other settings gt To view Facility Commander server records follow these steps 1 Select System Administration 2 Select Facility Commander Servers The Facility Commander Servers page as shown in Figure 14 displays Facility Commander Servers Instructions View edit add or delete Facility Commander servers Add Server 4Pagelofib Goto Go Items per Page is Description Reference ID IP Address or Hostname Tet fie Facility Commander Server 3 18 148 62 Lin
250. ink them in a hierarchal arrangement the associated icons on each level displays the icon in its alarm state condition Also a device such as an access point can have multiple alarms at the same time When this happens there are rules for determining the current appearance of the symbol The icon representing the highest priority alarm displays For example if an access point has a Door Forced Alarm with priority 10 and a Lost Badge Alarm with priority 50 the symbol s appearance will reflect the Door Forced state attribute and condition If all alarms for the device have the same priority then the symbol s appearance will reflect the most recent alarm occurrence For example a Lost Badge and Suspended Badge Alarm both have a priority of 50 The Lost Badge alarm occurred at 10 15 and the Suspended Badge alarm occurred at 10 18 The symbol s appearance will reflect the Suspended Badge state attribute and condition Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 335 Chapter 16 Viewing Graphic Displays Navigating the Graphics Viewer gt To display the Graphics Viewer follow these steps 1 Open the Facility Commander Launcher window 2 Select Launch and Graphics Viewer or select the Graphics Viewer icon from the Viewers toolbar The Graphics Viewer shown in Figure 205 displays Splitter Bar and Pointers Title Bar Graphics Viewer 1 Window File Layer View Help Facility View E Global Facility FAacI
251. instructions to import existing drawings with DXF extensions e You can also use the drawing tools to create a graphic display Refer to Drawing Tools on page 305 for more information Y Place symbols representing access points cameras and more Symbols can be grouped on different layers to improve visibility when viewing the completed graphic displays Add text labels if needed Refer to the following sections e Creating a Graphic Display on page 308 e Associating Access Points and Other Devices on page 309 e Associating Camera Devices on page 310 e Associating Intercom Devices on page 311 Configuring Intrusion Keypads on page 266 e Adding Text Labels to the Site Map on page 313 Y Save file and upload completed graphic display to the server Refer to Managing Graphic Display Files on page 326 for more information Y Link two graphic displays together using the Create Hyperlinks icon Refer to Linking Graphic Displays on page 318 for more information Y Build hierarchal graphic displays using the Create Hyperlink Area icon Refer to Building Hierarchical Displays on page 320 Page 300 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays Using the Graphics Editor The Graphics Editor allows you to associate symbol schemes to site maps The symbol scheme identifies icons that represent doors cameras or other device in different alarm conditions These icons are associated with an
252. interface was trying to log in workstation host name For from does not match the host Unix systems verify the host name for any workstation name translation entry in the defined on the Facility etc hosts file Commander server 00061 Password and confirmation When configuring a new or Re enter the value for the password must match updating an existing item the value entered for the password confirmation did not match the value entered for the password These values must match to ensure that the password entered is what the operator intended password confirmation and click on the Submit button to save the changes Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 427 Appendix C Error Messages Table 148 List of error numbers messages causes and actions Continued Message Causes Actions 00062 Invalid user name or The specified username and Re enter the user name or password please try again password did not match the password in case you had information for any operators mistyped the previous defined on the server information and try to log in again If the problem persists contact the System Administrator for assistance 00063 Number of items per page not The number of items The operator should select valid specified to be shown on list the number of items per page screens was not a valid value from the select list provided The Facility Commander user on the list screen If the interfaces limit the
253. intrusion symbol scheme follow these steps 1 From the Facility Commander Launcher select Launch gt Symbol Editor or select the Symbol Editor icon from the Editors toolbar The Symbol Editor window shown in Figure 192 on page 288 displays 2 Click the New button 3 Enter the name of the scheme in the Scheme Name field 4 Select Intrusion Area from the Device Type drop down list The appropriate alarm state attributes and state conditions display 5 Double click on a pattern in the Symbols column to display the Attribute Panel window shown in Figure 194 No Pattern or Line Of Attribute Panel nN oe Line Color _ gt E AN le Brightness A Ba EY co Fill Color T Ses A E Bee may Bia Pattern _______ gt Eee Blinking Transparency Patterns Line Styles Figure 194 Attribute Panel 6 Select the attributes that you want to apply such as color pattern line and brightness The selection displays in the Samples pane Refer to Table 125 for instructions 7 Select the Blinking check box if you want the pattern to blink when an alarm is generated 8 Click Apply All to apply the selected attributes The symbol displays in the Initial State Icon window The Graphics Editor will use this image to represent the scheme 9 Select the Active check bo
254. ion Figure 52 Configure Access Point Facility tab 6 Select the Facility tab as shown in Figure 52 and enter the information described in Table 33 Table 33 Configure Access Points fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Assigned to Displays the facility or facilities for this access point Items can belong to more than one facility This is a read only field and cannot be edited Available Y Use to assign or change the facility membership for this item The facilities that display in this list depend on the operator s context and permissions To assign the item to more than one facility select the first facility and press the Ctrl key while selecting the other facilities The selected facilities are highlighted Click Submit e Ifthis item is already assigned to a facility listed in the Assigned To list press the Ctrl key before selecting the new facility assignment e To assign the item to all the listed facilities select the first facility in the list press the Shift key and select the last facility in the list All the facilities are highlighted Click Submit Page 78 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 4 Importing Records Synchronizing Access Points gt To synchronize access points follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then Access Points The Access Points list page displays 2 Click Synchronize and the Synchronize page in Figure 53 displays
255. ion Guide Page 447 Appendix D Facility Permissions Intermediate Guard Facility Permissions Table 152 Intermediate Guard Facility Permissions Enabled None View Update Create Delete Controls Lock Unlock Yes Access Points Activate Reset Yes Digital Outputs Control PTZ Cameras Yes Enable Disable No Digital Input Monitoring Enable Disable No Logical Input Monitoring Monitors Purge Alarms No Remove Alarms Yes Acknowledge Alarms Yes View Live Video Yes View Recorded Video Yes Setup Operators Yes No No No No Contexts Yes No No No No System Permissions Yes No No No No Facility Permissions Yes No No No No Facilities Yes No No No No Facility Commander Yes No No No No Servers Workstations Yes No No No No Access Control Systems Yes No No No No Page 448 Facility Commander Administration Guide Appendix D Facility Permissions Table 152 Intermediate Guard Facility Permissions Enabled None View Update Create Delete Devices Access Points Yes No No No No Digital Inputs Yes No No No No Logical Inputs Yes No No No No Digital Video Recorders Yes No No No No Cameras Yes No No No No Intercom Exchanges Yes No No No No Intercom Stations Yes No No No No Analog Video Switcher Yes No No No No Intrusion Panels Yes No No No No Intrusion Areas Yes No No No No Intrusi
256. ion Inputs page shown in Figure 184 displays Configure Intrusion Inputs Instructions View or edit the intrusion input Intrusion Input Information Tag Name Motion Detectors Description INV Computer Lab Reference ID General Alarms Facility Intrusion Area NY Computer Lab z Input Number 50 Cancel Figure 184 Configure Intrusion Inputs page 3 Enter the information described in Table 117 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages 4 Click Submit to save the record Table 117 Configure Intrusion Inputs fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Tag Name Y Enter a unique name to identify this item Use 2 36 characters Description Enter a description for this item Use 1 100 characters The description does not have to be unique Reference ID Enter a name to associate this item to a blue print or wiring diagram Use 1 20 characters Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 277 Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices General Tab Intrusion 4rea NY Computer Lab Input Number 50 Figure 185 Configure Intrusion Inputs General tab 5 Enter the information described in Table 118 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 118 Configure Intrusion Inputs fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description
257. ion Mapping Activating Digital Outputs gt To configure Facility Commander to activate a digital output follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then Event Action Mappings The Event Action Mappings page shown in Figure 124 on page 181 displays 2 Click Add Event Action Mapping The Configure Event Action Mapping page as shown in Figure 127 displays Configure Event Action Mapping Instructions View or add the event action mapping Define the actions the system will take when the specified event occurs Event Action Event Source Type Subsystems Door Access Point z Access Control Manager z Event Sources Subsystem Actions AP 200101 NY COMPUTER ROOM Activate Output z AP 200200 NY SHIPPING DOCK Output Destination AP 200201 NY CAFETERIA DO 200116 NY FIRE SOUNDER z JAP 200300 NY LOBBY WEST AP 200301 NY CONFERENCE ROOM AP 200400 NY LIBRARY AP 200401 NY TRAINING ROOM Event Types By Condition Set Door Forced Alarm Set Door Held Alarm Set Door Prealarm Set Invalid Badge Alarm Set Lost Badge Alarm Set Suspended Badge Alarm Set Unknown Badge Alarm Reset Door Forced Alarm Reset Door Held Alarm Reset Door Prealarm xl Submit Cancel Figure 127 Configure Event Action Mapping page 3 Use the Event Source Type drop down list to select the access point or device 4 Use the Event Sources list to select one or more event sources
258. ion described in Table 14 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages 4 Click Submit to save the record Table 14 Configure Access Control Systems fields and description Field Name REQ Description Tag Name Y Enter a unique name to identify this item Use 2 36 characters Description Enter a description for this item Use 1 100 characters The description does not have to be unique Reference ID Enter a name to associate this item to a blueprint or wiring diagram Use 1 20 characters Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 39 Chapter 3 Configuring the System Address Tab Address External System Advanced Alarms Facility P Address or Host Name 3 33 133 63 Access Control System Port feoas Time Zone GMT 00 00 GMT GMT z Facility Commander Server Facility Commander Server x M Enabled Figure 23 Configure Access Control System Address tab 5 Select the Address tab as shown in Figure 23 and enter the information described in Table 15 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 15 Configure Access Control System fields and description Field Name REQ Description Host Name Y Enter the host name of the server The host name is case sensitive Refer to Verifying Computer Host Name on page 384 if you do not know the system host name Access Cont
259. ion was released The session timeout period is a system parameter with a default of 30 minutes but is changeable by the System Administrator 00005 Subsystem lt name gt is nota Indicates a software problem Examine the system log file to licensed resource or an attempted security determine if any unauthorized breach network activity is present If there is evidence of a software problem send the error message and corresponding information from the log file to Customer Support for assistance 00006 Invalid parameter specified in Indicates a software problem Examine the system log file to license request subsystem is or an attempted security determine if any unauthorized lt name gt quantity is breach network activity is present If lt number gt there is evidence of a software problem send the error message and corresponding information from the log file to Customer Support for assistance 00007 No license for subsystem Indicates a software problem Examine the system log file to lt name gt or an attempted security determine if any unauthorized breach network activity is present If there is evidence of a software problem send the error message and corresponding information from the log file to Customer Support for assistance 00008 Invalid license code Indicates a software problem or an attempted security breach Examine the system log file to determine if any unauthorized network activity is present If there is evid
260. ions on page 241 Viewing Intercom Stations gt To view intercom stations follow these steps 1 Select Device Management 2 Select Intercom Stations The Intercom Stations page as shown in Figure 145 displays Intercom Stations Instructions View edit add or delete intercom stations 4Page 1 of 1 gt Go to Go Items per Page jis x Tag Name Description Reference Extension Master Intercom Station Exchange ID NY Bldg 1 Intercom in AlphaCom ae Peg A Lobby sw o aen Main Intercom AlphaCom ae ee ous AN System in Bldg 1 ee e a Figure 152 Intercom Stations list page Page 240 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 12 Configuring Intercom Devices Adding Intercom Stations gt To add an intercom station follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then Intercom Stations The Intercom Stations page displays 2 Click Add Intercom Station The Configure Intercom Station page as shown in Figure 153 displays Configure Intercom Station Instructions View or edit the intercom station Intercom Station Information Tag Name INY Intercom Bldg 1_Master Description Main Intercom System in Bldg 1 Reference ID Mo General Monitoring Alarms Facility Intercom Exchange AlphaCom Exchange z Extension e200 M Master Station Time Zone GMT 00 00 GMT GMT X Cancel Figure 153 Configure Intercom Station page 3 Enter the information
261. is already assigned to a facility listed in the Assigned To list press the Ctrl key before selecting the new facility assignment e To assign the item to all the listed facilities select the first facility in the list press the Shift key and select the last facility in the list All the facilities are highlighted Click Submit 10 Click Submit to save the record After you add the DVR to the system you must define the cameras and return to the DVR page to link the cameras to the DVR Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 131 Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Configuring Cameras Facility Commander supports multiple camera equipment vendors including their devices with pan tilt zoom features and preset camera positions Refer to the following sections Adding Cameras on page 133 Configuring IP Cameras on page 137 Viewing Camera Preset Positions on page 138 Adding Camera Preset Positions on page 139 Linking Cameras to DVRs on page 141 Viewing Cameras Use the Cameras page to view add edit copy or delete camera records gt To view camera records follow these steps 1 Select Device Management 2 Select Cameras The Cameras page as shown in Figure 96 displays Cameras Instructions View edit add or delete cameras Add Camera 4Pagelofib Goto Go Items per Page fio SL OT fA i NY Cam 100 NY B1 DVR Presets E nv cam 200 NY B1 DVR Presets E ie NY Cam
262. isplays cssseeeeeeeees 299 OVE IVIGW E E E E A AE 300 Using the Graphics Editor ceccccececeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 301 Drawing TOONS esrresnin a aa A AE 305 Graphic Attributes seeeneeeeeeeeeeeneesrresr nestr nssr nsstn usnu nnsnnnnrnnnennnnnnne 306 Creating a Graphic Display 0 cccceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeeseeeeeeeaeeees 308 Associating Access Points and Other Devices n 309 Associating Camera Devices 0 eecccecccceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeneees 310 Associating Intercom Devices eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaees 311 Creating Intrusion Areas c cccceeeeesececeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseneeeseeeeseeeeee 312 Adding Text Labels to the Site Map cecscessteeeeeseeestteeeeeneees 313 Saving the SiteMap ses cvasecteevtas ere eisevededs sancdttataseeteatianedeeeeeden 314 Importing AutoCAD DrawingS c cccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeseaaeeeeees 314 Maintain Layers in AutoCAD Drawings cccceeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 317 Linking Graphic Displays 0 ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee seas eeeeeeeeseaeeeeeneeeees 318 Building Hierarchical Displays 0 c ceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 320 Working With Layers sessies nannan Kaa A KaR 323 Creating a New Layer ssssssssesssseesssesssessressstnnsstnnetnnsnnnennnnnnn ee 323 Selecting a Layer eceesceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeteeeeesaeeeeeneeeseeeeeeaeeeee 324 Renaming a L
263. isplays on the status bar Refer to Customizing Window Name and Contents on page 230 for instructions to add window titles Server Displays an icon indicating if the system with the Event Monitor is Connection connected to the Facility Commander server Indicator e Green indicates the system is communicating with the server e Red indicates the system is no longer communicating with the Facility Commander server Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 11 Using the Event Monitor Alarm Events List Refer to Table 83 for a description of the column headings that display for alarm events Table 83 Event Monitor Alarm Events description Element Description Alarm State Alarm Alarm point is in an active state Reset Alarm point has been reset Tamper The wiring to the alarm point has either been cut or shorted Processing Active The alarm has not been acknowledged by an operator Pending The alarm has been acknowledged by an operator but not removed Completed The alarm has been removed but the alarm input is waiting for a physical reset Purged The alarm has been removed but the alarm input is waiting for a physical reset Bumped The alarm has not been acknowledged within a specified time and has been sent to one or more specified Picture Perfect workstations Notified Used by Network Alarm Notification NAN in a Picture Perfect Enterprise system alarms that are received
264. issions Table 151 Guard Supervisor Facility Permissions Enabled None View Update Create Delete Controls Lock Unlock Yes Access Points Activate Reset Yes Digital Outputs Control PTZ Cameras Yes Enable Disable Yes Digital Input Monitoring Enable Disable Yes Logical Input Monitoring Monitors Purge Alarms Yes Remove Alarms Yes Acknowledge Alarms Yes View Live Video Yes View Recorded Video Yes Setup Operators No No No No No Contexts No No No No No System Permissions No No No No No Facility Permissions No No No No No Facilities No No No No No Facility Commander No No No No No Servers Workstations No No No No No Access Control Systems No No No No No Page 446 Facility Commander Administration Guide Appendix D Facility Permissions Table 151 Guard Supervisor Facility Permissions Enabled None View Update Create Delete Devices Access Points No No No No No Digital Inputs No No No No No Logical Inputs No No No No No Digital Video Recorders No No No No No Cameras No No No No No Intercom Exchanges No No No No No Intercom Stations No No No No No Analog Video Switcher No No No No No Intrusion Panels No No No No No Intrusion Areas No No No No No Intrusion Inputs No No No No No Facility Commander Administrat
265. isted in the Assigned To list press the Ctrl key before selecting the new facility assignment e To assign the item to more than one facility select the first facility and press the Ctrl key while selecting the other facilities The selected facilities are highlighted Click Submit To assign the item to all the listed facilities select the first facility in the list press the Shift key and select the last facility in the list All the facilities are highlighted Click Submit Page 152 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Associating Analog Video Switcher Devices Use the Analog Video Switcher Inputs and Outputs page to associate the analog video switcher with cameras and monitors The information can be added manually or by loading a configuration file Kalatel provides a utility program to generate an XML file which contains camera and monitor records If the number of inputs or outputs on the screen does not match your device you have to manually edit the switcher definition file The definition files can be found in the Resources folder The naming format is lt brand gt SwitcherCommands xml For instructions on how to import this file follow these steps 1 Select Device Management 2 Select Analog Video Switchers The Analog Switchers page shown in Figure 105 displays 3 Click the appropriate Inputs amp Outputs link on the list page The Analog Switcher Inputs and
266. it before Facility seconds Commander polls the intercom device The default value is 15 seconds Command Retry va Enter the number of seconds to wait before trying to Interval seconds reconnect to the Facility Commander server The default value is 30 seconds Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 237 Chapter 12 Configuring Intercom Devices Page 238 Alarms Tab Model Addresses Advanced miarms Facility Intercom Exchange Comm Failure Alarm IntercomExchangeProfile Intercom Exchange Reset Alarm IntercomExchangeResetProfile z Figure 150 Configure Intercom Exchanges Alarms tab 8 Select the Alarms tab as shown in Figure 148 and enter the information described in Table 91 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 91 Configure Intercom Exchange fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Intercom Exchange Comm Failure Alarm Use the drop down list to select the appropriate alarm profile when the intercom exchange is no longer communicating with the Facility Commander server Intercom Exchange Reset Alarm The intercom exchange can reset itself and if it does this alarm is generated Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 12 Configuring Intercom Devices Facility Tab Model Addresses Advanced Alarms remy Assigned to Available Sample Permissions and Contexts Facilit
267. it or delete access points 4Pagelofib Go to Go Items per Page 10 pictureofiamie fd Tag Name as Description Reference ID T fie AP 200100 NY LOBBY EAST 4P 200100 NY LOBBY EAST pictureofjamie ny lity AP 200101 NY COMPUTER ROOM 4P 200101 NY COMPUTER ROOM pictureofjamie Tey lity AP 200200 NY SHIPPING DOCK AP 200200 NY SHIPPING DOCK pictureofjamie vey i AP 200301 NY CONFERENCE ROOM AP 200301 NY CONFERENCE ROOM pictureofjamie i lity AP 200400 NY LIBRARY AP 200400 NY LIBRARY pictureofjamie i fies AP 200401 NY TRAINING ROOM AP 200401 NY TRAINING ROOM pictureofjamie i fie AP 201100 NY B1 NORTH STAIR AP 201100 NY B1 NORTH STAIR pictureofjamie i AP 201201 NY B1 WEST STAIR AP 201201 NY B1 WEST STAIR pictureofjamie ffx AP 201300 NY B2 ACCOUNTING AP 201300 NY B2 ACCOUNTING pictureofjamie ff f AP 201401 NY B2 DATA CENTER AP 201401 NY B2 DATA CENTER pictureofjamie Figure 50 Configure Access Point page 3 Enter the information described in Table 31 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages 4 Click Submit to save the record Table 31 lists and describes the fields on the Configure Access Point page Table 31 Configure Access Points fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Tag Name Y Enter a unique name to identify this item Use 2 36 characters Description Enter a description for this item Use
268. ith icons representing access points cameras and more In this chapter Overview on page 286 Using the Symbol Editor on page 287 Creating a Symbol Scheme on page 291 Managing Symbol Editor Files on page 294 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 285 Chapter 14 Creating Symbol Schemes Page 286 Overview The Symbol Editor and Graphics Editor allow you to use site maps of your premises and associate symbols graphic images or icons to device types such as access points camera types digital inputs logical inputs and digital outputs When an alarm event occurs one or more of the symbols changes its appearance based on the alarm state condition if configured to do so A symbol scheme is created by selecting a device type an icon to represent the initial state of the device and a collection of icons representing the different state attributes and state conditions e Device types represent door access points cameras logical inputs digital inputs digital outputs intercom and intrusion devices e State attributes represent the type of alarm generated such as an Invalid Badge or Door Forced alarm and more The state attributes that display are appropriate for the selected device type e State conditions represent the state of the alarm point such as set reset and tamper As an example the Door Access Point includes state attributes such as Door Forced and others The state attributes for a Door Forced al
269. ities doors and other records to Facility Commander Chapter 5 Assigning Permissions and Context on page 99 describes how to assign operator permissions Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices on page 121 describes how to configure DVRs cameras and camera preset positions as well as CCTV Monitors and Analog Video Switchers Chapter 7 Using the Video Console on page 157 describes how to view live and recorded video and how to search for video clips Chapter 8 Event Action Mapping on page 179 describes how to associate events to actions When an alarm occurs video events can be tagged for later investigation to send e mails and more Chapter 9 Configuring Alarms on page 193 describes how to change alarm colors create alarm instructions and alarm profiles Chapter 10 Using the Alarm Monitor on page 205 describes using the Alarm Monitor window how to select time zones and view maps and video of alarm events Chapter 11 Using the Event Monitor on page 219 describes the Event Monitor window and how to filter events Chapter 12 Configuring Intercom Devices on page 231 describes how to configure intercom devices Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices on page 249 describes how to configure intrusion devices and instructions to use when connecting the intrusion equipment to Facility Commander Chapter 14 Creating Symbol Schemes on page 285 describes how to create a symbol scheme to use with graphic displays Also incl
270. ity assignment To assign the item to all the listed facilities select the first facility in the list press the Shift key and select the last facility in the list All the facilities are highlighted Click Submit Page 136 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Configuring IP Cameras IP cameras differ from analog cameras in that they are associated to hardware by IP address and are not directly connected to a DVR To configure an IP camera the DVR must be able to identify the IP address of the IP camera and vice versa Note For VisioWave devices refer to the Facility Commander 2 2 with VisioWave Setup Guide gt To add an IP camera follow these steps 1 If you have not already added a DVR select Device Management and then Digital Video Recorders The Digital Video Recorders page displays Refer to Configuring Digital Video Recorders on page 124 to add a DVR 2 Select Device Management and then Cameras The Cameras page displays Refer to Configuring Cameras on page 132 to add an IP camera 3 Select Device Management and then Digital Video Recorders The Digital Video Recorders page displays Find the DVR you want to link this IP camera to and then select Link Camera Refer to Linking Cameras to DVRs on page 141 to link the IP camera to this DVR gt To associate a DVR to an IP camera follow these steps 1 After you have added a DVR and an IP camera right cli
271. k box to select individual layers A check mark indicates the layer is visible Select the check box to display a layer The Show Hide Layer window remains open to allow you to move back and forth between layers Clear the check box to remove a layer from view If you want to view only Layer 1 clear the Layer 0 check box 3 Click X to exit from the Show Hide Layer window Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 339 Chapter 16 Viewing Graphic Displays Issuing Commands The Graphics Viewer allows operators to respond to alarm events and issue commands Different menus with different actions display depending on the type of device and alarm state such as e Lock and Unlock Doors e View Video from a Specific Camera on page 342 View Video from Monitor Devices Enable or Disable Inout Devices on page 344 Connect and Disconnect Intercom Devices on page 345 Arm or Disarm Intrusion Areas on page 346 An action may be dimmed if the operation is not allowed An action may not be allowed if the operator does not have permission to perform the action or the action is not supported by the product Table 134 lists the devices and the available actions for each device Table 134 Summary of devices and actions Device Commands Access Points Momentary Unlock Duration Unlock Permanent Unlock Lock Door Cameras e View Video Live e Display in CCTV Monitor Input Devices e Enable e Disabl
272. k to edit server information Figure 14 Facility Commander Servers page Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 31 Chapter 3 Configuring the System Adding a Facility Commander Server gt To add a Facility Commander server to the system follow these steps 1 Select System Administration and then Facility Commander Server The Facility Commander Servers page displays 2 Click Add Server The Configure Facility Commander Server page as shown in Figure 15 displays Configure Facility Commander Server Instructions View or edit the Facility Commander server Server Information Tag Name T Description Reference ID Addresses E mail Server Advanced Alarms Facility Host Name f3 33 133 63 Port e085 Time Zone GMT 00 00 GMT GMT bd I Media Server Only Cancel Figure 15 Configure Facility Commander Server page 3 Enter the information described in Table 8 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages 4 Click Submit to save the record Table 8 Configure Facility Commander Server fields and description Field Name REQ Description Tag Name Y Enter a unique name to identify this item Use 2 36 characters Description Enter a description for this item Use 1 100 characters The description does not have to be unique Reference ID Enter a name to associate this item to a blue print or wiring diagram
273. kstations 4Pagelofib Goto Go Items per Page is ea Tag Name Description Hostname Alarm Alert Enabled Auto ideo Popup Enabled esaonsao faction ves eo a No Yes workstation 200 betjlennoni workstation 104 Figure 29 Workstations page Page 46 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 3 Configuring the System Adding a Workstation gt To add a workstation follow these steps 1 Select System Administration and then Workstations The Workstations page displays 2 Click Add Workstation The Define Workstation page as shown in Figure 30 displays Define Workstation Instructions View or edit the workstation Click Alarm Alert Enabled if the workstation should display the Alarm Alert Notification window when a new alarm occurs Workstation Information Tag Name workstation 100 Description General ME Hostname bctjlennon Time Zone GMT 05 00 America New_York EST Z M Alarm Alert Enabled M auto video Popup Enabled Intercom Station NY Intercom Bldg 1_Master 7 Cancel Figure 30 Define Workstation page 3 Enter the information described in Table 20 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages 4 Click Submit to save the record Table 20 Define Workstation fields and description Field Name REQ Description Tag Name Y Enter a unique name to identify this item Use 2 36
274. l Input fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Assigned to Displays the facility or facilities for this digital input Items can belong to more than one facility This is a read only field and cannot be edited Available A Use to assign or change the facility membership for this item The facilities that display in this list depend on the operator s context and permissions e To assign the item to more than one facility select the first facility and press the Ctrl key while selecting the other facilities The selected facilities are highlighted Click Submit e Ifthis item is already assigned to a facility listed in the Assigned To list press the Ctrl key before selecting the new facility assignment e To assign the item to all the listed facilities select the first facility in the list press the Shift key and select the last facility in the list All the facilities are highlighted Click Submit Page 84 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 4 Importing Records Synchronizing Digital Inputs gt To synchronize digital inputs follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then Digital Inputs The Digital Input list page displays 2 Click Synchronize and the Synchronize page in Figure 53 displays Instructions Choose from the available entries and click Synchronize DI 200117 NY FIRE ALARM 2 Synchronize Figure 59 Synchronize page 3 Select the rec
275. l some files still remain in the software directories The removal procedure does not remove any files that were changed or added after the installation This is standard for all Windows application removals These files can be deleted if the product will not be reinstalled If you are installing a later version of the product you may wish to save the license and database encryption key files Data Import Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 405 Appendix B Troubleshooting Information Table 146 List of Common Problems with Possible Causes and Solutions Problem Possible Causes and Solutions After importing data from a Picture Perfect system to a Facility Commander server using the Informix database the system has poor performance Performance problems if they occur will be observable when bringing up client applications with a navigation pane The pane will take several seconds to populate These problems typically only occur at the initial data import where the database has few or no records The database engine is using inaccurate table size information thereby causing poor query performance You can observe query performance using the database query diagnostic screen Note that the system automatically forces an update of the table size information once per day at 3 30 am To manually force the update to achieve optimal performance immediately follow the procedure below For Informix 1 Log in
276. last facility in the list All of the facilities are highlighted Click Submit Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 49 Chapter 3 Configuring the System System Parameters The Configure System Parameters page displays the system locale operator idle timeout parameter alarm priority range to launch a Video Console alarm priority range to require an alarm response select video preplay time and an option to select encryption with Facility Commander client applications The operator idle timeout represents the length of time that a workstation is idle before Facility Commander forces a log off Launch Video Console by Alarm Priority Facility Commander automatically launches a Video Console when an alarm event occurs with associated video when configured to do so Each time an alarm event occurs within the specified priority range the Video Console launches and displays both live video and the recorded video clip of the event Any time an alarm event occurs within a specified priority range the Video Console will launch displaying live and recorded video for the alarm event If a range is not specified the Video Console will not launch automatically Require an Alarm Response The Alarm Monitor window allows operators to respond to incoming alarms by using the Alarm Response window Using the Alarm Response window an operator can acknowledge remove or purge an alarm from the Alarm Monitor Any time an alarm e
277. lay not found Images or symbol files that are referenced by the graphic display were not found This can occur if these files were referenced across the network and are not accessible at the current time or if referenced files on the workstation were manually deleted after the graphic display was created Examine the client log file to determine which files are missing or are not accessible Restore the missing files and retry the operation Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 433 Appendix C Error Messages Table 148 List of error numbers messages causes and actions Continued Message Causes Actions 00084 Error in removing resource This error can occur during a Determine if the file still exists request to delete a symbol on the server If so retry the image or graphic display from operation If the problem the server if the specified file persists contact the System cannot be deleted The file Administrator to determine may have been deleted by why the file cannot be another operator may have deleted been manually set to read only or may be locked because it is in use by another program 00085 No domains found in system This message is displayed Examine the window filter and when in attempting to enable additional facilities to associate an item to a symbol locate items of the on a graphic display no items appropriate type and retry the of the appropriate type are association operati
278. lays Configure Logical Input Instructions View or edit the logicalinput Logical Input Information Tag Name fu 200101 NY COMPUTER ROOM Description fu 200101 NY COMPUTER ROOM General ZIT Graphic Display NY Floor 02 z Time Zone GMT 05 00 EST EST ha Cancel Figure 62 Configure Logical Input 3 Enter the information described in Table 37 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages 4 Click Submit to save the record Table 37 Configure Logical Input fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Tag Name Y Enter a unique name to identify this item Use 2 36 characters Description Enter a description for this item Use 1 100 characters The description does not have to be unique Reference ID Enter a name to associate this item to a blue print or wiring diagram Use 1 20 characters Page 88 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 4 Importing Records General Tab raphic Display NY Floor 02 x Time Zone GMT 05 00 EST EST M Figure 63 Configure Logical Input General tab 5 Select the General tab as shown in Figure 63 and enter the information described in Table 38 A check mark indicates a required field Table 38 Configure Logical Input fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Display Map Use the drop d
279. le 68 Configuration Troubleshooting Tips Step Action 1 e Verify the client computer hosts file contains an entry for the Facility Commander host name and the Remote Media server host name if applicable If you are using DNS for all machines this does not apply Use the hostname command Windows Linux and AIX 2 Verify the DVR is plugged in and is recording 3 e Verify the Facility Commander license file includes video and camera capabilities If you are unsure contact Customer Support to review the license 4 Review the DVR page to check the following items Model Tab Verify the correct model has been chosen such as the Kalatel DVMRe 16CT Confirm this DVR is associated with the correct server Address Tab Verify the correct IP Address Port and RS 485 Address have been entered Also verify this information on the DVR itself Password If an Ethernet password was defined in the DVR the Tab same password must be entered on the Password tab 5 e DVRs can be connected to the Facility Commander server or to a Remote Media server If the DVR is connected to a Media server verify the Media Server Only check box on the Facility Commander page is selected e Verify the Remote Media server is running 6 Refer to the following sections to continue troubleshooting the problem Configuration on page 155 Client Path Settings on page 156 Communication Failure on page 156
280. le of this is where one Video Recorders menu item operator is linking a camera then click on the Link to a DVR device while Cameras link of the specific another operator is deleting DVR You may observe that the same camera the camera you were attempting to link is no longer available If this message continues to occur examine the log file for evidence of uncoordinated changes to the system configuration or a software problem and send the relevant information to Customer Support for assistance 00022 Attempt to save data failed The database save operation requested by the operator failed possibly due to a network problem that made the database inaccessible an inconsistency in the database or a software problem The operator should try the operation again If the problem persists examine the log file for evidence of a network problem database inconsistency or a software problem and send the relevant information to Customer Support for assistance Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 419 Appendix C Error Messages Table 148 List of error numbers messages causes and actions Continued Message Causes Actions 00023 Attempt to update data failed The requested updated Revisit the current screen to Data may have been updated operation failed most likely verify that the requested or deleted by another due to a situation where operation is still available operator another operator updated
281. lect one several or all the facilities in the list To import several facilities select the first facility and press the Ctrl key while selecting the other facilities The selected facilities are highlighted To import all the facilities select the first facility in the list press the Shift key and select the last facility in the list All the facilities are highlighted 5 Click Import The list page displays the imported facilities from the Picture Perfect server Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 69 Chapter 4 Importing Records Creating a Facility gt To add items or operators to a facility follow these steps 1 Select System Administration and then select Facilities The Facilities list page displays 2 Click Add Facility The Configure Facility page as shown in Figure 44 displays Configure Facility Instructions View edit or change memberships for the facility Click on a folder icon to see the membership status for items of that type Facility Information Tag Name Boca Raton Description Boca Raton FL Facility Members MZA This facility has no members Cancel Figure 44 Configure Facility Add New Facility 3 Enter the information described in Table 29 A check mark indicates a required field If this is a new record this message displays This facility has no members Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages If this is not a new record
282. lect the Video Viewer icon from the Viewers toolbar The Video Console window shown in Figure 117 displays Snapshot Control Buttons 2 Video Console 1 File View Window Help CustomView X Facility View E Global Facility FACILITY 1 Sample Region Faci Unassigned Items F gt AlarmRecorder EJ P Legend Dome 34 O Kalatel 1 P camera_01_01 p 4 Preset 001 Preset 002 Preset 003 Preset 004 Preset 005 P camera_01_02 d camera_01_03 j camera_01_04 P camera_01_05 d camera_01_06 Focus Near d camera_01_07 Focus Far je camera_01_08 iris Open Camera Selection ee Iris Close IP Legend Dome cam S Status Bar Playback Date Time Menu Figure 117 Video Console Table 69 lists and describes the elements in the Video Console Table 69 Video Console elements and descriptions Element Title Bar Description Displays Video Console window instance number and custom window title e Refer to Managing Multiple Windows on page 20 for more information about window instance numbers e Refer to Creating Custom Views on page 175 for instructions to add window titles Page 160 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 7 Using the Video Console Table 69 Video Console elements and descriptions Continued Element Navigation Pane Description The Video Console displays the configured DVRs and cameras in a hierarchal structure Each DVR i
283. lect the cameras associated with this DVR If you are linking an IP camera with a SymDec device you must select Input 17 as the first IP camera input 5 Click Submit when you are finished associating the cameras with DVR device Page 142 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Configuring Analog Video Switchers The Analog Video Switchers page is used to add a new analog video switcher record upload a configuration file and identify the inputs and outputs Note Refer to the Installation Manual for specific cabling instructions Viewing Analog Video Switchers gt To view the analog video switcher records follow these steps 1 Select Device Management 2 Select Analog Video Switchers The Analog Video Switchers page as shown in Figure 105 displays Analog Video Switchers Instructions View edit add or delete analog video switchers Add Analog Video Switcher 4Pageiofib Goto Items per Page 50 fA RB Kalatel Switcher KTD 348 Kalatel KTD 348 3 137 171 33 Inputs and Outputs Inputs and Outputs Figure 105 Analog Video Switchers page Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 143 Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Adding an Analog Video Switcher gt To add an analog video switcher follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then Analog Switchers 2 Click Add Analog Switcher The Configure Analog Switcher page as shown in Figure
284. list to select one or more alarm conditions Press the Ctrl key while selecting multiple items Use the Subsystems drop down list to select Digital Video Select the appropriate action from the Subsystem Actions drop down list Select a camera device from the Destination drop down list If the camera has preset positions another drop down list displays to select the preset positions Click Submit to save the record Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 8 Event Action Mapping Tagging Video Events for Intercom Calls gt To create an intercom event when an alarm occurs follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then Event Action Mappings The Event Action Mappings page displays as shown in Figure 124 on page 181 2 Click Add Event Action Mapping The Configure Event Action Mapping page as shown in Figure 126 displays Configure Event Action Mapping Instructions Define the actions the system will take when the specified event occurs Condition hold the Ctrl key down for multiple selection When defining Event Sources or Event Types By Event Event Source Type Event Sources NY Bldg 1 Intercom Event Types By Condition Set Intercom Substation Call Answered Set Intercom Substation Call Connected Set Intercom Substation Call Ringing Set Intercom Substation Call To Busy Set Intercom Substation Call To Private Set Intercom Substation Call Button Alarm Se
285. lities or assigning the display to a new facility gt To edit the graphic displays records follow these steps 1 Select System Administration 2 Select Graphic Displays The Graphic Displays list page as shown in Figure 204 displays Graphic Displays 00051 Operation cancelled by the operator r i Instructions Search Go View or edit graphic displays 4Pagelof2 gt Go to Go Items per Page 15 z LY CCT A i ist floor plan 10_07 1st floor plan 10_07 jlx i 1st floor plan 1st floor plan jlx Tey ist floor plan with intercom system 1st floor plan with intercom system jlx Te acme campus acme campus jlx Ty boca site plan boca site plan jlx T card shop 2003 card shop 2003 jlx Ty fla site_boca fla site_boca jlx Ty fla sites fla sites jlx Ty fla sites_old fla sites_old jlx fi floor 1 floor 1 jlx iy floor plan 10 08 floor plan 10 08 jlx iy main building w_computer room main building w_computer room jlx i NY Floor 01 NY Floor 01 jlx i NY Floor 02 NY Floor 02 jlx i test test jlx Figure 204 Graphic Displays page 3 Select the tag name to create or edit the tag name and description or change the facilities where this graphic is assigned The Configure Graphic Display page as shown in Figure 205 on page 331 displays Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays Configure Graphic Display Instructions View or
286. lity Hold the Ctrl key down for multiple selection Figure 177 Configure Intrusion Keypad Facility tab 7 Select the Facility tab as shown in Figure 177 and enter the information described in Table 112 A check mark indicates a required field Table 112 Configure Intrusion Keypad fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Assigned to Items can belong to more than one facility This is a read only field and cannot be edited Available Y Use to assign or change the facility membership for this item The facilities that display in this list depend on the operator s context and permissions e To assign the item to more than one facility select the first facility and press the Ctrl key while selecting the other facilities The selected facilities are highlighted Click Submit e If this item is already assigned to a facility listed in the Assigned To list press the Ctrl key before selecting the new facility assignment To assign the item to all the listed facilities select the first facility in the list press the Shift key and select the last facility in the list All the facilities are highlighted Click Submit Page 270 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Configuring Intrusion Areas Use the Intrusion Areas page to view add edit copy or deleted intrusion area records Refer to the following sections for instructions e Viewing Intrusion Areas
287. lity Unassigned Items Facility West Coast Region N NNNNA Figure 144 Window Filter window 2 Use the Custom Title field to identify a title to display on the Video Console title bar Maximum number of characters is 256 3 Select the check boxes to indicate the items you want to display in the navigation pane of the client application A check mark indicates the item is selected Clear the check boxes to remove the items from view 4 Click Save The Event Monitor displays a window filter icon in the status bar indicating the list of items has changed Page 230 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 12 Configuring Intercom Devices This chapter describes how to configure intercom exchanges and intercom stations Readers should be knowledgeable about hardware configuration for the intercom equipment Refer to the vendor s documentation for instructions to install and configure the equipment In this chapter Overview on page 232 Configuring Intercom Exchanges on page 233 Configuring Intercom Stations on page 240 Tips for Creating Symbol Schemes on page 246 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 231 Chapter 12 Configuring Intercom Devices Overview The intercom feature in Facility Commander allows operators to connect calls from substations to master stations Using the Graphics Viewer operators can view intercom call station events on graphic displays
288. lity Commander Administration Guide Page 215 Chapter 10 Using the Alarm Monitor Sr AP 100101 BOCA COMPUTER ROOM DOOR FORCED OPEN Alarm i x oO E g d a8 Alarm Response Instructions No alarm instructions Responses to Date admin 01 16 04 13 54 31 EST AREA FLOODED admin 01 16 04 13 54 46 EST CALLED DEPARTMENT MANAGER Enter New Response Select Responses os Acknowledge Remove Purge Cancel Figure 140 Alarm Response window Table 81 lists and describes the elements in the Alarm Response window Table 81 Alarm Response elements and descriptions Element Description Title Bar Displays alarm source type and a custom window title if configured to do so Control Toolbar Use the to issue commands such as the default action or access the action menu Refer to Control Toolbar on page 209 for more information Instructions Displays alarm instructions such as who to call or who to dispatch to the area Alarm instructions for Picture Perfect generated alarms are defined in the source system Up to five messages can be assigned to each alarm e Alarm instructions for Facility Commander generated alarms are defined in Facility Commander Responses to Date Displays all the responses to the alarm event up to the current time The operator s user name the date and time of the response and the response text displays Enter New Use to
289. log switcher is offline Page 148 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Facility Tab Model Addresses Advanced Femy D Assigned to pEr Available BOCA RATON East Coast Region Global Facili PP GLOBAL Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility Sample Region Facility West Coast Region Figure 111 Configure Analog Video Switcher Facility tab 9 Select the Facility tab shown in Figure 111 and enter the information described in Figure 65 A check mark indicates a required field Table 65 Configure Analog Video Switcher fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Assigned To Displays the name of the facility where this graphic display is currently assigned Items can belong to more than one facility This is a read only field and cannot be edited Available Y Use to assign or change the facility membership for this item The facilities that display in this list depend on the operator s context and permissions To assign the item to more than one facility select the first facility and press the Ctrl key while selecting the other facilities The selected facilities are highlighted Click Submit e If this item is already assigned to a facility listed in the Assigned To list press the Ctrl key before selecting the new facility assignment e To assign the item to all the listed facilities select the first facility in the list press
290. lso includes instructions to configure the system and use the client applications Who Should Use This Document This document is intended for system administrators who are responsible for planning configuring and operating Facility Commander Administrators should be familiar with personal computers client and server relationships databases Web browsers and graphical user interface GUI navigation They must also have a working knowledge of the following Picture Perfect application Digital Video CCTV equipment Intercom equipment Intrusion equipment Database operations Security needs of the customer s facility Operators using the system should read the chapters relating to their duties and responsibilities How This Document Is Organized This document is organized as follows Chapter 1 Introduction on page 1 describes the system components and describes how remote media servers are used to transmit video Chapter 2 Getting Started on page 7 describes the Facility Commander Launcher instructions on how to log in to the system using the client application and the Web interface Chapter 3 Configuring the System on page 27 describes setting Facility Commander Administration Guide Page ix Page x up the system by identifying the Facility Commander server Picture Perfect server system parameters and more Chapter 4 Importing Records on page 55 describes how to import Picture Perfect operators facil
291. ly field and cannot be edited Available Y Use to assign or change the facility membership for this item The facilities that display in this list depend on the operator s context and permissions To assign the item to more than one facility select the first facility and press the Ctrl key while selecting the other facilities The selected facilities are highlighted Click Submit e If this item is already assigned to a facility listed in the Assigned To list press the Ctrl key before selecting the new facility assignment e To assign the item to all the listed facilities select the first facility in the list press the Shift key and select the last facility in the list All the facilities are highlighted Click Submit Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 3 Configuring the System Workstations Use the Workstations page to identify the computer systems in your network that can run the client applications such as the Alarm Monitor An operator will not be able to access any of the client applications if the workstation is not defined Configuring the Alarm Alert Window Use Workstations to enable the Alarm Alert window on a particular workstation The Alarm Alert window in Figure 28 displays on the workstation when an alarm event is generated Alarm Alert xj Silence Figure 28 Alarm Alert window The Alarm Alert window shows the operator the number of active unacknowledged and highest
292. m Page 28 Checklist Table 7 Checklist After the product installation is complete there are additional steps to complete before you begin using Facility Commander Some of the steps are optional and can be configured later To configure the system follow these steps Step REQ HTML Action 1 Y Login Log in to Facility Commander Use the user name admin and the password admin 2 U Server Configure the Facility Commander server Refer to Facility Commander Servers on page 31 3 Server Define the e mail settings which includes the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP settings used for e mail alerts If you do not know the SMTP settings contact the IT department for this information 4 Y Access Control Configure the Picture Perfect system in the network Systems Refer to Access Control Systems on page 38 5 Y Reboot the Facility Commander server 6 va System Review the system parameters and make changes if Parameters necessary Refer to System Parameters on page 50 7 va Operators Import the Picture Perfect system administrator operator records and assign the records to Global Facility You will import other Picture Perfect operator records later in the process Refer to Importing Operators on page 65 8 Y Operators Assign System Administrator Context to the system administrator operator records Refer to Adding Operators on page 60 9 va Login Log out of Facility Commander and log
293. mander User Name Y Enter the Picture Perfect operator name used by Facility Commander to connect to the access control system Password Enter the operator s password Confirm Password Re enter the password Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 41 Chapter 3 Configuring the System Advanced Tab BSS ance Facility Ping Interval seconds e Backup IP Address or Host Name I Enable Encryption With Access Control System Figure 25 Configure Access Control System Advanced tab 7 Select the Advanced tab as shown in Figure 25 and enter the information described in Table 17 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 17 Configure Access Control System fields and description Field Name REQ Description Ping Interval Y This is the number of seconds or ping interval the seconds Facility Commander server will ping the access control system The default setting is five seconds Backup IP Address If this is a redundant Picture Perfect system enter or Host Name the IP address or host name of the backup machine The host name is case sensitive Enable Encryption Select this check box to encrypt communication to With Access between the access control system and Facility Conirol System Commander Page 42 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 3 Configuring the System Alarms Tab Addresses External System Adv
294. mbers messages causes and actions Continued Message Causes Actions 00032 Enter value for required field When configuring a new or existing item the operator did not provide a value for a field where a value was required This error message can also occur where a value of one field is dependent upon the value of another field The operator should specify a value for the field 00033 Duplicate user name please try another When in the process of creating a new or updating an existing operator record a user name that is already in use by another operator record was entered The operator should enter a different user name 00034 00035 00036 Text entered must be at least lt numbers gt characters Text entered exceeds lt numbers gt characters Enter a number from lt numbers gt to lt number gt The operator entered a value for the field that was too short in length had too few characters The minimum length required is provided in the error message The operator entered a value for the field that was too long in length had too many characters The maximum length permitted is provided in the error message The operator entered a value for a numeric quantity that was not valid The error message specifies the range of valid values Enter a value that has sufficient length Enter a value that does not exceed the maximum length Enter a value within
295. milliseconds indicating the frequency Interval Facility Commander polls the intrusion panel The range is Milliseconds from 200 to 30 000 milliseconds The default value is 5 000 milliseconds Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 257 Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Page 258 Advanced Tab Model User Name Addresses Advanced Alarms Facility eee Password ee Confirm Password T Encryption Enabled Encryption Key pn Figure 165 Intrusion Panel Advanced tab 7 Select the Advanced tab as shown in Figure 162 and enter the information described in Table 102 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 102 Configure Intrusion Panel fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description User Name Enter a valid user name Password Confirm Password Y Y Enter the password used to access the intrusion panel The password must match the password defined on the intrusion panel The password must be ten digits The format is 0000000000 The password must be correct because if Facility Commander tries to connect using an incorrect password the intrusion panel locks out any further attempts The password will have to be reset by an intrusion support engineer Enter the password again for confirmation Encryption Enabled Select this check box if you want to enable encryption between Facilit
296. mit Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Configuring Intrusion Outputs Use the Configure Intrusion Outputs page to view add edit copy or deleted intrusion outputs records Refer to the following sections for instructions e Viewing Intrusion Outputs e Adding Intrusion Outputs on page 282 Viewing Intrusion Outputs gt To view the intrusion outputs follow these steps 1 Select Device Management 2 Select Intrusion Outputs The Intrusion Outputs page as shown in Figure 188 displays Intrusion Outputs Instructions View edit add or delete intrusion outputs 4Page 1 of i gt Go to Go Items per Page fio x Tag Name Description Reference ID Intrusion Panel Output Number Figure 188 Intrusion Outputs page Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 281 Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Adding Intrusion Outputs gt To add an intrusion output follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then Intrusion Outputs The Intrusion Outputs page displays 2 Click Add Intrusion Output The Configure Intrusion Outputs page shown in Figure 189 displays Configure Intrusion Output Instructions View or edit the intrusion output Intrusion Output Information Tag Name warming siren Description waming siren by computer lab Reference ID General ME Intrusion Panel ATS Panel z Output Number
297. more information Station Description Enter the intercom station description Refer to Adding Intercom Stations on page 241 for more information To Extension Enter the intercom extension number to be dialed Station Description Enter the intercom extension number of the station being dialed Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 225 Chapter 11 Using the Event Monitor Setting Event Monitor Options gt To set the options follow these steps 1 From the View menu select Options The Event Monitor Options window in Figure 142 displays Event Monitor Options xj Columns v GMT Time is Operator Time Rl Server Time Rl Device Time Rl Event Type Figure 142 Event Monitor Options window 2 Select the check boxes to indicate the time stamps you want to display on the Event Monitor The default setting is all check boxes are selected A check mark indicates the time stamp is selected Clear the check boxes to remove the time stamp from view 3 Select the check box to display the column on the Event Monitor 4 Click Save Page 226 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 11 Using the Event Monitor Changing the Event Types Filter gt To filter the event types from view follow these steps 1 From the View menu select Event Type Filter The Event Monitor Filter window in Figure 143 displays Event Type Filter x
298. ms Digital Video Recorder Mail v Event Sources Subsystem Actions AlarmRecorder a Email The Event v IP Legend Dome 34 Kalatel 1 x Kalatei 2 Kalatel 3 StoreSafe Pro Il SymDec SymDec 32 v Header From Event Types By Condition Set DVR Communications Alarm Set DVR Health Fail Alarm Set DVR Health Trouble Alarm Set Disk Full Alarm x Reset DVR Communications Alarm Reset DYR Health Fail Alarm Reset DYR Health Trouble Alarm Reset Disk Full Alarm Subject Figure 128 Configure Event Action Mapping page 3 Use the Event Source Type drop down list to select the access point or device 4 Use the Event Sources list to select one or more event sources This list is populated with items based on the selected event source type Press the Ctrl key while selecting multiple items 5 Use the Event Types By Condition list to select one or more alarm conditions Press the Ctrl key while selecting multiple items 6 Use the Subsystems drop down list to select Mail 7 Use the Subsystem Actions drop down list to select Email the Event Additional text boxes display to enter e mail information 8 Complete the required items Header To From and Subject Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 185 Chapter 8 Event Action Mapping Page 186 9 Click Submit to save the record Events in Event Action Mapping Table 74 lists and descri
299. ms per Page fis gt et All System Permissions Grants ALL system level permissions et Entry Level Guard System Perms Grants limited monitoring and command system level permissions for guards m Guard Supervisor System Perms Grants supervisory monitoring and command system level permissions for quards Intermediate Guard System Perms Grants intermediate monitoring and command system level permissions for guards Click to copy a system permission profile No System Permissions Grants NO system level permissions Figure 79 System Permissions Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 109 Chapter 5 Assigning Permissions and Context Adding System Permissions gt To add or edit a system permission follow these steps 1 Select Operator Administration and then System Permissions The System Permissions page displays 2 Click Add System Permission The Configure System Permissions page as shown in Figure 80 displays Configure System Permissions Instructions View or edit the system permission System Permission Information Tag Name OO Description Applications Editors Operations Facility Permission Enabled Alarm Monitor B Event Monitor r video Viewer L r Graphic Viewer Cancel Figure 80 Configure System Permissions page 3 Enter the information described in Table 44 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed
300. n Changing the Client Encryption This is required only if you have SSL enabled gt To change the encryption settings follow these steps 1 Using the web browser select System Administration and then System Parameters The Configure System Parameters page displays To enable encryption select the Enable Encryption With Clients check box To disable encryption clear the Enable Encryption With Clients check box 2 Click Submit Changing the Host Name on Server Record gt To change the host name follow these steps 1 Select System Administration and then Facility Commander Servers The Configure Facility Commander Servers page displays Locate the Facility Commander server s tag name Click the tag name to display the configuration information for the selected server Use the Host Name field to enter the new host name for this server The host name is case sensitive Click Submit Editing the Host File on a Client System Required only if the customer is not using domain name server DNS gt To change the host name follow these steps 1 OOA OQ On the taskbar click the Start button and then select Run The Run window displays Enter the following path winnt system32 drivers etc Click OK Create a backup copy of the Host file Open the original file using a text editor such as Notepad Locate the line of text with the host name Replace the ho
301. n Title Bar Displays DI prefix to identify digital input and the tag name Enabled Select to enable the device Disabled Select to disable the device Page 344 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 16 Viewing Graphic Displays Connect and Disconnect Intercom Devices gt To connect an intercom device follow these steps 1 Select the appropriate graphic display Refer to Opening Graphic Displays on page 338 NY Intercom Bldg 1_Master Control Panel Video Viewer Access Point View Graphic Display Disconnect Intercom Intercom rT v we Figure 213 Graphic display with an intercom device 2 Locate the symbol representing the intercom device If the device is in an alarm state Double click the symbol to launch the Alarm Response window as shown in Responding to Alarms on page 215 displays Right click the symbol to display the action menu The window shown in Figure 213 displays with the tag name and a list of actions available to the operator If the device is not in an alarm state Double click the symbol to perform the default action which is Connect Right click the symbol to display the action menu The Control Toolbar displays when the device is not in an alarm state Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 345 Chapter 16 Viewing Graphic Displays Arm or Disarm Intrusion Areas gt To arm or disarm an intrusion area follow these steps
302. n If the problem the same item at the same persists examine the log file time The first delete attempt for evidence of a database will succeed and the second inconsistency or a software will fail with this error problem and send the message This error can also relevant information to indicate a database Customer Support for inconsistency or a software assistance problem 00025 Database read failed number Page 420 of columns incorrect Indicates an inconsistency between a database table and the software possibly due to a database corruption or software problem Facility Commander Administration Guide Provide this error message and the relevant information from the system log file to Customer Support for assistance Appendix C Error Messages Table 148 List of error numbers messages causes and actions Continued Message Causes Actions 00026 Database read failed column Indicates an inconsistency Provide this error message data not of correct type between a database table and the relevant information and the software possibly from the system log file to due to a database corruption Customer Support for or software problem assistance 00027 Database connection error The Facility Commander The System Administrator server could not connect to should verify that the the database specified by the database URL is correct and DatabaseServer element in the specified location is the SystemConf
303. n facilities This message will access to one or more be displayed if an operator facilities In this case the assigned a context without System Administrator should facilities views the window be contacted to verify the filter by clicking on the context assigned to the Window Filter entry of the operator If the context does navigation menu include facilities then there may be a software problem or a database inconsistency Examine the system log file for evidence of these problems and send the relevant information to Customer Support for assistance 00069 The update to the window filter failed This message indicates that the operator request to change the facilities that are enabled in the window filter was not successful This error message should not occur and is indicative of a software problem Examine the system log file for evidence of a software problem and send the relevant information to Customer Support for assistance Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 429 Appendix C Error Messages Table 148 List of error numbers messages causes and actions Continued Message Causes Actions 00070 Only one instance of lt name gt The operator tried to launch Determine if an instance of can be started at a time the Facility Commander the Facility Commander client client but it is already is already running check the running This can also occur if Windows task bar to see if it the pr
304. n Area Start DGP Battery Target DGP Name DGP Battery Test Test Time Cancel Battery Test Target DGP Name DGP Bypass Target DGP Name DGP Unbypass Target DGP Name Disarm Area Intrusion Area Input Bypass Target Input Name Input Unbypass Target Input Name Intrusion Keypad Target Keypad Name Bypass Intrusion Keypad Target Keypad Name Unbypass Set Output Intrusion Output Name Reset Output Intrusion Output Name Panel Offline Target Panel Name Panel Online Target Panel Name Mail Header To E mail the Event text text From Subject text text Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 191 Chapter 8 Event Action Mapping Page 192 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 9 Configuring Alarms This chapter describes how to set up alarms that are generated by Facility Commander It also describes how to assign alarm colors which apply to Picture Perfect and Facility Commander alarms In this chapter Overview on page 194 Configuring the Alarm Monitor on page 196 Setting Alarm Colors on page 197 Creating Alarm Instructions on page 199 Creating Alarm Profiles on page 201 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 193 Chapter 9 Configuring Alarms Page 194 Overview Alarms are used to notify an operator of specific incidents such as someone presenting an Invalid Badge at a door or someone forcing a door open Either one of these events represents an alarm type that may require further investigati
305. n Picture Perfect to the server s trusted keystore file You are asked to identify the server trust file password which is generated during the Facility Commander installation The password can be found by viewing the contents of ss1 bat file Windows or the ssl sh file Linux AlX Examine the contents of the file to locate the storepass parameter which is a randomly generated 10 character string storepass TKXQWPLSRN and is also the password you need to provide at the keytool password prompt You are prompted to trust the certificate c gt keytool import keystore server trust alias picture file picture crt Enter keystore password lt password gt Owner EMAILADDRESS fc casi rusco com CN pphost OU eng O CASI L Boca ST FL C US Issuer EMAILADDRESS fc casi rusco com CN pphost OU eng O CASI L Boca ST FL C US Serial number 0 Valid from Wed Dec 18 15 13 39 EST 2002 until Fri Jan 17 15 13 39 EST 2003 Certificate fingerprints MD5 8F 06 F8 3D 48 4C 59 EF 6D 2E E5 04 6D 7B DD 4C SHA1 E8 60 F8 C1 85 90 5F CF 9B B9 16 2B 72 53 E9 5D 81 A6 97 70 Trust this certificate no yes Certificate was added to keystore Page 398 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 19 Advanced Configuration Enabling SSL Communication on Facility Commander To enable SSL communication between the Picture Perfect and Facility Commander systems open the web browser and log on to Facility Commander
306. n Symbol Scheme ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 248 Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices 00008 249 OVEIVIOW activi iii vecenineredivees edie aa ae ees 250 Terminology eeri SR 250 Configuring Intrusion Devices sesseeeessreerresirsssrresrrrsrrrssnees 251 Connecting Intrusion Panels seeeeeeeeersesrrsssrrssrererrssrsrrresrne 251 Ethernet Connection 0 cccccccecceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeseeneeeseaaaeeees 251 RS 232 Connection 00 eeeeececeeeeceeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeetaeeneeeeeee 253 Configuring Intrusion Panels seseessseseseersssrrsssrrssrrrsrrresrrsserssrne 254 Viewing Intrusion Panels asssseesssseeessrresesrnesrssnnesrnnnnenerenneneennnes 254 Adding Intrusion Panels 0 eeccceeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeseaaes 255 Configuring Intrusion DGPS ssssseseessseeseessressirssirrssrnssrnssrnnsrnnssnnnnt 261 Viewing Intrusion DGPS ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaeeeeaes 261 Adding Intrusion DGPS sssssssssseessieessressrrssrrnsennssrrrsrrnnsrensrrnssren 262 Configuring Intrusion Keypads ccceceeesseeceeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeesnaeesennees 266 Viewing Intrusion Keypads ceeesscceeeeeeeeceeeeeneeeeseeenaeeeeesenaes 266 Adding Intrusion Keypads cccceecseceeeeeenneeeeeeneeeeeeenaaeeeeeeeaees 267 Configuring Intrusion Areas cecceceeeceeeeenececeeeeeeenaeeseeeeeesaeesennees 271 Viewing Intrusion Areas eeeeceeee
307. n contacted to delete the entry item is made from a database in the tag_name table table strongly discouraged but the corresponding entry in the tag_name table was not deleted 00017 Error performing database The database operation The operator should try the operation requested by the operator operation again If the failed possibly due to a problem persists examine network problem that made the log file for evidence of a the database inaccessible or network or a software a software problem problem and send the relevant information to Customer Support for assistance 00018 Invalid value for parameter The database operation The operator should try the requested by the operator operation again If the failed possibly due to an problem persists examine inconsistency inthe database the log file for evidence of a or a software problem database inconsistency ora software problem and send the relevant information to Customer Support for assistance 00019 Error accessing the database The database operation The operator should try the please try again requested by the operator operation again If the failed most likely due to a problem persists examine network problem that made the log file for evidence of a the database inaccessible or network or a software a software problem problem and send the relevant information to Customer Support for assistance Page 418 Facility Commander Administration Guide Appendix C Error Messa
308. nce numbers e Refer to Changing Window Name and Contents on page 211 for instructions to add window titles Page 208 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 10 Using the Alarm Monitor Table 79 Alarm Monitor descriptions Continued Element Description Control Toolbar The Control Toolbar displays buttons with icons for each type of device that can be selected which includes cameras intercom stations access points graphic displays inputs and outputs Icons on the Control Toolbar are dimmed when not available m Video Console The default action is view live and recorded video Access Point The default action is momentary unlock Graphic Viewer The default action is view the ie associated graphic display 5 Inputs No default action d Outputs No default action Intercom The default action is connect e s Intrusion Areas The default action is connect PR Intrusion Inputs The default action is connect Each button is made up of two parts the button with icon and a drop down list with all the actions that are available to the operator When a button is enabled a tooltip identifies the default action Actions appearing on the drop down list may be dimmed if the action does not apply to the current device or if the operator does not have permission to take the action Column Headings Columns cannot be moved however you can resize the c
309. nd should also be recorded on the tape label The Informix backup program prints out the IDs of logical logs that are recorded to the tape backup Record these IDs on the tape label as well This information is useful during the process that includes restoring the archived logical logs Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 351 Chapter 17 Backup Restore Informix Databases Backing Up Database Records These instructions describe how to complete a full backup of the files and database records There are small differences if you are doing an incremental backup and those differences are noted The database and files are backed up using BackupUtility which is a command line script The script first backs up the database verifies the backup and then begins to back up the files gt To begin the back up process follow these steps 1 Open a terminal window If you are not logged into the system as root you will be prompted for the root password This is required to ensure access to all resources 2 Start the backup utility and the window in Figure 217 displays For Linux Informix Double click the Backup Utility icon For AIX type cd usr BackupUtility Enter sh BackupUtility Enter Select an action from the list F Full backup I gt Incremental backup R Restore Q Quit Action lt FIIIRIQ3 E nl Figure 217 Backup Utility 3 Type the appropriate letter to select the backup type such
310. nder provides pre defined Facility Permissions that can be modified which include All Facility Permissions Grants all permissions including view update create and delete items This also grants permission for all actions such as locking and unlocking doors controlling cameras and acknowledging an alarms Update Configuration Facility Permissions Grants all permissions but not for actions like acknowledging alarms e View Configuration Facility Permissions Grants permissions to view all items but not modify e No Configuration Facility Permissions Grants no permissions There are also three pre defined guard level permissions which are e Guard Supervisor System Permissions grants permission to purge alarms from the Alarm Monitor in addition to the same permissions as the guard levels Intermediate Guard Permissions e Entry Level Guard Permissions Using Pre Defined Facility Permissions Use the pre defined permissions to create new permissions The sample permission files can be copied but not deleted as they are permanent Facility Commander records gt To use one of the pre defined facility permissions follow these steps 1 Click the Copy icon next to the pre defined facility permission that you want to use The Configure Facility Permission page as shown in Figure 74 on page 104 displays 2 Enter the information required to modify a facility permission record Change the tag name and descri
311. nect Intercom Devices 345 Arm or Disarm Intrusion Areas ceccceeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaees 346 Customizing Window Name and Contents c sccceceessteeeeessseees 347 Printing Graphic Displays 0 c cccececcececeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeaeeesetaeeesaeeeneees 348 Chapter 17 Backup Restore Informix Databases 349 OVE IVIOW edesexcevcistbasietcetielevsteccnesisdeeidigey e aa AKN ease EEEa 350 Backup MOde S serisini EE ARAA 350 BACKUP TYPOS sorron caducus banmesstuhcenceudeetsvsiieeuestevaee 351 Requirements Tape Backup ccecescceeeeeneeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeae 351 Page vi Facility Commander Administration Guide Taps Labels seccieierie meriitti nr AANA AEA 351 Backing Up Database ReCOrds u sseesisssssrirsseerrrssrerrrssrrrrrnsrrrrnssne 352 Informix Database erecncrnrnnnn a 353 Backing Up File sirere ete Alsen event eee 355 Restore Procedures ccccceceseeceeeeeseceeeeeseneeeeeeeneneeeeeeeeeseeeeennnenees 357 Restore Incremental Backups 0 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeettnaeeeeeteae 361 Restore Database ecceccccceeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeseeeeeeees 362 Chapter 18 Viewing Diagnostics seceeeeeseeeeeteeeeeeees 367 OVEIVIOW siiis cette eniai aane aaa a aaa E E a ASEAN ERD 368 Changing Diagnostics Settings ccceeessceceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeetennees 369 Editing the Diagnostics Settings eeesseesseeeeseeeseee
312. nfiguration Adding External Applications There are sample lines in the properties file are commented out so they are not used Uncomment the lines in the file and edit them to add external applications to the Facility Commander Launcher window H Facility Commander Launcher Default System Account connected to bot ddahi SYS Window Launch View Help ZB Facility Wy Commander Applications Figure 246 Notepad application added to Launcher window gt To add external applications to the Launcher window follow these steps 1 2 On the Facility Commander client system open the client properties file using a text editor such as Notepad Edit three lines to add the executable icon and tooltip for each application The information includes directory path of application executable directory path of icon graphic tooltip text This path must point to an existing and valid file All path separators must use a forward slash instead of a back slash The path includes a number N which indicates the icon position on the Applications toolbar Also make sure the icon is the correct size to fit on the toolbar The maximum size is 32 x 32 pixels The format is workspace user_application N exe workspace user_application N icon workspace user_application N tooltip Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 383 Chapter 19 Advanced Configuration Sample Entry
313. ng Intrusion Devices Facility Tab Assigned to ioe Facility Available Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility Sample Region Facility Hold the Ctrl key down for multiple selection Figure 191 Configure Intrusion Output Facility tab 6 Select the Facility tab as shown in Figure 191 and enter the information described in Table 123 A check mark indicates a required field Table 123 Configure Intrusion Output fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Assigned to Items can belong to more than one facility This is a read only field and cannot be edited Available Y Use to assign or change the facility membership for this item The facilities that display in this list depend on the operator s context and permissions e To assign the item to more than one facility select the first facility and press the Ctrl key while selecting the other facilities The selected facilities are highlighted Click Submit e If this item is already assigned to a facility listed in the Assigned To list press the Ctrl key before selecting the new facility assignment To assign the item to all the listed facilities select the first facility in the list press the Shift key and select the last facility in the list All the facilities are highlighted Click Submit Page 284 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 14 Creating Symbol Schemes This chapter describes how to create a symbol scheme w
314. ng the symbol scheme and displaying the intercom states correctly on the graphic displays To assist the system administrator in creating these symbol schemes a few examples are included Intercom Exchange Symbol Scheme Intercom Master Station Symbol Scheme on page 247 Intercom Substation Symbol Scheme on page 248 Intercom Exchange Symbol Scheme Figure 158 shows a symbol scheme for an Intercom Exchange In this example the Intercom Exchange Comm Failure Alarm is a red symbol and all of the other states are green symbols including the initial state symbol This helps to convey the online offline status of the intercom exchange 2A Symbol Editor 3B 10 x Window File Help DERE Symbol Schemes Scheme Name Initial State Browse Intercom Exchange Intercom Exchange Intercom Master Station Intercom Sub Station Device Type Intercom Exchange v State Association Initially Transparent State Attributes State Conditions Symbols _Active Intercom Exchange Comm Failure Alarm Reset Vv Intercom Exchange Comm Failure Alarm Set v Intercom Exchange Reset Alarm Set v Figure 158 Example Intercom Exchange Symbol Scheme Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 12 Configuring Intercom Devices Intercom Master Station Symbol Scheme Figure 159 shows a symbol scheme for an Intercom Master Station Symbol Editor O tal x 9 a
315. ng with the most current scheme files Refer to the following sections for more information e Uploading Graphic Displays Downloading Graphic Displays Deleting Unused Files on page 329 Uploading Graphic Displays Graphic displays are stored on the local system until they are uploaded to the server system Once they are uploaded they are available to use with the Graphics Viewer The Graphics Editor automatically loads the most current symbol schemes from the server every time it opens gt To upload a site map to the server follow these steps 1 Display the site map you want to upload to the server From the File menu click Open and select the file you want to upload Page 326 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays 2 From the File menu click Upload The Upload window as shown in Figure 201 displays The graphic display file name appears in the title bar with a JLX extension Upload intrusion map for computer room jlx Tag Name intrusion map for computer room Description Available Facilities Assigned To BOCA RATON East Coast Region Global Facility NEW YORK PP GLOBAL Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility Sample Region Facility West Coast Region Assign graphic display to one or more facilities and then click Upload Cancel Figure 201 Upload window 3 Enter the information described in Table 131 The U
316. nitor displays icons indicating video clips and site plans are available In this chapter Overview on page 220 Navigating the Event Monitor on page 220 Setting Event Monitor Options on page 226 Changing the Event Types Filter on page 227 Customizing Window Name and Contents on page 230 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 219 Chapter 11 Using the Event Monitor Overview The Event Monitor is a multi functional client application that allows you to view alarm badge and system events On the Event Monitor alarm events alarms and resets are displayed as individual transactions In contrast the Alarm Monitor displays alarm events as a single transaction which is updated when the the status of the alarm changes Column headings change depending on the type of event The Event Monitor always displays Indicators Device Time Event Type Description and Location Refer to the following sections for a description of the column headings Alarm Events List on page 223 e Badge Events Liston page 224 e System Events List on page 225 New events appear at the bottom of a scrollable list Only the last 1000 events appear on the list after which the oldest events are removed Navigating the Event Monitor gt To open the Event Monitor follow these steps 1 Launch the Facility Commander Launcher window select Launch and Event Monitor or select the Event Monitor icon from the Viewers toolbar 2 The Event Monito
317. nly for the purpose it was designed for refer to the data sheet and user documentation For the latest product information contact your local supplier or visit us online at www gesecurity com Contents A pout THIS DOCUMEN csaccncvvescsnsescccescsessressescesedesssrsarccassacaseseandans ix Who Should Use This Document ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeaeeteeees ix How This Document IS Organized ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseneeeeees ix Using This DOCUMENT s ct0 ceri deieed dade ainieetveieeeenaiie xi Conventions Used In This Document c cceceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeteteeeseneees xii Related Document 2 4 teciilesi ecient xiii Chapter 1 Introduction sisiisisiisiassiinunnisanaisnarnnsnndisnunin nanao daanin 1 OLTE E ited cs E A E E E eden 2 Video management sernir a 3 Centralized video management eeeeeeseeceeeeeeetteeteeeeeeteaeeteneeeees 3 Distributed video management ce eeeeeteceeeeeeteeeeeeeenaeeeeeeetaaeeeeeeeaaes 4 Chapter 2 Getting Started sssnssennsennnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 7 OVEV EW saceccthodcauien ch miaii E aa ae Aa aiia 8 Starting and Stopping Facility Commander Server and Media Server Services cccceeceeeeneeceeeeeeeaaeseeeeeeseaaeeeeneeeees 8 Facility Commander Launcher 0 cc cccceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeetsaeeneneees 9 Minimizing Facility Commander Launcher s es 11 Logging In from a Workstation 0 0 0 ccecceeeeee
318. ns dd Alarm Instructic dPagelofib Goto Go Items per Page 15 Instruction Text bpem SSS cy Notify system adminstrator Figure 131 Alarm Instructions page Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 199 Chapter 9 Configuring Alarms 3 Click Add Alarm Instruction and the Define Alarm Instruction page shown in Figure 132 displays Define Alarm Instruction Instructions View or edit the alarm instruction Instruction Text call 911 Figure 132 Define Alarm Instruction page 4 Enter between 1 100 characters to create a customized message This message will display in the Alarm Response window 5 Click Submit to save the record Page 200 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 9 Configuring Alarms Creating Alarm Profiles Use the Alarm Profiles page to view import copy add and delete alarm profile records gt To view the alarm profiles follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then Alarm Profiles The Alarm Profiles page shown in Figure 133 displays Alarm Profiles Instructions View edit add or delete alarm profiles 4Page 1 of i gt Go to Go Items per Page fis a Tag Name Description Priority pvr commore O Remmen O e E iO C Ea Motion Detection Alarm Motion detection alarm Remote Media Server Comm Failure Remote media server comm failure video Loss Alarm Video loss alarm Figure 133 Alarm Profiles Facilit
319. ns tab 2 On the Columns tab page select the check boxes indicating which time zones to display on the Alarm Monitor A check mark indicates the item is selected Clear the check boxes to remove the column 3 Click Save If you decide not to make any changes click Cancel Table 80 Monitor Options description Field Name Description GMT Time Displays Greenwich Mean Time This is the default setting Operator Time Displays the time for the operator s location Server Time Displays the time for the server s location This may be different from the Operator or Device time Device Time Displays the time for the device s location Event Type Displays the event type general category Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 213 Chapter 10 Using the Alarm Monitor Launch Video Automatically gt To automatically launch the video popup window follow these steps 1 From the View menu select Options The Alarm Monitor Options window as shown in Figure 139 displays Columns Setup v Auto Video Popup Enabled Save Cancel Help Figure 139 Alarm Monitor Options window Setup tab 2 Select the Setup tab page and select the Auto Video Popup Enabled check box to automatically launch a Video Console window Clear the check box if you do not want to a Video Console window to launch when an alarm is generated If you are unable to change the setting
320. ntext Context Information Tag Name Entry Level Guard Context Description Entry level command and control responsibilities System Permission Profile Entry Level Guard System Perms Permissions BEZTA Facilities Facility Permissions I Global Facility Cl east Coast Region NEW YORK Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility E E Sample Region Facility Entry Level Guard Facility Perms Unassigned Items Facility West Coast Region Cancel Figure 85 Define Context page 2 Enter the information described in Table 45 to define a new context definition Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages 3 Click Submit to save the record Table 45 on page 114 lists and describes the elements on the Define Context page Table 45 Define Context fields and elements Element REQ Description Tag Name Y Enter a name to identify this record Use 2 36 characters Description Enter a description for this record The description must be 1 100 characters System Profile f Select the system permission definition Page 114 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 5 Assigning Permissions and Context Table 45 Define Context fields and elements Continued Element REQ Description Global Facility Use the Global Facility drop down list to select the appropriate permission level for this context It cannot be deleted To grant full ac
321. nts was not in the definition files from a backup correct format Customers and business partners should not alter these files without specific instructions from Customer Support 00051 Operation cancelled by the The operator clicked the None required This is a operator Cancel button to abort the routine message edit operation acknowledging the request 00052 Operation not permitted An operation was attempted Examine the system log for for which the operator does evidence of operator attempts not have permission The to circumvent normal Facility Commander user operation of the user interfaces do not offer interfaces an attempted operations that are not security breach or a software permitted This message can problem and send the occur if an operator attempts relevant information to to circumvent normal Customer Support for operation of the user assistance interfaces or from an attempted security breach or from a software problem 00053 Duplicate browser error The operator opened a Close the second browser second browser window window To perform using the New Window entry operations through two of the File menu Secondary browser windows launch a browser windows from the new instance of the browser same log in are not and log in to establish an supported independent session Note that this will use another web client license 00054 Login timed out please log in again The operator s session was expi
322. o tagging Refer to Tagging Video Events for Access Points on page 182 for more information e Identify the workstations where you want the Video Console to launch automatically when an alarm event occurs Refer to Workstations on page 45 for more information e Open the Alarm Monitor to display alarm activity If the Alarm Monitor is not opened the Video Console does not automatically launch If a Video Console is already displaying video from the associated camera an additional Video Console will not launch Also a maximum of four video panes will automatically display within the Video Console Page 158 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 7 Using the Video Console Navigating the Multi Viewer 3 Video Console 1 1 The Multi Viewer allows you to work within each Facility Commander application at once By default the Multi Viewer displays the Graphics Viewer Video Console and Alarm Monitor in the same window However you can select any combination of applications to display in each of the Multi Viewer s three panes Window Launch View Help Custom View Facility View RB Vic ole 1 1 File View Window Help Global Facility E O FAcIity 1 a AlarmRecorder a Kalatel 1 camera_01 amera Q E Sample Region Facility E Unassigned Items Facilit fH EJ P Legend Dome 34 B P camera_01_01 aP Preset 001 gt Preset 002 a Preset 003 AP Preset 004 Preset 005 P came
323. odify such as access points DVRs and cameras An item can belong to more than one facility Each facility can be a member of one other facility Refer to Facility Permissions on page 102 for more information Permissions Context Permissions define what actions an operator may perform with specific items Permissions can be described in terms of the operator s role such as system administrator guard supervisor guards Permission can also be described in terms of the actions that can be performed such as viewing and updating records In planning the system carefully determine the permissions that each person will require to support the tasks associated with their job responsibilities Permissions clearly define the limits of who can view or modify information in the database There are two types of permissions which will be described later system and facility Context defines which items an operator can view and what actions they can take Context consists of a single System Permission and one or more Facility and Facility Permission pairs A context is created for each type of operator such as entry level guard or supervisor Refer to Contexts on page 113 for information about configuring contexts Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 5 Assigning Permissions and Context Pre Defined Permissions and Context Examples Checklist Facility Commander provides pre defined permissions and contexts t
324. olling Cameras on page 163 for more information When an alarm is generated with an associated video clip a video icon displays on the Alarm Monitor or Event Monitor if configured to do so Click the video icon to launch a Video Console to display the video clip of the alarm event Refer to Tagging Video Events for Access Points on page 182 for more information The Graphics Viewer can be used to launch a Video Console from symbols on graphic displays Refer to ssuing Commands on page 340 for more information Automatically Launch by Alarm Priority In addition you can configure Facility Commander to automatically launch a Video Console when an alarm event occurs with associated video Each time an alarm event occurs within the specified priority range the Video Console launches and displays both live video and the recorded video clip of the event To configure e Use the Configure System Parameters page to identify the priority range which determines when the Video Console launches automatically Refer to System Parameters on page 50 for more information The priority range is from 1 to 500 Every alarm within the specified priority range will cause the Video Console to launch automatically If a range is not specified the Video Console will not launch automatically e Use Event Action Mapping to associate the alarm event and video tagging instructions which include camera presets camera preset with video tagging and vide
325. ollow these steps 1 Insert the tape in the tape drive wait for computer system to recognize the tape and press Enter 2 Open a terminal window If you are not logged into the system as root you will be prompted for the root password This is required to ensure access to all resources 3 Start the backup utility and the window in Figure 224 displays For Linux Informix Double click the Backup Utility icon For AIX type cd usr backuputility Enter sh backuputility Enter Select an action from the list F Full backup lt I Incremental backup R gt Restore Q Quit Action FIIIRIG E i eT Figure 224 Backup Utility 4 Type R to begin the restore process Page 358 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 17 Backup Restore Informix Databases v J root minserver Shell Konsole Is i tape loaded in dev tape the first tape of the files backup session YZ N Figure 225 Start Restore process with tape in drive 5 Type Y to indicate the tape is loaded and the program begins restoring the files from the tape If you type N indicating the tape is not the first in the series the program will eject the tape Failure to insert a tape using a read only tape or pressing the Enter key too early will result in a program error and the process must be started over Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 359 Chapter 17 Backup Restore Informix Databases 6 If the ba
326. olumns to make them larger or smaller Select the column edge and drag until the column is the correct size Indicators Displays an X to indicate communication has been lost with the Picture Perfect server Displays a camera and a globe icon indicating a video clip and a graphic display are available if configured to do so e Click the camera icon to launch the Video Console e Click the globe icon to launch the Graphics Viewer Refer to Event Mapping for information about associating video with alarm events Refer to Using the Graphics Editor on page 301 for information about creating site maps Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 209 Chapter 10 Using the Alarm Monitor Page 210 Table 79 Alarm Monitor descriptions Continued Element Description Input State Open indicates the input device is open e Close indicates the input device is closed e Cut indicates the line has been cut e Short indicates the line is shorted e N A indicates the field does not apply to the alarm Processing Count Displays the following operator processing states Active the alarm has not been acknowledged by an operator Pending the alarm has been acknowledged by an operator but not removed e Completed the alarm has been removed but the alarm input is waiting for a physical reset e Purged the alarm has been removed but the alarm input is waiting for a physical reset e Bumped t
327. ommander Administration Guide Page 265 Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Configuring Intrusion Keypads Use the Configure Intrusion Keypads page to view add edit copy or deleted intrusion outputs records Refer to the following sections for instructions e Viewing Intrusion Keypads e Adding Intrusion Outputs on page 282 Viewing Intrusion Keypads gt To view the intrusion keypads follow these steps 1 Select Device Management 2 Select Intrusion Keypads The Intrusion Keypads page as shown in Figure 173 displays Intrusion Keypads Instructions View edit add or delete intrusion keypads 4Pagelofib Goto Go Items per Page fio H Tag Name Description Reference ID Intrusion Panel Keypad Number Figure 173 Intrusion Keypad page Page 266 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Adding Intrusion Keypads gt To add an intrusion keypad follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then Intrusion Keypads The Configure Intrusion Keypad page displays 2 Click Add Intrusion Keypad The Configure Intrusion Keypad page shown in Figure 174 displays Configure Intrusion Keypad Instructions View or edit the intrusion keypad Intrusion Keypad Information Tag Name intrusion keypad Description keypad located by computer lab Reference ID General Alarms Facility Intrusion Panel ATS Panel x Keypad Number
328. on There can be several sources of alarm conditions Picture Perfect and Facility Commander Most of the alarms that are monitored will come from Picture Perfect system Facility Commander generates these alarms e Access Control System Comm Failure e Analog Switcher Offline e Camera Analytics Alarm e Camera Trouble Alarm e Motion Detection Alarm Video Loss Alarm e DVR Communications Alarm e DVR Health Fail Alarm e DVR Health Trouble Alarm e Disk Full Alarm e Intercom Exchange Comm Failure Alarm Intercom Exchange Reset Alarm e Intercom Substation Call Button Alarm e Intrusion Panel Duress Code Entered Alarm Intrusion Panel Main Power Failure Alarm e Intrusion Panel Offline Alarm e Intrusion Siren Monitor Failure Alarm e Intrusion Panel Tamper Alarm e Intrusion DGP Panel Bypassed e Intrusion DGP Main Power Failure Alarm e Intrusion DGP Offline Alarm e Intrusion DGP Siren Monitor Failure Alarm e Intrusion DGP Tamper Alarm e Intrusion Keypad Bypassed Alarm e Intrusion Duress Alarm e Intrusion Keypad Offline Alarm e Intrusion Keypad Tamper Alarm e Intrusion Area Failed To Arm e Intrusion Area State Armed and In Alarm e Intrusion Input Alarm e Intrusion Input Bypassed Alarm Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 9 Configuring Alarms e Intrusion Input Fault Alarm e Intrusion Input Tamper Alarm e Remote Media Server Comm Failure Alarm instructions for the access control systems ar
329. on If the found using the current operator believes that items window filter The window of the appropriate type do filter may specify a restricted exists but are not being set of facilities that do not shown it may indicate a contain any items of the database inconsistency or appropriate type or no items software problem In this case of that type may exist in the the System Administrator database should examine the server log file to determine the cause 00086 Record delete failed due to The operator request to The operator must remove dependency delete an item could not be performed because other items are referencing the item to be deleted The tag names of the referencing items are displayed when the mouse is placed over the X these references before the original item can be deleted Page 434 Facility Commander Administration Guide Appendix C Error Messages Table 148 List of error numbers messages causes and actions Continued Message Causes Actions 00087 Camera information not This message may occur Examine the list of available available The camera may when linking cameras to a cameras and observes if the have been deleted by another DVR device through the Link camera you tried to link is still operator Cameras screen It will also available The camera may occur if the same camera is have been deleted from the linked to more than one input system or may have been of the DVR The screen
330. on Guide Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Alarms Tab General Facility Intrusion Keypad Bypassed Alarm Intrusion Duress Alarm gt Intrusion Keypad Offline Alarm Intrusion Keypad Tamper Alarm X Figure 176 Configure Intrusion Keypad Alarms tab 6 Enter the information described in Table 111 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 111 Configure Intrusion Keypad fields and descriptions Field Name Intrusion Keypad Bypassed Alarm REQ Description Use the drop down list to select the appropriate alarm profile to use when there is an attempt to bypass the keypad This is the generated alarm Intrusion Duress Alarm Use the drop down list to select the appropriate alarm profile to use when there is a duress alarm This is the generated alarm Intrusion Keypad Offline Alarm Intrusion Keypad Tamper Alarm Use the drop down list to select the appropriate alarm profile to use when the keypad goes offline This is the generated alarm Use the drop down list to select the appropriate alarm profile to use when tampering with the intrusion keypad has occurred This is the generated alarm Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 269 Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Facility Tab eC Assigned to ie Facility Available Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility Sample Region Faci
331. on Guide Page 173 Chapter 7 Using the Video Console Table 73 DVR Motion Search tab Element Description Camera Selection Recorder Use the drop down list to identify the DVR device where the recorded video is stored Camera Use the drop down list to identify the camera device used to record the video Search on Date and Time Date Use the drop down list to select the month e Use the drop down list to select the year Time Enter the time The format is HH MM SS Page 174 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 7 Using the Video Console Customizing the Video Console The Video Console displays one viewer pane tag name and description as the default settings However an operator can customize the Video Console to display certain facilities or a create a custom layout of camera views Refer to the following sections e Creating Custom Views on page 175 e Create a window filter on page 176 e Display Additional Video Panes on page 177 Creating Custom Views The Video Console allows you to create your own combination of camera views by using the layout selections in the View menu An operator can arrange the camera views in a customized layout to provide a comprehensive view of the premises Live camera_43_01 Figure 122 Custom 4 Up View gt To create a custom view 1 From the View menu select one of the layouts The Video Console displays the selected lay
332. on Inputs Yes No No No No Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 449 Appendix D Facility Permissions Update Configuration Facility Permissions Table 153 Update Configuration Facility Permissions Enabled None View Update Create Delete Controls Lock Unlock No Access Points Activate Reset No Digital Outputs Control PTZ Cameras No Enable Disable No Digital Input Monitoring Enable Disable No Logical Input Monitoring Monitors Purge Alarms No Remove Alarms No Acknowledge Alarms No View Live Video No View Recorded Video No Setup Operators No Yes Yes No No Contexts No Yes Yes No No System Permissions No Yes Yes No No Facility Permissions No Yes Yes No No Facilities No Yes Yes No No Facility Commander No Yes Yes No No Servers Workstations No Yes Yes No No Access Control Systems No Yes Yes No No Page 450 Facility Commander Administration Guide Appendix D Facility Permissions Table 153 Update Configuration Facility Permissions Enabled None View Update Create Delete Devices Access Points No Yes Yes No No Digital Inputs No Yes Yes No No Logical Inputs No Yes Yes No No Digital Video Recorders No Yes Yes No No Cameras No Yes Yes No No Intercom Exchanges No Yes Yes No No Intercom Stations No Yes Yes No No Analog Video Switch
333. ons Table 126 lists and describes the event sources state attributes and conditions Table 126 Event Sources State Attributes and Conditions Event Source State Attributes Conditions Camera Initial State Motion Detection Set Reset Video Loss Set Reset Intercom Exchange Initial State Communication Failure Set Reset Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 295 Chapter 14 Creating Symbol Schemes Table 126 Event Sources State Attributes and Conditions Continued Event Source State Attributes Conditions Intercom Exchange Reset Set Intercom Master Initial State Station Busy Set Call Answered Set Call Connected Set Call Ringing Set Call To Busy Set Call To Private Set Disconnected Set Reset Set Intercom Substation Initial State Busy Set Call Answered Set Call Button Alarm Set Reset Call Button Event Set Call Connected Set Call Ringing Set Call To Busy Set Call To Private Set Disconnected Set Reset Set Intrusion Area Initial State State Armed All Clear Set State Armed and In Alarm Set State Disarmed Set State Unknown Set Page 296 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 14 Creating Symbol Schemes Table 126 Event Sources State Attributes and Conditions Continued Event Source State Attributes Conditions Intrusion DGP Initial S
334. ons in Event Action Mapping Table 75 lists and describes the fields on the Configure Mapped Event page Table 75 Configure Mapped Action fields and descriptions Subsystem Action Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Access Control Destination Duration Unlock Access Point Unlock Duration Access Point seconds Unlock Permanent Access Point Lock Access Point Activate Output Output Destination Duration Activate Output Output seconds Duration Activate Output with Output No Reset Reset Output Output Input Destination Duration Enable Input Input Disable Input Input Logical Input Duration Destination Enable Logical Input Logical Input Disable Logical Input Logical Input Analog Video Switcher Tag Name Input Name Switch Input to Analog Switcher Input Name Output Tag Name Output Name Output Name Digital Video Video Tagging Camera Camera Preset Camera Preset Camera Preset with Camera Preset Video Tagging Page 190 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 8 Event Action Mapping Table 75 Configure Mapped Action fields and descriptions Subsystem Action Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Intercom Originating Station Digits To Dial Dial Digits text text Hang up text Originating Station Destination Station Make Call text text Intrusion Tag Name Acknowledge Input Target Input Name Alarm Area Arm Intrusio
335. oor plan with intercom system jix acme campus jix boca site plan jix card shop 2003 jlx fla site_boca jlx fla sites_old jlx fla sites jlx floor 1 jlx 4 Refresh Remove Cancel Help Figure 203 Deleting Graphics Files window 2 Select the Resource Type Displays or Images from the drop down list The site maps and images stored on the Facility Commander server display 3 Highlight the entries you want to delete and click Remove Click Refresh to display an entries that may have changed on the server since this window displayed 4 When you are finished removing the files click X to close the window Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 329 Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays Page 330 Editing Graphic Display Records When a graphic display is created with the Graphics Viewer it may have a file name that is not exactly what should be displayed in the navigation pane of the client applications Using the Configure Graphic Displays page you can assign a tag name and description which are more meaningful You can also use the Configure Graphic Displays page to change the facility membership Graphic displays like other items can be assigned to more than one facility A facility is assigned when the graphic display is created and uploaded to the Facility Commander server Later it may be necessary to change the facility assignment by assigning additional faci
336. or the first segment following segments will use the same direction as the first segment Graphic Attributes When you use any of the drawing tools or the Create Hyperlink Area icon to create a drawing you can change the appearance of the drawing using the Graphics Attributes window gt To use the Graphic Attributes window follow these steps 1 Double click the image to display the Graphic Attributes window as shown in Figure 178 on page 307 If you want to select more than one image click and drag in the drawing area to include other images Select the attributes that you want to apply such as color pattern line and brightness Refer to Table 130 for instructions Click Apply All to apply the selected attributes Click Close when finished Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays No Pattern or Line E3 Graphic attrik ss E e Line Color _ nS HH lt Brightness Fill Color PT EE Pattern _______ a Transparency es Fa Line Styles Patterns Figure 178 Graphic Attributes window Table 130 lists and describes the elements in the Graphic Attributes window Table 130 Graphic Attributes elements and description Element Description Line Color Click Line Color to display the Edit Line Color palette Sel
337. or user If not log out and log back in as a user with these permissions 2 Type the following command service facilityCommander stop gt To start services on a Linux server 1 You must be logged in as the administrator user If not log out and log back in as a user with these permissions 2 Type the following command service facilityCommander start Oor etc re d init d facilityCommander start gt To stop services on an AIX server You must be logged in as the administrator user If not log out and log back in as a user with these permissions Type the following command var FacilityCommanderServer server bin FCShutdown sh gt To start services on an AIX server 1 You must be logged in as the administrator user If not log out and log back in as a user with these permissions 2 Type the following command etc rc fcserver Page 8 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 2 Getting Started Media Server The following procedures are used to stop and start services for the Facility Commander Media server gt To stop services on a Linux server 1 You must be logged in as the administrator user If not log out and log back in as a user with these permissions 2 Type the following command service fcmediad stop gt To start services on a Linux server 1 You must be logged in as the administrator user If not log out and log back in as a user with these permissions 2
338. ords are authenticated and stored on the system where they are created e Local operator passwords are stored and authenticated on Facility Commander e External operator passwords are stored and authenticated on the Picture Perfect system Operator Preferences A system administrator can identify operator preferences such as setting the language for displays when an operator logs in and the number of items to display on the browser list page Refer to Changing Operator Preferences on page 66 for more information Page 58 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 4 Importing Records Viewing Facility Commander Operators Use the Operators page to view import copy add and delete records gt To view Facility Commander operators follow these steps 1 Select Operator Administration 2 Select Operators The Operators page as shown in Figure 35 displays Operators P e Instructions Import view edit add or delete operators 4Pagelofib Goto Go Items per Page 30 z pictureofjamie z Full Name User Name Context External System Preferences Default System Account System Administrator Context Preferences ied Denise Dahl DDahl Regional Administrator Context Preferences Dudley Lennon dudley System Administrator Context pictureofjamie Pierre Lefebure PLefebure Intermediate Guard Context i i Preferences Vincent Raaijmakers VRaaijmakers Regional Administrator Context
339. ords that have changed on the Picture Perfect system that should be synchronized with Facility Commander 4 Click Synchronize Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 85 Chapter 4 Importing Records Viewing Logical Inputs Use the Logical Inputs page to view import copy delete and synchronize logical input records from Picture Perfect gt To view logical inputs follow these steps 1 Select Device Management 2 Select Logical Inputs The Logical Inputs page as shown in Figure 60 displays The Input record imported from the Picture Perfect system displays in the Tag Name field with LI prepended to the name Logical Inputs Request was successful Instructions Import synchronize view edit or delete logical inputs Go to Go Items per Page po H bd 4Page 1 ofi gt pictureofjamie 3 nchroniz Tag Name Description External System E e f fuzom wroserensr furooo waose O fperet LI 200101 NY COMPUTER ROOM LI 200101 NY COMPUTER ROOM pictureofjamie i LI 200200 NY SHIPPING DOCK LI 200200 NY SHIPPING DOCK pictureofjamie Figure 60 Logical Inputs page Page 86 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 4 Importing Records Importing Logical Inputs gt To import logical inputs follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then Logical Inputs The Logical Inputs list page displays 2 Use the Server drop down list to select the Picture Perfect server with the re
340. ore Informix Databases Page 366 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 18 Viewing Diagnostics This chapter describes the different diagnostics used to troubleshoot the system The system administrator should not change these settings unless instructed to do so by Customer Support In this chapter Overview on page 368 Changing Diagnostics Settings on page 369 ATS Panel Intrusion on page 371 Database Connection Pool on page 372 Database Transactions Diagnostics on page 373 Database Queries Diagnostics on page 374 Facility Membership Cache on page 375 JVM Statistics on page 376 Media Diagnostics on page 377 Service Framework Diagnostics on page 378 System Status Diagnostics on page 379 Thread Pool Manager Diagnostics on page 380 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 367 Chapter 18 Viewing Diagnostics Page 368 Overview The Diagnostics page shown in Figure 234 on page 369 keeps track of all the software components that generate diagnostic information Diagnostics provides statistics on the following components ATS Panel Intrusion Proxy Host ATS Panel e Database Connection Pool e Database Queries e Database Transactions e Facility Membership Cache e JVM Statistics e Media Diagnostics Service Framework e System Status e Thread Pool Manager Each server has a server wide configuration for diagnostics which can be Disabled The server is not receiving any diagnostic info
341. oring it whenever a Door Forced alarm occurs the system can be configured to send an e mail notice to the Security Supervisor and also tag the video clip so it can be reviewed later Monitoring the system is accomplished using the Facility Commander Launcher which provides the capability to monitor alarms and control video cameras All alarms generated by Picture Perfect are sent to the access control system s Alarm Monitor and also to the Facility Commander Alarm Monitor From the Facility Commander Alarm Monitor security personnel can perform all of the operations that they can do on Picture Perfect and more The Facility Commander Command and Control client features include e Create or import site maps for graphical representation of device and alarm locations e Associate symbols and icons with devices such as doors intercoms intrusion devices and cameras e Display a graphical map showing the location of an alarm and the alarm state e Control devices from graphical maps such as locking or unlocking a door e Acknowledge alarms from either the graphical map or from the alarm monitor e View recorded video clips associated with alarm events View live video from fixed or PTZ cameras e Control a PTZ camera on screen by using the mouse to pan tilt and zoom e Search for video clips stored on a DVR by event event type camera DVR or motion Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 1 Introduction V
342. out 2 Select a camera from the navigation pane and drag and drop it to one of the empty panes in the console The video for that camera displays in that pane 3 Continue dragging and dropping cameras to create your own customized view Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 175 Chapter 7 Using the Video Console 4 When you are finished from the View menu select Save Custom View 5 The Save User View dialog displays Enter a name for this custom view and click OK The custom view displays in the Custom View tab of the navigation pane gt To upload a custom view 1 Select View and then select Upload Views The Location To Upload Views To dialog displays 2 Under Look In select a location to upload your custom views 3 In the File Name field type a name for the custom views file The file name will be appended with the views file extension 4 Click the Upload button The custom views are saved in the specified location gt To download a custom view 1 Select View and then select Download Views The Select Location To Download Views From dialog displays 2 Under Look In select the location where your custom views are saved 3 Select the custom views file The file name is appended with the views file extension 4 Click the Download button The custom views are now available on the Custom View tab in the navigation pane Create a window filter The Video Console navigation pane can
343. own list box to select the site plan to display when an alarm is generated for this logical input When a site plan is selected a globe icon displays on the Alarm Monitor and Event Monitor when an alarm event occurs indicating a site plan is available Time Zone Y Use the drop down list to select the time zone for this device This time zone displays on the Alarm Monitor and Event Monitor The default time zone setting is GMT Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 89 Chapter 4 Importing Records Facility Tab General East Coast Region Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility Sample Region Facility West Coast Region Figure 64 Configure Logical Input Facility tab 6 Select the Facility tab as shown in Figure 64 and enter the information described in Table 39 Table 39 Configure Logical Input fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Assigned to Displays the facility or facilities for this logical input Items can belong to more than one facility This is a read only field and cannot be edited Available Vv Use to assign or change the facility membership for this item The facilities that display in this list depend on the operator s context and permissions e To assign the item to more than one facility select the first facility and press the Ctrl key while selecting the other facilities The selected facilities are highlighted Click Submit e If
344. pages 4 Click Submit to save the record Table 44 Configure System Permissions fields and description Field Name REQ Description Tag Name Y Enter a unique name to identify this item Use 2 36 characters Description Enter a description for this item Use 1 100 characters The description does not have to be unique Page 110 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 5 Assigning Permissions and Context Applications Tab Applications Editors Operations Facility Permission Enabled Alarm Monitor Event Monitor L video Viewer r Graphic Viewer L Figure 81 Configure System Permissions page Applications tab 5 Select the Applications tab shown in Figure 81 to choose one or more check boxes granting permissions A check mark indicates the permission is enabled Editors Tab Applications Facility Permission None iew Update Create Delete Event Action Mappings Cc 2 C C Alarm Instructions Cc C C C C Alarm Profiles O C oO Graphic Editor o C O C Symbol Editor Cc oO Figure 82 Configure System Permissions page Editors tab 6 Select the Editors tab shown in Figure 82 For each permission such as the Event Action Mapping Permission select the permission level All permissions preceding the selected button are granted If Create is selected an operator has permission to create view and update Event Action Mappings
345. pecify a different extension exchange number is already exchange number entered by or exchange number The assigned to 0 the operator is already extension and exchange assigned to another intercom number must be unique for an station or exchange intercom exchange and all of the stations connected to it Note that the intercom stations connected to different exchanges can have the same extension number 00099 Camera and preset This informational message Return to the Monitoring tab information has been alerts the operator that to specify a preset for the refreshed on the Monitoring Facility Commander has camera before submitting the tab changed camera and preset record information on the Monitoring tab of the Configure Intercom Station page 00100 Camera is not linked to a The operator selected a Using the browser client go DVR camera in the Video Console to the DVR list page and click navigation pane that is not Link Cameras Link the linked to a DVR in the camera to the proper input on database that page 00101 Intercom extension or The operator entered an Enter a value whose length exchange number length intercom extension or does not exceed the specified must not exceed 0 number exchange number that was value integer digits too large 00102 Selected alarms require One of the selected alarms Enter the response text into response information requires response text before the response text window it can be removed 00103
346. perlink 6 path or border on a site map e Click the Create Hyperlink Area icon and move the mouse cursor to the drawing area e Click and drag the mouse to draw a line e Click again to create an anchor point and continue until the border or path is complete e Right click to release the drawing tool The shape automatically fills with the defined graphic attributes Refer to Building Hierarchical Displays on page 320 for additional instructions Device Palette Use to display the Device Palette window The Device ial Palette window displays the initial state icons for each amp scheme created using the Symbol Editor Tabs used to group the devices include e Cameras e Door Access Points e Digital Inputs e Logical Inputs e Digital Outputs e Intercom Devices e Intrusion Devices Use the tooltips to identify the scheme name Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 303 Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays Table 128 Graphics Editor icons tooltips and descriptions Continued Element Description Status Bar Displays the layer number or name currently active or er visible Active layer Layer 0 2 To change layers select Layer Settings from the Layer menu Refer to Working with Layers on page 323 Displays an icon indicating if the system with the Graphics Editor is connected to the Facility Commander server e Green indicates the Graphics Editor is communicating with the server
347. plays on the Alarm Monitor and Event Monitor The default time zone setting is GMT Command Retry Y Enter the number of seconds to wait before trying to Interval seconds re send a command such as a query for status of outputs to the intrusion panel The default value is two seconds Maximum Command Retry Attempts Enter the maximum number of times to try re sending a command to the intrusion panel The default value is three Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Addresses Tab Model Addresses Advanced Alarms Facility IP Address or Host Name bct4intrusion2 Port eooo Panel Address 23 Status Polling Interval milliseconds 500 Figure 164 Intrusion Panel Addresses tab 6 Select the Addresses tab as shown in and enter the information described in Table 101 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 101 Configure Intrusion Panel fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description IP Address or VY Ethernet Enter the IP address or host name of the Host Name intrusion panel Port VY Ethernet Enter the port number configured in the intrusion panel such as 3001 Panel Address Y Enter the intrusion panel address Connection Type Ethernet Y Select this check box to use an Ethernet connection Status Polling va Enter the number of
348. pload window displays this message Assign graphic display to one or more facilities and then click Upload 4 Use the arrow keys to add or remove facilities where this graphic display is assigned Items can belong to more than one facility Click Upload Ifthe file exists already this message displays This file already exists on the server click Upload to overwrite Table 131 Upload window fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Tag Name Enter a unique name to identify this item Use 2 36 characters This is the name that displays in the navigation pane of the client applications Description Enter a description for this item Use 1 100 characters The description does not have to be unique Available Displays the list of facilities where this graphic display can be Facilities assigned Facilities in this list depend on the operator s context and permissions Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 327 Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays Table 131 Upload window fields and descriptions Continued Field Name REQ Description Assigned To Displays the list of facilities where this graphic display is assigned Items can belong to more than one facility Downloading Graphic Displays Graphic displays should be downloaded from the server before they are edited to ensure you have the latest file gt To download a site map to your local system follow these steps 1 Display the
349. ption Review the tabbed pages and make the appropriate modifications 3 Click Submit to save the record Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 5 Assigning Permissions and Context Viewing Facility Permissions Use the Facility Permissions page to view add edit copy or delete facility permission records Refer to the following sections e Using Pre Defined Facility Permissions Adding Facility Permissions on page 104 gt To view facility permissions follow these steps 1 Select Operator Administration 2 Select Facility Permissions The Facility Permission page as shown in Figure 73 displays Facility Permissions Instructions View edit add or delete facility permissions Click to add a facility permission Add Facility Permission 4Page lofi Goto O Go Items per Page is ny Bl All Facility Permissions Grants ALL facility level permissions fA Entry Level Guard Facility Perms Grants limited monitoring and command facility level permissions for guards fA Guard Supervisor Facility Perms Grants supervisory monitoring and command facility level permissions for guards fA Intermediate Guard Facility Perrns Grants intermediate monitoring and command facility level permissions for quards fA No Facility Permissions Grants NO facility level permissions Click to copy a facility Update Configuration Facility Perms Grants configuration update facility level permission
350. ption does not have to be unique Priority Y Identify the priority from 1 to 500 One is the highest priority Add Add All Use these buttons to add instructions to the profile Remove Remove All Use these buttons to remove instructions to the profile t 4 Use the up and down arrow icons to change the sequence of the instructions that display in the Alarm Response window Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 203 Chapter 9 Configuring Alarms Page 204 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 10 Using the Alarm Monitor This chapter introduces the Facility Commander Alarm Monitor and describes its features It also describes how to use the Alarm Monitor to display different time zones The Alarm Monitor displays icons indicating video clips and site maps are available In this chapter Overview on page 206 Alarm Alert on page 207 Navigating the Alarm Monitor on page 208 Customizing the Alarm Monitor on page 211 Changing Window Name and Contents on page 211 Launch Video Automatically on page 214 Responding to Alarms on page 215 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 205 Chapter 10 Using the Alarm Monitor Page 206 Overview The Alarm Monitor is a multi functional client application that allows you to view alarm events The Alarm Monitor displays alarm events as a single transaction which is updated when the status of the alarm changes The Alarm Monitor allows an operator to
351. ption of the Alarm Alert window Table 78 Alarm Alert descriptions Information Description Active Alarms Displays a count of the active alarms When the number of active alarms equals zero the Alarm Alert window will be gray The window is red when alarms are present Total Alarms Displays a count of the total number of alarms Highest Priority Displays the number of the highest priority alarm Silence Click Silence to stop the sound Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 207 Chapter 10 Using the Alarm Monitor Navigating the Alarm Monitor gt To open the Alarm Monitor follow these steps 1 Launch the Facility Commander Launcher window select Launch and Alarm Monitor or select the Alarm Monitor icon from the Viewers toolbar 2 The Alarm Monitor shown in Figure 136 displays Title Bar A Alarm Monitor 1 New York Window Action View Help Control Toolbar gt Column Headings Indicators gt o oosa 00100 NY LOBBY EAST Alarm Status Bar gt Total Alarms 55 Unacknowledged 53 Highest Priority 1 Figure 136 Alarm Monitor window Table 79 lists and describes the elements on the Alarm Monitor interface Table 79 Alarm Monitor descriptions Element Description Alarm Monitor Interface Title Bar Displays Alarm Monitor window instance number and custom window title Refer to Managing Multiple Windows on page 20 for more information about window insta
352. r 2 2 Release Notes This document includes late breaking information on Facility Commander and notes on new enhancements and fixes e Facility Commander 2 2 Installation Manual This document describes how to install Facility Commander and its components It also includes instructions to connect hardware and other peripheral devices Facility Commander 2 2 with VisioWave Setup Guide This document describes how to install and configure VisioWave for Facility Commander The following documents contain information about the Picture Perfect access control application e Picture Perfect 4 0 Installation Manual This document describes how to install and configure the Picture Perfect application e Picture Perfect 4 0 User Manual This document describes how to configure and manage the Picture Perfect application It describes the Picture Perfect interface and contains step by step procedures to use the application e Picture Perfect Enterprise Edition User Manual This document describes how to configure and manage the Picture Perfect Enterprise application It describes the Picture Perfect interface and contains step by step procedures to use the application e Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual This document describes how to configure and manage the Picture Perfect Redundant PPRS application It describes the Picture Perfect interface and contains step by step procedures to use the application Facility Commander Admini
353. r Y Enter the DGP number Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 263 Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Page 264 Alarms Tab General Intrusion DGP Pa Facility Intrusion DGP Main Power Failure Alarm Intrusion DGP Offline Alarm L Intrusion DGP Siren Monitor Failure Alarm Intrusion DGP Tamper Alarm Figure 171 Configure Intrusion DGP Alarms tab 5 Select the Alarms tab as shown in Figure 171 Enter the information described in Table 107 A check mark indicates a required field Table 107 Configure Intrusion DGP fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Intrusion DGP Panel Bypassed Intrusion DGP Main Power Failure Alarm Use the drop down list to select the appropriate alarm profile to use when the intrusion DGP panel is bypassed This is the generated alarm Use the drop down list to select the appropriate alarm profile to use when there is a DGP main panel failure This is the generated alarm Intrusion DGP Offline Alarm Use the drop down list to select the appropriate alarm profile to use when the DGP goes offline This is the generated alarm Intrusion DGP Siren Monitor Failure Alarm Intrusion DGP Tamper Alarm Use the drop down list to select the appropriate alarm profile to use when the intrusion DGP siren monitor fails This is the generated alarm Use the drop down list to select the appropriate alarm profile to us
354. r application Page 10 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 2 Getting Started Table 1 Facility Commander Launcher elements Element Description Use to launch the Video Console application Use to launch the Graphic Viewer application Use to launch the Graphic Editor application Use to launch the Symbol Editor application Use to launch the Facility Commander Web browser application Server Connection Indicates if the system with the client application is connected Icon to the Facility Commander server e Green indicates the client application is communicating with the server e Red indicates the client application is no longer communicating with the server Minimizing Facility Commander Launcher gt To minimize the Facility Commander Launcher window follow these steps 1 Select View 2 Select Toolbar The minimized Facility Commander toolbar displays as shown in Figure 5 Title Bar Facility Commander Launcher Defau 867 Menu Bar gt Window Launch View Help seee Toolbar Icons Server Connection Icon Figure 4 Facility Commander Launcher minimized elements Table 2 on page 12 lists and describes the elements of the Facility Commander Launcher Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 11 Chapter 2 Getting Started Table 2 Facility Commander Launcher elements Minimized Element Description Title Bar Displays the us
355. r edit the digital video recorder Digital ideo Recorder Information Tag Name Kalatel 1 Description T ID Model Addresses Advanced Alarms Facility Online Model Kalatel DVMRe 16CT v Number of Inputs 16 Time Zone GMT 05 00 America New_York EST v Facility Commander Server Media Server Archive Device lt video Clip Search Timeout seconds 30 Figure 90 Configure Digital Video Recorder page 3 Enter the information described in Table 49 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages 4 Click Submit to save the record Table 49 Configure DVR fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Tag Name Y Enter a unique name to identify this item Use 2 36 characters Description Enter a description for this item Use 1 100 characters The description does not have to be unique Reference ID Enter a name to associate this item to a blue print or wiring diagram Use 1 20 characters Page 126 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Model Tab Addresses Online Model Kalatel DVMRe 16CT Sonar of Inputs je a Time Zone GMT 05 00 America New_York ES Facility Commander Server Media Server i Archive Device a v Video Clip Search Timeout seconds 30 Figure 91 Configure DVR Model tab 5 Select the
356. r message for the field in error condition Configure Analog Switcher 00049 Errors occurred Move mouse pointer over X for details Error Messages View or edit the analog switcher Analog Switcher Information Tag Name Kalatel Analog Switcher Description Reference ID Model KalatelKTD 348 MAA TORS Tare ete ei cenit FAGI Command 00049 Errors occurred Move mouse pointer over X for details Instructions rec commen View or edit the analog switcher Analog Switcher Information Tag Name Kalatel Analog Switcher Description Reference ID Addresses Tooltip gt 00032 Enter value for required field Figure 12 Configuration pages with error messages Refer to Appendix C on page 409 for a complete list of error messages Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 23 Chapter 2 Getting Started Navigating the Multi Viewer The Multi Viewer window in Figure 13 is comprised of three separate viewing areas or panes Each pane represents separate viewing areas which allow multiple programs such as the Video Console the Graphics Viewer Event Monitor and the Alarm Monitor to display within a single window Refer to Customizing the Multi Viewer on page 25 for information about changing the programs that display within the Multi Viewer gt To display the Multi Viewer follow these steps 1 Select Facility Commander Launcher 2 Select Launch
357. r not enabled and none view update create and delete permissions e The ability to lock and unlock and access points is either enabled or not enabled e The second type grants permission based on which category is selected For example if an operator is granted permission to create new records than permission is also granted to view and update records but not delete records Refer to Facility Permissions on page 102 for more information about configuring permissions To review the specific permissions granted when using the predefined permissions refer to the following sections Permission Level Refer to All Facility Permissions Table 149 on page 441 Entry Level Guard Facility Permissions Table 150 on page 444 Guard Supervisor Facility Permissions Table 151 on page 446 Intermediate Guard Facility Permissions Table 152 on page 448 Update Configuration Facility Permissions Table 153 on page 450 View Configuration Facility Permissions Table 154 on page 452 If you are reading this document online click one of the links above to navigate directly to the page All Facility Permissions Table 149 All Facility Permissions Enabled None View Update Create Delete Controls Lock Unlock Yes Access Points Activate Reset Yes Digital Outputs Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 441 Appendix D Facility Permissions Table 149 All Facility Permissions
358. r page 425 details 00050 Screen definition error Request could not be page 425 performed 00051 Operation cancelled by the operator page 425 00052 Operation not permitted page 425 00053 Duplicate browser error page 425 00054 Login timed out please log in again page 425 00055 Login failed server not available page 426 00056 Login not supported from unknown terminal page 426 00057 Specified user name not valid page 426 00058 Context information not available for specified user page 427 name 00059 All workstation licenses in use page 427 00060 Login failed workstation not specified or not defined page 427 00061 Password and confirmation password must match page 427 00062 Invalid user name or password please try again page 428 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 411 Appendix C Error Messages Table 147 Error messages numbers and page number Continued Error Messages Page 00063 Number of items per page not valid page 428 00064 Page number not valid page 428 00065 Page request not valid page 428 00066 This client is currently offline request cannot be page 428 executed 00067 Attempt to update facility membership failed page 429 00068 The window filter contains no facilities page 429 00069 The update to the window filter failed page 429 00070 Only one instance of lt name gt can be started at atime page 430 00071 Por
359. r shown in Figure 141 on page 221 displays Page 220 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 11 Using the Event Monitor Column Headings Title Bar gt eh Event Monitor 1 Window Action View Help Indicators Device Time Event Type Bm 01404 20 35 5 System Media Action Event AP 200401 NY TRAINING ROOM Alarm INYCam DOORFORCED OPEN 01 1 4104 20 35 5 Alarm DOOR FORCED OPEN AP 201300 NY B2 ACCOUNT Alarm lactive ho 01 1 4 04 20 34 5 Alarm DOOR FORCED OPEN AP 201401 NY B2 DATA CENT Alarm lactive fo 01 14104 20 36 5 Alarm DOOR FORCED OPEN AP 200100 NYLOBBYEAST Alarm lactive fio 01 14 04 15 35 5 System Access Points Set Digital Video Video Ta Destination NY Cam 10 to 01 14 04 20 35 5 System Media Action Event AP 200100 NY LOBBY EAST Alarm INY Cam DOOR FORCED OPEN 01714104 20 35 5 Alarm DOOR FORCED OPEN AP 200101 NY COMPUTER R Alarm lactive 10 01 14 04 1 5 35 5 System Access Points Set Digital Video Video Ta Destination NY Cam 10 01 14 04 15 35 5 System Access Points Set Intercom Make Call OriginatingStationId NY 01 1 4 04 20 38 5 Alarm DOOR FORCED OPEN AP 200200 NY SHIPPING DOCK Alarm Pending 10 to 01 1 4104 20 35 5 System Media Action Event AP 200101 NY COMPUTER R Alarm NY Cam DOOR FORCED OPEN 01 14 04 15 35 5 Alarm DOOR FORCED OPEN AP 200301 NY CONFERENCE Alarm a
360. r this Alarm camera Motion Detection Select the Motion Detection alarm for this Alarm camera Video Loss Alarm Select the Video Loss alarm for this camera Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 135 Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Facility Tab General Alarms Fam Assigned to Bii Available BOCA RATON East Coast Region Global Facili PP GLOBAL Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility Sample Region Facility West Coast Region Figure 100 Configure Camera Facility tab 7 Select the Facilities tab as shown in Figure 100 and enter the information described in Table 58 A check mark indicates a required field Table 58 Configure Camera fields and descriptions Description Field Name REQ Assigned to Available Y Displays the name of facility or facilities where this items is currently assigned Items can belong to more than one facility This is a read only field and cannot be edited Use to assign or change the facility membership for this item The facilities that display in this list depend on the operator s context and permissions e To assign the item to more than one facility select the first facility and press the Ctrl key while selecting the other facilities The selected facilities are highlighted Click Submit e If this item is already assigned to a facility listed in the Assigned To list press the Ctrl key before selecting the new facil
361. ra_01_02 e camera_01_03 je camera_01_04 P camera_01_05 je camera_01_06 e AML th dow Action View Help B E 3 00DA Figure 116 Multi Viewer To arrange applications in the Multi Viewer 1 Select a pane in which to view a Facility Commander application 2 Click File gt Exit or Window gt Exit depending on the application to close the application in that pane 3 Right click in the empty pane Select from any of the four Facility Commander applications Alarm Monitor Event Monitor Video Viewer or Graphics Viewer 4 The selected application displays in that pane The name of the application displays a number indicating how many instances of an application is open For example if there are two instances of the Graphics Viewer open the first will display as 1 1 and the second as 1 2 Drag and Drop Cameras Use this feature with cameras connected to DVRs Operators can select cameras from the navigation pane or from a map in the Graphics Viewer and drag the camera to any pane in the Video Console Live video displays in the selected pane Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 159 Chapter 7 Using the Video Console Navigating the Video Console Title Bar Navigation Pane PTZ Camera Preset Indicators Mode gt To display the Video Console follow these steps 1 Open the Facility Commander Launcher window 2 Select Launch and Video Viewer or se
362. ration Guide Page 235 Chapter 12 Configuring Intercom Devices Addresses Tab Model Addresses Advanced Alarms Facility Exchange Numb IP Address or Host Name l Port C Figure 148 Configure Intercom Exchanges Addresses tab 6 Select the Addresses tab as shown in Figure 148 and enter the information described in Table 89 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 89 Configure Intercom Exchange fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Exchange Enter an exchange number only when there are multiple Number intercom exchanges with overlapping station numbers IP Address or Y Enter the intercom station IP address or host name The Host Name host name is case sensitive Port va Enter the port number Page 236 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 12 Configuring Intercom Devices Advanced Tab Model Addresses Advanced Alarms Facility jo Command Retry Interval seconds 30 Figure 149 Configure Intercom Exchanges Advanced tab 7 Select the Advanced tab as shown in Figure 147 and enter the information described in Table 90 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 90 Configure Intercom Exchange fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Status Polling Interval Y Enter the number of seconds to wa
363. rator records follow these steps 1 Select Operator Administration and then select Operators The Operators list page displays 2 Use the Server drop down list to select the Picture Perfect server with the records you want to import to Facility Commander 3 Click Import The Import page as shown in Figure 40 displays Instructions Choose from the available entries and click Import Facility BOCA RATON x Available Figure 40 Import page 4 Use the Facility drop down list to select a facility for the imported operators Refer to Facilities on page 67 for more information 5 Select the operator records you want to import into Facility Commander You can select one several or all the operators appearing in the list To import several operators select the first operator and press the Ctrl key while selecting the other operators The selected operator names are highlighted To import all the operators select the first operator in the list press the Shift key and select the last operator in the list All the operator names are highlighted 6 Click Import The list page displays the operator information from the imported records Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 65 Chapter 4 Importing Records Changing Operator Preferences Use the Set Operator Preferences page to set the language for displays and change the number of items that display on a Facility Commander list page 1 Select En
364. re Intrusion Panel Offline Alarm Intrusion Panel Tamper Lost Badge Alarm Supervised Reader Alarm Intrusion Panel Tamper Alarm Suspended Badge Alarm Intrusion Siren Monitor Failure Intrusion Siren Monitor Failure Alarm Invalid Badge Alarm Table Rollover Event Unknown Badge Alarm Valid Badge Event Intrusion Input Holdup At Night Video Loss Alarm Intrusion Input Tamper Supervised Reader Alarm Suspended Badge Alarm Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 229 Chapter 11 Using the Event Monitor Customizing Window Name and Contents Use the Window Filter shown in Figure 144 to modify the current display of items displayed in the navigation pane allowing an operator to view specific records such as those from New York and not from Boston or Chicago When an operator does not have permission to modify the items in the Window Filter the items are disabled The operator is able to view the items displayed in the window but is not able to make any selections gt To filter items from view in the navigation pane follow these steps 1 From the View menu select Window Filter The window filter in Figure 144 displays Window Filter Custom Title Boca Raton FL Facility Facilities Z system Administrator Context v Global Facility CHICAGO East Coast Region NEW YORK Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility Sample Region Faci
365. receding the message to identify the error Refer to Appendix C on page 409 Browser Menu Select any entry in the navigation pane to display the appropriate Browser page Refer to Browser Menu on page 18 for more information Buttons Click the appropriate button to submit reset or cancel a record The buttons include e Click Add to display a blank configuration page where you enter information Required fields are indicated by an asterisk e Click Import to import records from the Picture Perfect system e Click Synchronization to synchronize device information between the selected Picture Perfect system and Facility Commander Managing Multiple Windows This feature allows you to open multiple client applications and arrange the windows according to your needs You can monitor alarm activities from different locations and view video from camera positions located anywhere at the same time When you first open multiple window instances of the same application the windows display in a cascade fashion However once you move the windows to the position and adjust the window size the window always opens to the same position and size allowing you to create your own personal workspace Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 2 Getting Started Client Application Title Bars The Facility Commander client applications indicate a window number and other information in the title bar such as a customized
366. red due to inactivity and the client license was released The session timeout period is a system parameter with a default of 30 minutes which is changeable by the System Administrator The operator must log in again Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 425 Appendix C Error Messages Table 148 List of error numbers messages causes and actions Continued Message Causes Actions 00055 Login failed server not The client software could not The System Administrator available communicate with the Facility should verify that the server Commander server The host name specified by the server may be down ora hostURL parameter in the network problem may be client properties file specifies preventing communication the correct server host name The name server used by the Verify the server is up and the client workstation may not be server host is accessible providing translation of the through the network server host name to a valid IP Also use the client log file to address For Unix systems view the details of the error verify that entries in the message Contact the local etc hosts file are correct network administrator for Also the operator may be assistance attempting to log into a Facility Commander 2 0 server using a client application that is an earlier version 00056 Login not supported from The operator attempted tolog Attempt to contact the unknown terminal in from a non workstation opera
367. refer to Auto Alarm Video Popup Priority Range on page 51 or verify the operator s permissions setting 3 Click Save Page 214 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 10 Using the Alarm Monitor Responding to Alarms The Alarm Monitor window allows operators to respond to incoming alarms by using the Alarm Response window shown in Figure 140 on page 216 An operator launches the Alarm Response Window by double clicking the alarm on the Alarm Monitor or selecting Acknowledge from the Actions menu Using the Alarm Response window an operator can acknowledge remove or purge an alarm e Instructions for alarms are generated by and retrieved from the access control systems e If there are multiple Picture Perfect systems the appropriate system supplies the instructions for the alarms Operators can select a pre defined alarm response or type a response in the Alarm Response window Alarm Response Required Depending on the system parameters an operator can be required to enter a response before removing an alarm An alarm priority range is identified and any time an alarm event occurs within the range an operator will be required to enter a response If a priority range is not specified alarms can be acknowledged without entering a response in the Alarm Response window If the operator does not enter the required response the Remove and Purge alarm action will be ignored until a response is provided Faci
368. resoures Verify that the license key was generated using the correct machine code for the computer where the server software was installed You should call Customer Support provide the server machine code and have them verify that the license code is correct Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 435 Appendix C Error Messages Table 148 List of error numbers messages causes and actions Continued Message Causes Actions 00090 Selected DXF filename does Selected re imported DXF file Select the same DXF file not match the original name does not match the original name to re import Operation aborted DXF file name 00091 Error importing AutoCad DXF The DXF file may not be Make sure the DXF file is in drawings Operation aborted saved in version 12 format or DXF file format with version the DXF file is corrupted or 12 not in DXF format 00092 Duplicate layer name 0 Duplicate layer name is found Change the duplicate layer found Operation aborted when merging DXF layers name from the layer setting dialog and re import again If that layer name is a DXF layer you need to change the original layer name in AutoCad and delete the object to re import it again 00093 AutoCad DXF layer name 0 DXF layer name cannot be You have to rename the layer cannot be renamed changed for later updating in the AutoCad and re import and merging purpose in again in order to change the layer name 00094 Val
369. rform the import operation again import page Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 439 Appendix C Error Messages Table 148 List of error numbers messages causes and actions Continued Message Causes Actions 00111 The bus address is already in On the camera configuration Select a different bus address use for this DVR Please page the operator specifieda for the PTZ camera select another bus address for a PTZ camera that is already in use by another PTZ camera on the specified PTZ controller 00112 The operator is running a The Facility Commander Page 440 Client version lt client version gt not compatible with server version lt server version gt Facility Commander client application that is not at the same version level as the server This can happen if a version 1 x client is used with a version 2 x server or vice versa Facility Commander Administration Guide client application must be at the same version level as the server Either log into a different server that is at the same version level or upgrade the client to a later version Appendix D Facility Permissions Appendix D Facility Permissions Use facility permissions to grant or deny permissions to monitor and control items such as locking and unlocking door access points or control PTZ cameras view live or recorded video acknowledge alarms and more There are two types of permissions granted enabled o
370. rm Response Required Priority Range Video PrePlay Time seconds 0 I Enable Encryption With Clients Cancel Figure 33 Configure System Parameters page 2 Enter the information described in Table 23 to make changes A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages 3 Click Submit to save the record Table 23 Configure System Parameters fields and description Field Name REQ Description System Default Locale f Click on the drop down list to select the language for the local system when operator locale information is not available Operator Idle Timeout Y Enter the number of minutes for a session to remain minutes idle When the session times out the operator will be asked to log in again This applies to the browser and client applications Maximum amount of time is 480 minutes Auto Alarm Video Enter one or more priority ranges from 1 to 500 Leave Popup Priority Range this field blank to disable this option Examples are 1 10 300 400 500 or 1 500 Refer to Launching the Video Console Automatically on page 45 for more information Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 51 Chapter 3 Configuring the System Page 52 Table 23 Configure System Parameters fields and description Continued Field Name REQ Description Alarm Response Required Priority Range Enter one or more priority ranges from 1 to 500 Leave this field blank to di
371. rmation Disabled is the default setting Enabled The information is written to the database When you reset the system the information is not lost The system administrator should not change these settings unless instructed to do so by Customer Support The performance of the system could be affected if any of these settings are enabled If you have any questions concerning these settings please contact Customer Support Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 18 Viewing Diagnostics Changing Diagnostics Settings Use the Diagnostics list page shown in Figure 234 to view the diagnostic settings This page allows you to edit or view diagnostic settings Diagnostics Request was successful Instructions View Diagnostics Description Diagnostics Mode B A System Status Enabled B a Database Transactions Enabled hs Database Queries Enabled B Database Connection Pool Enabled mn amp Facility Membership Cache Enabled B a Thread Pool Manager Enabled BL Service Framework Enabled B ATS Panel Intrusion Proxy Host ATS Panel Enabled Edit afia A Media Diagnostics t A vM Statistics BLI Picture Perfect Proxy Host betpicture1 Enabled View Icon Figure 234 Diagnostics page Editing the Diagnostics Settings Selecting the Edit icon allows you to change the diagnostics mode and identify the log interval how often the statistics are written to a log g
372. rol f Identify the TCP IP port on which the access control System Port Picture Perfect system communicates with Facility Commander The default value is 8088 Time Zone vd Use the drop down list to select the time zone for this access control server This time zone displays on the Alarm Monitor and Event Monitor The default time zone setting is GMT Facility Use the drop down list to identify the server to Commander communicate with the access control system Server Enabled The check box to enable the access control system server is selected as the default value If you do not want the access control system to communicate with Facility Commander clear the check box to disable the server Page 40 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 3 Configuring the System External System Tab Address External Syste Advanced Alarms Facility Model Picture Perfect z User Name dudley lennon Password fr Confirm Password poveo Figure 24 Configure Access Control System External System tab 6 Select the External System tab as shown in Figure 24 and enter the information described in Table 16 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 16 Configure Access Control System fields and description Field Name REQ Description Model Y Use the drop down list to select which access control system is being used with Facility Com
373. ry another operation If the problem persists contact the System Administrator for assistance The system log file should be examined for evidence of network failures or a software problem If necessary contact Customer Support for assistance Page 414 Facility Commander Administration Guide Appendix C Error Messages Table 148 List of error numbers messages causes and actions Continued Message Causes Actions Internal server error This message indicates a Click the Back button on the software problem has browser to return to the last occurred or that the request valid screen and try another made through the web operation browser interface is not If the problem persists synchronized with the current contact the System State of the operator s Administrator for assistance session The latter problem The system log file should be can occur if the operator examined for evidence of an attempts to bypass the attempted security breach normal operations of the user operator bypassing of normal interface or may indicate an operations of the user attempted security breach interface or a software problem If necessary contact Customer Support for assistance 00001 Exceeded licensed quantity The operation requested by Reduce the number of active capacity is lt number gt the operator required a operator windows using the lt number gt in use desired license resource that was not resource or increase the
374. s permission gt fA View Configuration Facility Perms Grants configuration view only facility level permissions Figure 73 Facility Permissions page Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 103 Chapter 5 Assigning Permissions and Context Adding Facility Permissions gt To add or edit a facility permission follow these steps 1 Select Operator Administration and then Facility Permissions The Facility Permissions page displays 2 Click Add Facility Permission to display the Configure Facility Permissions page as shown in Figure 74 Configure Facility Permissions Instructions View or edit the facility permission Facility Permission Information Tag Name T COCO Description Controls Monitors Setup Devices Facility Permission Enabled Lock Unlock Access Points L Activate Reset Digital Outputs L Control PTZ Cameras L Enable Disable Digital Input Monitoring L r Enable Disable Logical Input Monitoring Cancel Figure 74 Configure Facility Permissions page 3 Enter the information described in Table 43 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages 4 Click Submit to save the record Table 43 Configure Facility Permissions Control tab Field Name REQ Description Tag Name Y Enter a name to identify this record Use 2 36 characters Description Enter a description for this record Use 1 100 characters
375. s View or edit the CCTY monitor CCT Monitor Information Tag Name Lobby 100 Monitor Description NY Reference ID Facility Assigned to ae Available BOCA RATON Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility Sample Region Facility West Coast Region Cancel Figure 113 Configure CCTV Monitor page 3 Enter the information described in Table 66 A check mark indicates a required field 4 Click Submit to save the record Table 66 Configure CCTV Monitor fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Tag Name Y Enter a unique name to identify this item Use 2 36 characters Description Enter a description for this item Use 1 100 characters The description does not have to be unique Reference ID Enter a name to associate an item to a blue print or wiring diagram Use 1 20 characters Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 151 Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Table 66 Configure CCTV Monitor fields and descriptions Continued Field Name REQ Description Facility Assigned To Displays the name of facility or facilities where this item is currently assigned Items can belong to more than one facility This is a read only field Available Y Use to assign or change the facility membership for this item The facilities that display in this list depend on the operator s context and permissions If this item is already assigned to a facility l
376. s such as the Alarm Monitor or permission to configure event action mapping definitions Table 155 All System Permissions Enabled None View Update Create Delete Applications Alarm Monitor Yes Event Monitor Yes Video Console Yes Graphic Viewer Yes Editors Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 455 Appendix E System Permissions Table 155 All System Permissions Enabled None View Update Create Delete Event Action Mappings Yes Yes Yes Yes Alarm Instructions Yes Yes Yes Yes Alarm Profiles Yes Yes Yes Yes Graphic Editor Yes Yes Yes Yes Symbol Editor Yes Yes Yes Yes Operations Change Window Filter Yes Change Locale Yes Change Video Popup Yes Options Shutdown System Yes Run Configure Yes Diagnostics Alarm Colors Yes System Parameters Yes Page 456 Facility Commander Administration Guide Appendix E System Permissions Entry Level Guard System Permissions Table 156 Entry Level Guard System Permissions Enabled None View Update Create Delete Applications Alarm Monitor Yes Event Monitor Yes Video Console Yes Graphic Viewer Yes Editors Event Action Mappings Yes No No No No Alarm Instructions Yes No No No No Alarm Profiles Yes No No No No Graphic Editor Yes No No No No Symbol Editor Yes No No No No Operations C
377. s available for the Windows Macintosh Unix Linux and IBM AIX The Acrobat Reader can be obtained for free from Adobe Systems Incorporated http Avww adobe com The table of contents bookmarks cross references index entries and thumbnail pages are active navigation elements Cross references and links are displayed in blue Select these elements to quickly move through the document Any page in the document or the entire document can be printed while viewing it in Acrobat Reader Facility Commander Administration Guide Page xi Page xii Conventions Used In This Document The following conventions are used in this document Bold type e Text to be entered by the reader e Menu items buttons programs and other GUI elements selected with a mouse or keyboard by the reader Italic type e Titles of books and various documents e Cross references to headings within a document E mail and Web site or URL addresses e Emphasis of an instruction or point e Variables Monospace e Text that displays on the computer screen type uP Examples of path names or coding sequences Blue blue or e In online versions of this document hyperlinked elements blue type that take the reader directly to the cross references related topics and URL addresses Facility Commander Administration Guide Related Documents The following documents contain information about Facility Commander Facility Commande
378. s how to create or import a site map and link symbols created with the Symbol Editor to represent access points cameras and other devices Readers should be familiar with using other graphic drawing programs In this chapter Overview on page 300 Using the Graphics Editor on page 301 Drawing Tools on page 305 Graphic Attributes on page 306 Creating a Graphic Display on page 308 Importing AutoCAD Drawings on page 314 Linking Graphic Displays on page 318 Building Hierarchical Displays on page 320 Working with Layers on page 323 Managing Graphic Display Files on page 326 Editing Graphic Display Records on page 330 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 299 Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays Overview This feature allows you to design site maps of your premises and associate graphic images symbols to access points and their locations When an alarm event occurs one or more of the icons will change its appearance based on the alarm state condition if configured to do so Table 127 lists the steps needed to complete a graphic display and references to where you will find detailed instructions to complete these tasks Table 127 Task Overview Y Create symbol scheme and upload to the server Refer to Using the Symbol Editor on page 287 for more information Y Import a site map or graphic image which becomes the background layer in the Graphic Editor e Refer to Importing AutoCAD Drawings on page 314 for
379. s identified with the associated cameras and preset conditions The DVRs are listed in alphabetical order using the Tag Name field To change camera views select a different camera in the navigation pane The Video Console replaces the previous image with live video from the recent selection This gives you the ability to switch from one view to another The items that display in the navigation pane are determined by an operator s permission levels and contexts Use the Window Filter to further limit the number of items in the navigation pane Refer to Create a window filter on page 176 for more information Control Buttons Pause Fast Rewind Fast Forward Nol ae w 44 ai 4 ii gt b gt vp Reverse Play Stop Snapshot Play Speed Reverse Pause Forward Pause y Sp Snapshot Click Snapshot to capture the current image a single frame of video in a JPG format You can attach this image to an e mail message for distribution The images are stored on the Windows client in the directory c Video To change the directory where snapshots will be stored 1 Select File gt Preferences to open the Video Viewer Preferences window 2 Click the button to open the Select Directory dialog 3 Choose a directory and click OK 4 Click OK again to close the Video Viewer Preferences window The format of the file name is camera tag name ddmmyy hhmmss jpg An example is CAM Lobby 180303 072910 jpg Play speed Click
380. s to upload the symbol scheme to the server for distribution Next use the Graphics Editor to associate the symbol scheme to a map Refer to Using the Graphics Editor on page 301 for instructions Downloading a Symbol Scheme To download a symbol scheme follow these steps 1 From the File menu select Download or select the Download icon from the toolbar The window shown in Figure 195 on page 295 displays Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 14 Creating Symbol Schemes EE s ge _ Available Server Symbol Schemes Doors Figure 195 Input window 2 Use the drop down list to select which symbol scheme you want to download from the server Click OK The file is copied from the server system to your local system Deleting a Symbol Scheme gt To delete a symbol scheme from the local system follow these steps 1 Select the scheme you want to delete from the Symbol Schemes list The information for this record displays 2 From the File menu select Delete or select the Delete icon from the toolbar A window displays a message asking Are you sure you want to remove this scheme Click Yes to remove the scheme This removes the symbol scheme from the local system only If it has been uploaded to the server system and you want to delete it the file must be removed using Delete Resources 3 From the File menu select Exit to close the Symbol Editor window State Associations and Conditi
381. s you want to import 4 Click Import The Import page as shown in Figure 49 displays Instructions Choose from the available entries and click Import Time Zone GMT 05 00 EST EST bd Available 0 BOCA LOBBY EAST 1 BOCA COMPUTER ROOM 0 BOCA SHIPPING DOCK 1 BOCA CAFETERIA AP 100300 BOCA LOBBY WEST 1 0 1 0 1 BOCA CONFERENCE ROOM BOCA LIBRARY BOCA TRAINING ROOM BOCA B1 NORTH STAIR BOCA B1 SOUTH STAIR AP 101200 BOCA B1 EAST STAIR AP 101201 BOCA B1 WEST STAIR AP 101300 BOCA B2 ACCOUNTING AP 101301 BOCA B2 ACCTS PAYABLE AP 101400 BOCA B2 ACCTS RECY AP 101401 BOCA B2 DATA CENTER x ey a Figure 49 Import page 5 Use the Time Zone drop down list to select the time zone where this access point is located 6 Select the access points you want to import Use the Shift key to select all the records or the Ctrl key to make multiple selections from the list 7 Click Import The Access Points list page displays the imported items from Picture Perfect Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 75 Chapter 4 Importing Records Editing Access Points gt To make changes to an access point follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then Access Points The Access Points list page displays 2 Locate the access point you want to edit and select the link The Configure Access Point page as shown in Figure 50 displays Instructions Import synchronize view ed
382. sable this option Examples are 1 10 300 400 500 or 1 500 Any time an alarm event occurs within a specified priority range an operator response is required Refer to Require an Alarm Response on page 50 for more information Video PrePlay Time Y seconds Enter the number of seconds to start playing a video clip before the actual clip time Refer to Configure Video Pre Play Time on page 50 for more information Enable Encryption With Clients Select this check box to encrypt communication between Facility Commander and the client applications Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 3 Configuring the System System Shutdown Use System Shutdown to initiate a shutdown of the system All active client workstations are notified of the pending shutdown with a pop up window Operators using a Browser page are notified of the shutdown when the operator takes an action that causes the page to change such as clicking Submit or requesting another page Shutdown Notification to Client Applications When a shutdown request is issued all client workstations are immediately notified A window with a progress bar displays on each workstation with this message System shutdown is in progress Application will be terminated When the time expires all client workstations are immediately logged off Shutdown Notification to Browser Configuration Clients The browser workstations behave differently because the brows
383. se 1 to 50 characters Spaces are valid Page 60 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 4 Importing Records General Tab General _ External System Facility Password o Confirm Password pra o o ooo Context Enty Level Guard Context z Figure 37 Configure Operator General tab 5 Select the General tab as shown in Figure 37 and enter the information described in Table 26 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 26 Configure Operator fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Password The Password field is encrypted and displays asterisks e If you have selected the External System check box on External System tab do not enter a password The Picture Perfect system will authenticate the operator s account using its own password information e If this user does not have an existing account on the Picture Perfect system enter a password to access Facility Commander which authenticates the operator s account using this password information Confirm Password The new password must be entered again exactly as it was entered in the Password field The Confirm Password field is encrypted and is displayed as asterisks Context A Use the drop down list to select the appropriate context for this operator Refer to Contexts on page 113 for more information Facility Commander Administration Guide Pag
384. se the drop down list to select the time zone where this device is located This time zone displays on the Alarm Monitor and Event Monitor The default time zone setting is GMT Page 242 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 12 Configuring Intercom Devices Monitoring Tab General Graphic Display NY Floor 02 x Camera NY Cam 100 x Preset NY Cam 100 PS 01 7 Access Point AP 200101 NY COMPUTER ROOM x Monitoring Alarms Facility Figure 155 Configure Intercom Station Monitoring tab 6 Select the Monitor tab as shown in Figure 154 and enter the information described in Table 95 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to add information on the tabbed pages 7 Click Submit to save the record Table 95 Configure Intercom Station fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Graphic Display Camera Use the drop down list to create the default action for the device When an operator uses the Control Toolbar this graphic display will be listed Refer to Control Toolbar on page 209 for more information Use the drop down list to create the default action for the device When an operator uses the Control Toolbar this camera will be listed Refer to Control Toolbar on page 209 for more information Preset Access Point Use the drop down list to create the default action for the device When an operator uses the Control Toolbar to select
385. ser 2 Type sh usr BackupUtility BackupUtility B Page 404 Facility Commander Administration Guide Appendix B Troubleshooting Information Appendix B Troubleshooting Information This section provides trouble shooting information for problems that may be not be resolved by consulting the user interface error message table The table will be updated from experience gained through debugging customer problems mostly based on input received from Customer Support and the Facility Commander test team Table 146 List of Common Problems with Possible Causes and Solutions Problem Possible Causes and Solutions Product Installation and Removal After product installation you cannot log in the first time as the default admin operator There are several possible causes of this problem After performing the checks indicated in the steps below it may be necessary to change the logger configuration file to include more detailed information in the log file to help determine the cause of the problem 1 Verify that you have created a valid license file license xml and is has been placed in the correct location The license file must specify the correct Operating System and Database product 2 Verify the contents of the systemconfig xml file and ensure that the database specification is correct Verify all fields in the specification and that the host computer is accessible across the network After product remova
386. shed right click to complete the shape New Path Use to create a set of straight cubic or quadratic segments The Path Tools window displays with four segment types straight line isometric two dimensional and three dimensional e Left click to create each point Right click to complete the shape Text Entry Abe Use to add text to the drawing e Click in the drawing area and the Text Input window displays Enter the text you want to add to the drawing and click OK e Resize the text by stretching or shrinking the text in the drawing area Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 305 Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays Page 306 Table 129 Drawing tools description Continued Tool Description Array Use to draw a grid with four columns and four rows This can be a square or rectangle shape e Click in the drawing area where you want the grid to display and move the mouse until the grid is the size you want e Resize by stretching or shrinking the grid in the drawing area Use to connect objects This option groups objects together so they can be moved together instead of moving each object individually e Click the icon and all the objects in the drawing area are selected e From the Transform menu select Group The objects are now linked or grouped together Orthogonal Use to link objects together Choose a direction either Link al horizontal or vertical f
387. sions To assign the item to more than one facility select the first facility and press the Ctrl key while selecting the other facilities The selected facilities are highlighted Click Submit e If this item is already assigned to a facility listed in the Assigned To list press the Ctrl key before selecting the new facility assignment e To assign the item to all the listed facilities select the first facility in the list press the Shift key and select the last facility in the list All the facilities are highlighted Click Submit Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 63 Chapter 4 Importing Records Removing Default Account Do not remove the default system account before creating a Facility Commander operator record for the system administrator gt To remove the default operator account from the system follow these steps 1 Select Operator Administration 2 Select Operators The Operators list page as shown in Figure 35 displays 3 Click the Delete icon next to the Default System Account item The Confirm Deletion window with the operator s full name displays 4 Click Yes to delete the record The default account is removed from the system Page 64 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 4 Importing Records Importing Operators Importing operators allows the system administrator to identify which operators can log in to Facility Commander gt To import existing ope
388. site map in a JPG or GIF format use the Create New Image Entry icon to import the map file Refer to Create New Image Entry in Table 128 for more information on how to do this If you have an existing site map in a DXF format refer to Importing AutoCAD Drawings on page 314 for more information 3 Select the Device Palette icon to display the Device Palettes window as shown in Figure 179 Device Palettes x _PP Door Access Points Lot Tabs gt Create PP Door Access Point pp doors Figure 179 Device Palette window 4 Select the appropriate tab to display the symbols Select the appropriate symbol using tooltips to display the scheme name After the symbol is selected it displays in the upper left hand corner of the drawing area Page 308 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays 5 Drag the image to the appropriate location on the site map Ifthe image represents an access point refer to Associating Access Points and Other Devices on page 309 lf the image represents a camera refer to Associating Camera Devices on page 310 Ifthe image represents an intrusion area refer to Viewing Intrusion Areas on page 271 Associating Access Points and Other Devices Use this option to associate a symbol icon to a specific access point digital input logical input digital output intercom or intrusion devices gt To a
389. splay Click Default to discard the changes and return to the default settings 3 On the View Selection tab you can adjust the position of the graphic display on the page Use the Start X and Start Y to change the position of the display Click Apply when you are finished making adjustments 4 On the Pages tab you can adjust the position size resolution and indicate the number of pages to print the site map or graphic display 5 On the Preview tab you can preview the page before printing Make the necessary changes and click Print Page 348 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 17 Backup Restore Informix Databases This chapter describes the backup and restore procedures for Linux and AIX files and Informix databases In this chapter Overview on page 350 Requirements Tape Backups on page 351 Backing Up Database Records on page 352 Restore Procedures on page 357 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 349 Chapter 17 Backup Restore Informix Databases Overview Backups let you copy data to a disc or tape device When you back up data to a tape you must have a tape device connected to the computer If a tape device is not available you can back up the data to a disc and transfer the file to a safe place for storage It is a good practice to back up the data stored on the Facility Commander server at regular intervals If the original data stored on the server s hard disk becomes inaccess
390. splay the action menu The Control Toolbar displays when the device is not in an alarm state Refer to Table 135 for a description of each action Table 135 Lock Unlock options Option Description Momentary Unlock Unlocks the door for a time specified in the access control system Permanent Unlock Unlocks the door permanently until changed by an operator Duration Unlock Unlocks the door the number of seconds specified in the drop down list Refer to Unlock Door for Duration for more information Lock Door Locks the door until reset by an operator using the unlock command Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 341 Chapter 16 Viewing Graphic Displays Unlock Door for Duration gt To unlock a door for a specified duration follow these steps 3 Select Duration Unlock The window shown in Figure 209 displays Duration Unlock xi Enter Duration in Seconds Figure 209 Lock and unlock door options 4 Enter the number of seconds in the Enter Duration in Seconds field 5 Click OK View Video from a Specific Camera To view video from a camera device follow these steps 1 Select the graphic display Refer to Opening Graphic Displays on page 338 NY Cam 100 Control Toolbar Figure 210 Graphic display with video devices View Video Live NY Cam 100 2 Locate the symbol representing the camera If the camera is in an alarm state Double
391. ssages causes and actions Continued Message Causes Actions 00081 Error in uploading display This error can occur from many different causes as listed in the actions below Examine the client or server log files as appropriate to determine the cause of the failure Retry the operation to see if the problem persists 1 Files referenced by the graphic display are missing on the client This can occur especially if graphics files such as images were referenced across a network and they are not accessible when the save operation is in progress Files may also have been deleted manually from the workstation after the graphic display was created but before it was uploaded Examine the client log file to determine which files were missing or inaccessible and correct as appropriate 2 Network communications error Facility Commander server error database error Examine the system log file to determine which of these problems is the cause of the failure and correct as appropriate 00082 Error in uploading symbol scheme This message indicates that network communications problem occurred when uploading a symbol file referenced by a graphic display that is being uploaded to the server Retry the operation If the problem persists contact the System Administrator to examine the client and server log files to determine the problem 00083 Uploading aborted Files used in disp
392. ssigned To list press the Ctrl key before selecting the new facility assignment To assign the item to all the listed facilities select the first facility in the list press the Shift key and select the last facility in the list All the facilities are highlighted Click Submit Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 275 Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Configuring Intrusion Inputs Use the Configure Intrusion Input page to view add edit copy or deleted intrusion input records Refer to the following sections for instructions e Viewing Intrusion Input Adding Intrusion Inputs on page 277 Viewing Intrusion Input gt To view the intrusion input follow these steps 1 Select Device Management 2 Select Intrusion Inputs The Intrusion Inputs page as shown in Figure 183 displays Intrusion Inputs Instructions View edit add or delete intrusion inputs 4Page 1 of 1 gt Go to Go Items per Page i5 m Tag Name Description Reference ID Intrusion Area Input Number ael Motion Detectors NY Computer Lab ooo NY Computer Lab a Figure 183 Intrusion Inputs page Page 276 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Adding Intrusion Inputs gt To add an intrusion input follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then Intrusion Inputs The Intrusion Inputs page displays 2 Click Add Intrusion Input The Configure Intrus
393. ssigned to Displays the facility or facilities for this digital output Items can belong to more than one facility This is a read only field and cannot be edited Available A Use to assign or change the facility membership for this item The facilities that display in this list depend on the operator s context and permissions e To assign the item to more than one facility select the first facility and press the Ctrl key while selecting the other facilities The selected facilities are highlighted Click Submit e Ifthis item is already assigned to a facility listed in the Assigned To list press the Ctrl key before selecting the new facility assignment e To assign the item to all the listed facilities select the first facility in the list press the Shift key and select the last facility in the list All the facilities are highlighted Click Submit Page 96 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 4 Importing Records Synchronizing Digital Outputs gt To synchronize access points follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then Digital Outputs The Digital Outputs list page displays 2 Click Synchronize and the Synchronize page in Figure 71 displays Synchronize Instructions Choose from the available entries and click Synchronize DO 200116 NY FIRE SOUNDER Synchronize DN ee ae Figure 71 Synchronize page 3 Select the records that have changed on the Picture Perfect system t
394. ssions Enabled None View Update Create Delete Controls Lock Unlock Yes Access Points Activate Reset No Digital Outputs Control PTZ Cameras Yes Enable Disable No Digital Input Monitoring Enable Disable No Logical Input Monitoring Monitors Purge Alarms No Acknowledge Remove Yes Alarms View Live Video Yes View Recorded Video Yes Setup Operators Yes No No No No Contexts Yes No No No No System Permissions Yes No No No No Facility Permissions Yes No No No No Facilities Yes No No No No Facility Commander Yes No No No No Servers Workstations Yes No No No No Access Control Systems Yes No No No No Page 444 Facility Commander Administration Guide Appendix D Facility Permissions Table 150 Entry Level Guard Facility Permissions Enabled None View Update Create Delete Devices Access Points Yes No No No No Digital Inputs Yes No No No No Logical Inputs Yes No No No No Digital Video Recorders Yes No No No No Cameras Yes No No No No Intercom Exchanges Yes No No No No Intercom Stations Yes No No No No Analog Video Switcher Yes No No No No Intrusion Panels Yes No No No No Intrusion Areas Yes No No No No Intrusion Inputs Yes No No No No Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 445 Appendix D Facility Permissions Guard Supervisor Facility Perm
395. ssociate a symbol icon to a specific point follow these steps 1 Right click on the icon to display the Set Association button as shown in Figure 180 Unknown displays before the association is identified Set Association Door Access Point 01 NY COMPUTER ROOM 00 NY SHIPPING DOCK 01 NY CAFETERIA 00 NY LOBBY WEST ce akinAd Aone EA Figure 180 Set Association button AP 200300 NY LOBBY WEST Set Association 2 Click Set Association to display the window shown in Figure 181 Bet Association X Door Access Point AP 200101 NY COMPUTER ROOM AP 200200 NY SHIPPING DOCK AP 200201 NY CAFETERIA AP 200300 NY LOBBY WEST AP 200301 NY CONFERENCE ROOM AP 200400 NY LIBRARY AP 200401 NY TRAINING ROOM Save Cancel Figure 181 Set Association window 3 Use the list to select the access point that you want to associate with this symbol Click Save Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 309 Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays Continue to the next section if you are also defining cameras If not continue to Adding Text Labels to the Site Map on page 313 Associating Camera Devices Use this option to associate a symbol icon to specific cameras To associate a camera symbol to a specific camera follow these steps 1 Right click on the icon to display the Set Association button as shown in Figure 180 on page 309 2 Click Set Association to display the win
396. st name with the new host name Save the file and close the text editor Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 387 Chapter 19 Advanced Configuration Page 388 Editing the Client Properties File on a Client System gt To edit the client properties follow these steps 1 oo A WwW N On the taskbar click the Start button and then select Run The Run window displays Enter the following path Program Files FacilityCommanderClient lib resources This is the default directory unless a different directory was selected during the installation process Click OK Create a backup copy of the client properties file Open the original file using a text editor such as Notepad Locate the following line hostURL http host_name 8085 Merlin servlet net casi app AppHttpServlet Replace host_name with the host name you want to use Save the file and close the text editor Editing the Picture Perfect Configuration File gt To update the Facility Commander Server host name on the Picture Perfect system follow these steps 1 2 Login as root and open a new terminal window Navigate to this directory cas db text Create a backup copy of the eifevtmgr cfg file Open the original file using a text editor Locate the following line http host_name Merlin servlet net casi AppHttpServlet Change the host name to the new host name Save the file and close t
397. stem No Run Configure No Diagnostics Alarm Colors No System Parameters No Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 459 Appendix E System Permissions Page 460 Facility Commander Administration Guide
398. stem controls and manages the components In this example there is only one Facility Commander Application server in the network Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 3 Chapter 1 Introduction e The Facility Commander sends a message to the Media server installed on the Facility Commander Application server to expect a connection from the client system The client system opens a TCP IP connection socket to the Media server with the server configuration to receive the video stream e The Media server sends compressed video from the associated DVR to the client workstations Using the Video Viewer application the operator is able to view the video stream from camera three Distributed video management Using a Facility Commander server with a Remote Media server this example describes the events when an operator from a remote location wants to view video In this example the Media server transmits the video from the camera device to the client application Figure 2 shows two sites that can be located anywhere in the same city or different cities Both sites have two DVRs four cameras and two client workstations Figure 2 Typical configuration with Remote Media server Access Control Facility Commander server server Media server i d Clients Site One DVR 1 Remote Media server wT vV Cam 1 Cam 2 DVR 2 Site Two Cam3 Cam4 Page 4 Facility Commander Administration Gu
399. stomer Support Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 423 Appendix C Error Messages Table 148 List of error numbers messages causes and actions Continued Message Causes Actions 00046 Camera linking or unlinking The system was unable to Click on the Digital Video failed Camera assigned to link the specified camera to Recorders menu item and another DVR input or DVR the specified DVR The most observe if the DVR you are deleted by another operator likely causes are that the trying to link cameras to still camera was linked to another exists DVR another operator If it does click on the Link deleted the DVR multiple Cameras link for the DVR and operators with configuration determine if the camera you delete permission are making were attempting to link is still system configuration changes available in an uncoordinated manner f it is retry the attempt to link or the database has the camera to the DVR If this inconsistent data message continues to occur examine the log file for evidence of uncoordinated changes to the system configuration inconsistent data in the database or a software problem and send the relevant information to Customer Support for assistance 00047 Preset number in use please When configuring a new or Specify a preset number not try another updating an existing preset in use for the camera If for a camera the operator necessary click on the specified a preset number Cancel
400. stration Guide Page xiii Page xiv Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 1 Introduction This chapter describes Facility Commander and its features including integrated video and video management Readers should familiarize themselves with this chapter before proceeding to other chapters in this document In this chapter Overview on page 2 Video management on page 3 Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 1 Chapter 1 Introduction Page 2 Overview Facility Commander is a security integration platform that provides integrated digital video analog video switchers intercom and intrusion with access control It interfaces with Picture Perfect which continues to perform all access control alarm and reporting tasks The main features of Facility Commander include a comprehensive alarm management system with direct access to graphical maps and video clips from the Alarm Monitor and a high level command and control interface to Digital Video Recorders DVRs and their connected cameras Configuring Facility Commander is accomplished using a Web browser such as Internet Explorer Operators select which facilities doors inputs and outputs they want to control from Facility Commander and import these records from the access control system The alarm events associated with these devices can be configured to perform any number of actions in Facility Commander For example if a door has a video camera monit
401. strator Before you log in an operator account must be created Refer to Adding Operators on page 60 Password Y Enter a valid password If you do not enter a password an error message is displayed Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 13 Chapter 2 Getting Started Logging In Using the Web Application The Facility Commander uses a Web browser application to configure network parameters for client to server communications and media devices such as cameras and DVRs add new or import existing operators from a Picture Perfect system and more Instructions Log into the system User Name l Type your user name and Reset Figure 6 Browser Interface Login page Table 3 on page 13 lists and describes the login fields Refer to Using the Web Browser Application on page 14 for more information about using the Web interface to configure Facility Commander Using the Web Browser Application The Facility Commander Web browser interface displays two types of pages a list page and a configuration page Refer to the following sections for a description of each e List Page Configuration Page on page 19 e Client Application Title Bars on page 21 e Customizing the Multi Viewer on page 25 Common elements on both pages include page name system messages navigation pane context page displays options and online help Page 14 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 2 Getting Started
402. sured internal clock drift msec e Max processing time to check all mailboxes msec Service Framework Diagnostics Instructions Search View Service Framework Diagnostics Y N Back to Diagnostics Home Page Reset Statistics Statistics Creation Time Mon Jun 28 11 26 24 EDT 2004 Statistic Value Peak delay through service framework receive queue for an event msec 30 Average delay through service framework receive queue for an event msec 3 232419702428084 Peak time that an event waited in a mailbox msec 70 Average time that an event waited in a mailbox msec 2 6683000000000003 Time to wait before processing a mailbox msec 50 Peak number of client mailboxes serviced at Minimum remote mailbox dispatch time msec o Maximum remote mailbox dispatch time msec Figure 243 Service Framework Diagnostics page Page 378 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 18 Viewing Diagnostics System Status Diagnostics Use the System Status Diagnostics page shown in Figure 244 to view the following statistics e Number of application servers e Facility Commander server e Number of remote media servers e Number of DVMRs e Number of client workstations e Number of managed proxy components System Status also identifies DVRs and client applications and reports the connectivity status The System Status Diagnostics page displays the date and time th
403. t Intercom Substation Busy Set Intercom Substation Disconnected Set Intercom Substation Call Button Event Action Subsystems Digital Video z Subsystem Actions Camera Preset with Video Tagging Destination NY Cam 100 z Preset NY Cam 100 PS 01 Set Intercom Substation Reset xi Figure 126 Configure Event Action Mapping page 3 Use the Event Source Type drop down list to select the access point or device Use the Event Sources list to select one or more event sources This list is populated with items based on the selected event source type Press the Ctrl key while selecting multiple items Use the Event Types By Condition list to select one or more event types and alarm conditions Press the Ctrl key while selecting multiple items Use the Subsystems drop down list to select Digital Video Select the appropriate action from the Subsystem Actions drop down list The selections include Camera Preset to move a camera to a preset position Camera Preset with Video Tagging to move a camera to a preset position and mark a video clip Video Tagging to mark a video clip that can be retrieved later for investigation Select a camera device from the Destination drop down list If the camera has preset positions another drop down list displays to select the preset positions Click Submit to save the record Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 183 Chapter 8 Event Act
404. t To change the settings follow these steps 1 Select System Diagnostics 2 Select Diagnostics Statistics The Diagnostics list page shown in Figure 234 displays 3 Click the Edit icon next to the component you want to change The Configure Diagnostics page shown in Figure 235 on page 370 displays Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 369 Chapter 18 Viewing Diagnostics Configure Diagnostics Instructions Edit Diagnostics Component Information Diagnostics Mode Disabled Log Interval seconds 160 Submit Cancel Figure 235 Diagnostics Edit page 4 Enter the information described in Table 138 to change the diagnostic settings 5 Click Submit to change the record Table 138 lists and describes the fields on the Diagnostic Edit page Table 138 Diagnostic fields and descriptions Field Name Description Diagnostics Mode Use the drop down list to select the appropriate mode Disabled or Enabled The default value is Disabled Log Interval in seconds Enter the number of seconds to wait before new information is written to the log The default value is 60 seconds Resetting Diagnostics Statistics gt To reset the statistics for any component follow these steps 1 Select System Diagnostics 2 Select Diagnostics Statistics The Diagnostics list page as shown in Figure 234 on page 369 displays 3 Click the View icon next to the component you want to change The
405. t number lt number gt specified in the page 430 client properties file is already in use 00072 Error in recording clip no video available page 430 00073 Alarm instructions currently unavailable page 430 00074 No hyperlink location defined page 431 00075 Error in saving display page 431 00076 Error in getting display from server page 431 00077 Error in getting symbol schemes from server page 431 00078 Error in getting palettes from server page 432 00079 Display not found in server page 432 00080 file name cannot contain any of the following page 432 characters V lt gt 00081 Error in uploading display page 433 00082 Error in uploading symbol scheme page 433 00083 Uploading aborted Files used in display not found page 433 00084 Error in removing resource page 434 00085 No domains found in system page 434 00086 Record delete failed due to dependency page 434 00087 Camera information not available The camera may page 435 have been deleted by another operator Page 412 Facility Commander Administration Guide Appendix C Error Messages Table 147 Error messages numbers and page number Continued Error Messages Page 00088 Missing initial state icon page 435 00089 License key does not exist or is invalid page 435 00090 Selected DXF file name does not match the original page 436 name Operation aborted 00091 Error importing AutoCad DXF drawings Operation page 436 aborted 0009
406. t the Advanced tab shown in Figure 93 and enter the information described in Table 52 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 52 DVR fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description User Name Enter a valid user name Password Enter the password to access the DVR This password is set on the DVR Confirm Password Enter the password again for confirmation Status Polling va Enter the number of seconds to wait before Interval seconds Facility Commander polls the DVR device The default value is five seconds Command Retry Y Enter the number of seconds to wait before Interval seconds trying to reconnect to the Facility Commander server The default value is 15 seconds Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 129 Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Alarms Tab Model Addresses Advanced Alarms l Facility DYR Communications Alarm DYR Health Fail Alarm v DYR Health Trouble Alarm v Disk Full Alarm Figure 94 Configure DVR Alarms tab 8 Select the Alarms tab shown in Figure 94 and enter the information described in Table 53 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages Table 53 DVR fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description DVR Use the drop down list to select the alarm that Communications will trigger when the system is unable Alarm to communicate wit
407. tate DGP Bypassed Set Reset DGP Offline Alarm Set Reset DGP Tamper Alarm Set Reset Main Power Failure Alarm Set Reset Intrusion Input Initial State Input Alarm Set Input Alarm Event Reset Input Bypassed Set Reset Input Tamper Set Reset Intrusion Keypad Initial State Intrusion Duress Alarm Set Reset Intrusion Keypad Bypassed Set Reset Intrusion Keypad Offline Set Reset Keypad Tamper Alarm Set Reset Intrusion Output Initial State No state attributes Intrusion Panel Initial State Duress Code Entered Alarm Set Reset Offline Alarm Set Reset Tamper Alarm Set Reset Monitor Initial State No state attributes Picture Perfect Initial State Digital Input Input Alarm Set Reset Tamper Picture Perfect Initial State Digital Output No state attributes Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 297 Chapter 14 Creating Symbol Schemes Table 126 Event Sources State Attributes and Conditions Continued Event Source State Attributes Conditions Picture Perfect Initial State Door Access Point Door Forced Alarm Set Reset Door Held Alarm Set Reset Door Prealarm Set Reset Invalid Badge Alarm Set Lost Badge Alarm Set Suspended Badge Alarm Set Unknown Badge Alarm Set Picture Perfect Initial State Logical Input Logical Input Alarm Set Reset Tamper Page 298 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays This chapter describe
408. tation Click Alarm Alert Enabled if the workstation should display the Alarm Alert Notification window when a new m occurs Workstation Information y Tag Name x Description General E Host Name x a Time Zone GMT 00 00 GMT GMT x C Alarm Alert Enabled C Auto video Popup Enabled Intercom Station v Buttons Figure 9 Browser Interface Configuration Page Table 5 lists and describes the elements of the configuration Web page Table 5 Web interface elements and descriptions Element Description Required Fields data entry If you do not enter the correct data in a required field an error message displays The field A blue asterisk displays next to fields that require a name title with the error changes to red and a red X displays next to the field Correct the entry and click Submit Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 19 Chapter 2 Getting Started Page 20 Table 5 Web interface elements and descriptions Element Description Page Name Displays the name of the current page Messages A message displays to confirm data was saved successfully for the newly created records Information displays in black text such as Login Successful Error Messages A message displays to notify the user that more information is needed to save the record An error message displays in red text with a number p
409. tems in the database e Tag names are short text labels used to identify items in the database The names must be unique and will be used system wide to identify this item Use standard ASCII characters to ensure the tag name is viewable in a Web browser regardless of the language fonts installed on Facility Commander e Descriptions are longer text labels used to describe the records in more detail e Reference IDs are used to associate a device to a blue print or wiring diagram Different items in the system can have the same reference ID Time Zones When importing records from a Picture Perfect system you can assign each one to a time zone representing its location Operators viewing alarm activity in multiple locations can see alarm activity in the configured time zone The Alarm Monitor and Event Monitor can be configured to display up to four time zone columns which are GMT indicates Greenwich Mean Time Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 4 Importing Records e Operator indicates the location of the operator and the default setting e Server indicates location of the server e Device indicates location of the device associated with the event The format is month day year hour minute and seconds mm dd yy hh mm ss For example 12 10 02 16 28 04 The date format may change depending on the operator s location Synchronize Records Sometimes an operator must change the record description
410. ter thirty seconds of inactivity the lock on the camera device is released so that another operator can use the camera and this message displays PTZ device has been released The messages display in the status bar Recorded Video Multiple operators can view recorded video simultaneously from the same DVR but the recorded video will be from the same time base When an operator is viewing recorded video click Play and the timeout is extended for an additional thirty seconds Note Some DVRs may not support independent playback Event Action Mapping Event Action Mapping contains two actions related to camera control Camera Preset and Camera Preset with Video Tagging These two actions take priority over any manual camera operation by an operator As soon as the camera preset action has occurred the operator can take control of the camera again Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 7 Using the Video Console Viewing Live Video gt To view live video follow these steps 1 Select a camera from the navigation pane and live video displays on the Video Console Or drag the camera icon to a pane in the Video Console to view live video To move a camera to a different preset position click the preset name in the navigation pane If you are unable to view video using the Video Console verify the DVR is set to Record mode If the camera has pan tilt zoom capabilities use the mouse to control the vie
411. the bar and slide to adjust the playback speed of recorded video The DVR playback speed can be adjusted by this method from minimum to maximum speed Stop Use this button to stop the video stream Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 161 Chapter 7 Using the Video Console Table 69 Video Console elements and descriptions Continued Element Description PTZ Camera Use the mouse to control the camera functions The cursor changes to Indicators a hand when you move the mouse over the video window e Use the left mouse button to control the pan and tilt functions Move the mouse up or down to tilt the camera Move the mouse left or right to pan the camera ty e Use the right mouse button or mouse scroll wheel to control the zoom functions Move the mouse up to zoom in larger image and down to zoom out smaller image Camera Indicators Indicates a fixed non PTZ camera im Facility Indicators Indicates a facility under which multiple devices can be grouped DVR Indicator Indicates the device is a DVR Offline Indicator Indicates the device is offline Right click on this icon and then select B Online to set the device online Comm Fail Indicator Indicates the device communication has failed Alarm Indicator Indicates the device is an alarm state Preset Indicators Displays this icon in the navigation pane when the camera has preset positions Select the preset position of the current camera
412. the camera the camera will move to this preset position Refer to Control Toolbar on page 209 for more information Use the drop down list to create the default action for the device When an operator uses the Control Toolbar this access pointed will be listed Refer to Control Toolbar on page 209 for more information Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 243 Chapter 12 Configuring Intercom Devices Alarms Tab General Monitoring Alarms Facility Intercom Substation Call Button Alarm Ad Figure 156 Configure Intercom Station Alarms tab 8 Select the Alarms tab as shown in Figure 156 and enter the information described in Table 96 Continue to the next tabbed page A check mark indicates a required field Table 96 Configure Intercom Station fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Intercom Use the drop down list to select the appropriate alarm Substation Call profile to generate when someone presses the intercom Button Alarm call button No alarm is generated if this is not selected Do not select this alarm if this is a master station record Page 244 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 12 Configuring Intercom Devices Facility Tab General Monitoring Alarms Facility Assigned to e Available Sample Permissions and Contexts Facility Sample Region Facility West Coast Region Figure 157 Configure Intercom Stations Facility tab
413. the digital video vendor s equipment These preset positions are then defined in Facility Commander so that an operator can control the camera s location Viewing Camera Preset Positions Use the Camera Preset page to view add edit copy or delete camera preset records gt To view the camera presets follow these steps 1 Select Device Management 2 Select Cameras The Cameras page displays 3 Select a camera in the list and click Presets which is a link to Camera Preset list page The Camera Presets page as shown in Figure 101 displays Camera Presets Instructions View edit add or delete camera presets Add Camera Preset 4Pagelofirb Goto B Go Items per Page fio z cos Oo Oo ale NY Cam 100 PS 01 NY Cam 100 1 iat NY Cam 100 Ps 02 NY Cam 100 2 at nY Cam 100 PS 03 NY Cam 100 3 at BB nY Cam 100 PS 04 NY Cam 100 4 Figure 101 Camera Presets page Page 138 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 6 Configuring Video Devices Adding Camera Preset Positions gt To configure the camera s preset positions follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then Cameras 2 Select a camera from the list to view the Configure Camera page 3 Select a PTZ Controller and Bus Address if not already selected Click Submit to return to the Cameras page You will now see a selection for Presets in the Presets column for that camera 4 Click Presets which
414. tified by their 5 digit error number and include an explanation of possible causes and suggested solutions An integral component of the user interface is a standard web browser Errors that may be encountered in accessing the server or constructing a response screen to display use the standard web browser reporting mechanism They are first in the table and do not have error numbers associated with them In some cases it may be necessary to examine the product log files to determine the cause of the failure If you are reading this document online click on one of the error messages in the list below to view the causes and actions Error Messages Page The page cannot be displayed page 414 Internal server error page 415 00001 Exceeded licensed quantity capacity is lt number gt page 415 lt number gt in use desired change is lt number gt 00002 Cannot release license resource capacity is page 415 lt number gt lt number gt in use desired change is lt number gt 00003 Licensing exception No details specified page 415 00004 License has expired page 416 00005 Subsystem lt name gt is not a licensed resource page 416 00006 Invalid parameter specified in license request page 416 subsystem is lt name gt quantity is lt number gt 00007 No license for subsystem lt name gt page 416 00008 Invalid license code page 416 00009 Error creating video player Cause lt text gt page 41
415. ting Alarm Colors ccccccecescceeceeeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeseieeeeeaeeee 197 Creating Alarm Instructions 0 ccccceccececeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 199 Creating Alarm Profiles cccccccceeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeeee 201 Adding an Alarm Profile ccc ececeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneaaees 202 Chapter 10 Using the Alarm Monitor cccssseeessseeeeeeees 205 OVEIVIGW Soest A E O A E E 206 Automatically Launch Video Console by Alarm Priority 206 PaE d E E E E EE N 207 Navigating the Alarm Monitor ccccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 208 Customizing the Alarm Monitor 0 cc ccccceeeeeeeeeeseteeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeetees 211 Changing Window Name and Contents cccceeeeeeeteeeeeneeeees 211 Display Multiple Time ZONES 0 0 eee eeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaees 212 Launch Video Automatically cceecsceeeeesneeeeeenneeeeeeenaeeeeeeaaas 214 Responding to AIAS sachent 215 Alarm Response Required aasssssesssssessssrreesrsnnessrennenennnnnenrennneennnnn 215 Chapter 11 Using the Event Monitor ccsssccsssseeeeseee 219 OVEIVICW virusni eiiean todos divin ai aa ahi edie dante ee 220 Page iv Facility Commander Administration Guide Navigating the Event Monitor 00 0 eececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaaes 220 Alarmi Events LiSt i c cicicdecivescesessitee acess iadesasiecateeieateenaces 223 Badge Events
416. ting AutoCAD Drawings on page 314 for instructions To achieve the best results in your site map draw the map as close to the size of the window in which it will be displayed If you are importing a JPG or GIF graphic image file try to size the image to fit the window in which it will be displayed Whenever possible be consistent and keep all of your displays the same size gt To open the Graphics Editor follow these steps 1 From the Facility Commander Launcher window select Launch and Graphics Editor or select the Graphics Editor icon from the Editors toolbar 2 The Graphics Editor shown in Figure 177 on page 302 window displays Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 301 Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays Font Toolbar Title Bar p Drawing Tools IRVING STREET PARNASSUS AVENUE pal f 7 B e AIN ola Create New Image Entry _ gt Hyperlink lcon _p Create Hyperlink Area gt Device Palette Status Bar p gt SES Figure 177 Graphics Editor window Table 128 lists and describes the Graphics Editor icons and tooltips Table 128 Graphics Editor icons tooltips and descriptions Element Description Title Bar Displays the program name and window instance number Refer to Client Application Title Bars on page 21 for more information Font Toolbar Use the drop down lists to s
417. ting RSA private key 512 bit long modulus EEEE E E t t 65 A E acer a eee tttttttttttt e is 65537 0x10001 Enter PEM pass phrase lt password gt Verifying password Enter PEM pass phrase lt password gt Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 391 Chapter 19 Advanced Configuration Generating Picture Perfect Certificate Request The next step is to generate a Picture Perfect certificate request from the Picture Perfect key Use the openssl command to generate the certificate request used by the Facility Commander server You are required to supply the password used from the previous openssl command The command prompts for several fields from the certificate The important field during this activity is the Common Name field This must be the host name of the Picture Perfect system If this is not correct then the Facility Commander will not be able to use the proper certificate when Picture Perfect attempts to communicate openssl req new key picture key out picture csr Using configuration from usr share ssl openssl cnf Enter PEM pass phrase lt password gt You are about to be asked to enter information that will be incorporated into your certificate request What you are about to enter is what is called a Distinguished Name or a DN There are quite a few fields but you can leave some blank For some fields there will be a default value If you enter the field will be left blank
418. tion Server Connection Displays an icon indicating if the system with the Alarm Indicator Monitor is connected to the Facility Commander server e Green indicates the system is communicating with the server e Red indicates the system is no longer communicating with the Facility Commander server Customizing the Alarm Monitor The Alarm Monitor displays a window title multiple time zones and can be configured to automatically launch a Video Console For more information refer to the following sections Changing Window Name and Contents e Display Multiple Time Zones e Launch Video Automatically on page 214 Changing Window Name and Contents Use the Window Filter shown in Figure 137 to modify the current display of items in the navigation pane allowing an operator to view specific records such as those from New York and not from Boston or Chicago When an operator does not have permission to modify the items in the window filter the items are disabled The operator is able to view the items displayed in the window but not able to make any selections gt To filter items from view in the client applications follow these steps 1 From the View menu select Window Filter The Window Filter Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 211 Chapter 10 Using the Alarm Monitor window in Figure 137 displays Window Filter Custom Title Boca Raton FL Facility Facilities E system Administrator
419. tness Use the slider to indicate the brightness of the line and fill color 100 is the brightest Blinking Select this check box if you want the area to blink when itis in an alarm state Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 293 Chapter 14 Creating Symbol Schemes Page 294 Managing Symbol Editor Files Symbol schemes are stored on the local system until they are uploaded to the server system for centralized storage and backup Once the files are uploaded they are available to use with the Graphics Editor to create site maps and associate symbols After a symbol scheme has been uploaded to the server system if you need to modify the symbol scheme make sure you download the most current version before making changes Refer to the following sections for more information e Uploading a Symbol Scheme e Downloading a Symbol Scheme on page 294 e Deleting a Symbol Scheme on page 295 Uploading a Symbol Scheme gt To upload a symbol scheme to the Facility Commander server follow these steps 1 From the Symbol Schemes column select the scheme name you want to upload to the server 2 Select File and then Upload or select the Upload icon form the toolbar A window with this message displays Are you sure you want to upload current scheme Ifthe scheme has already been uploaded to the server this message displays Are you sure you want to overwrite the server symbol scheme file name 3 Click Ye
420. to the selected layer To view all the items on the active layer select the Edit menu and then Select All All the items on this layer are highlighted Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 317 Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays Linking Graphic Displays Using the Create Hyperlink icon in the Graphics Editor application you can link two displays together You can replace the hyperlink icon with another icon or graphical image When an alarm event is generated the Graphics Viewer opens and displays the specified graphic display To link another site map select the hyperlink symbol and the linked graphic display appears in the same Graphics Viewer window or a new window Refer to the illustration shown in Figure 191 aas PS alaiz Window file Eat Placement Jranstorm Rimes Zoom Layer Help DSU p Gems v bi a A z i i a a A Ge Si 1G B i a nag Olt Tlie o Oslin O NY Floor 01 fll ill NY Floor 02 ketene Layers A Click the hyperlink symbol to display the associated map or graphic display NY Floor 01 is linked to NY Floor 02 Figure 191 Hyperlink icon and associated graphic display gt To link graphic displays to each other follow these steps 1 From the Facility Commander Launcher window select Launch and Graphics Editor The Graphics Editor shown in Figure 177 on page 302 displays 2 Click File and then Open 3 Select the map file you want to use T
421. tor to verify that the device The system could not device being logged in from is determine that the login was qualified for use Examine the attempted from a web system log file to determine if browser or from the client log in attempts are being Workspace application This made from unauthorized message could indicate that sources indicating that a an operator is attempting log security breach is being in from a non qualified device attempted If necessary or that a security breach is contact Customer Support for being attempted assistance 00057 Re enter the user name and Specified user name not valid The user name entered by the operator has not been defined on the server The operator may have mistyped the user name or a security breach may have been attempted try to log in Examine the system log file to determine if log in attempts are being made from unauthorized sources indicating that a security breach is being attempted If necessary contact Customer Support for assistance Page 426 Facility Commander Administration Guide Appendix C Error Messages Table 148 List of error numbers messages causes and actions Continued Message Causes Actions 00058 Context information not available for specified user name Indicates a database inconsistency or a software problem An operator record was located for the operator that is attempting to log in but the context specified in the
422. u The window shown in Figure 211 displays with the tag name and a list of actions available to the operator lf the camera is not in an alarm state Right click the symbol to display the action menu Select Display in Monitor and then select the monitor device to play the video The Control Panel displays when the device is not in an alarm state Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 343 Chapter 16 Viewing Graphic Displays Enable or Disable Input Devices gt To enable or disable input devices follow these steps 1 Select the graphic display Refer to Opening Graphic Displays on page 338 2 Locate the symbol representing the device If the device is in an alarm state Double click the symbol to launch the Alarm Response window as shown in Responding to Alarms on page 215 displays Right click the symbol to display the action menu The window shown in Figure 212 displays with the tag name and a list of actions available to the operator If the device is not in an alarm state Right click the symbol to display the action menu The Control Toolbar displays when the device is not in an alarm state DI 200116 NY FIRE ALARM 1 Monito x Enabled Disabled Execute Cancel Figure 212 Monitor window 3 Select the appropriate option button and click Execute to perform the selected action The actions are described in Table 136 Table 136 Monitor window Option Descriptio
423. uard level permissions that range from supervisory monitoring and command capabilities to a more limited definition suitable for a beginner operator guard These include e Guard Supervisor Context Intermediate Guard Context e Entry Level Context Viewing Context Definitions Use the Context page to view add edit copy or delete context records gt To view the context definitions follow these steps 1 Select Operator Administration 2 Select Contexts The Contexts page as shown in Figure 84 displays Search Go Instructions View edit add or delete contexts Click to add context _ gt n Page 1of1 Goto F Go Items per Page psx e a SSN iA Entry Level Guard Context Entry level command and control responsibilities Th ein Seay aie J MR evel Sant Hl aad Epes A Intermediate Guard Context Intermediate level command and control responsibilities fA Regional Administrator Context Regional system control fA System Administrator Context Full system control Figure 84 Contexts page Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 113 Chapter 5 Assigning Permissions and Context Adding Context Definitions gt To add the context definitions follow these steps 1 Click Add Context The Define Context page as shown in Figure 85 displays Define Context Instructions View or edit the context Select the facility permission for each facility to be included in the co
424. ub panel that is part of the ATS Intrusion system The main intrusion panel controls the DGP An intrusion sensor such as a motion detector and glass break detector Also called point or zone Inputs are wired to a panel Keypad A device used by the operator to control an intrusion panel Use the keypad to arm and disarm areas Output A relay device is used to control a light or siren Panel A panel controls one or more areas In this release only the ATS 4017 Intrusion Panel is supported Page 250 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Configuring Intrusion Devices Refer to the checklist below for the configuration order to implement the intrusion feature in Facility Commander Y Connect Facility Commander server to the Tecom ATS 4017 Panel with the RS 232 internal communications board Refer to Connecting Intrusion Panels on page 251 Configure the intrusion panel Refer to Configuring Intrusion Panels on page 254 Configure the intrusion area for each area defined in the panel Refer to Configuring Intrusion Keypads on page 266 page Configure the intrusion input defined for each panel Refer to Configuring Intrusion Inputs on page 276 Connecting Intrusion Panels Facility Commander supports both Ethernet connections and RS 232 connections to the AL 4017 Intrusion Panel Refer to Ethernet Connection e RS amp 232 Connection on
425. uded are instructions to upload and download files Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays on page 299 describes how to use the Symbol Editor and Graphic Editor to associate icons representing devices with graphical displays or site maps Chapter 16 Viewing Graphic Displays on page 333 describes how to use the Graphics Viewer display different layers and issue commands such as locking and unlocking doors Chapter 17 Backup Restore Informix Databases on page 349 describes the information needed to backup restore Informix databases Chapter 18 Viewing Diagnostics on page 367 describes the information needed to monitor the system Chapter 19 Advanced Configuration on page 381 provides advanced system configuration information Appendix A on page 401 lists configuration files for Informix backup Appendix B on page 405 lists miscellaneous problems and describes the causes and appropriate actions Facility Commander Administration Guide e Appendix C on page 409 lists Facility Commander error messages and suggestions to resolve the errors e Appendix D on page 441 lists facility permission configurations for this application e Appendix E on page 455 lists permission configurations for each Facility Commander component Using This Document This document is available in portable document format PDF The PDF document has been designed for online interactive viewing with Adobe Acrobat Reader The Acrobat Reader i
426. ue is not within the range The operator entered a value Enter a number within the 0 number integer to 1 that was not within the specified range number integer specified range of numbers 00095 Enter a valid numeric range The operator entered an The range specification such as 1 100 or 1 20 25 30 invalid numeric range entered by the operator may 50 specification not be valid for a number of reasons The information entered must follow these rules e No spaces are allowed when entering a range of numbers e Semicolons must be used to separate number range specifications The number range specifications must be in increasing numerical order 00096 The numeric range entered Each number or range must Range numbers must be in numeric sequence such as 1 5 50 60 70 by the operator was not in an increasing numeric sequence be greater than the previous number or range The entire sequence of numbers and ranges must be in increasing numerical order Page 436 Facility Commander Administration Guide Appendix C Error Messages Table 148 List of error numbers messages causes and actions Continued Message Causes Actions 00097 Value must contain only The operator entered a Enter characters that consist numeric digits sequence of characters that only of the digits 0 through 9 contained digits other than 0 through 9 00098 Intercom extension or The intercom extension or S
427. urrently logged in server time and the Facility Commander version number Click Logout to exit from the system e Click the Administration Guide link to display this book Refer to Using This Document on page xi for more information e Click the Help link to display the Facility Commander online help system Page Name Displays the name of the current page Messages Displays system messages to confirm successful entries or identifies errors in the configuration Page Display Options Displays the page number and the number of items listed on the page e Use the Previous and Next arrows to move between the pages when there are multiple pages e Or type the page number in the text box and click Enter to display a specific page Use the Items per Page text box to indicate how many items you would like to view on one page Search Enter text in the Search field and click Go Using this sample text Boca as our search text use one of the text formats listed below e Beginning match BOCA returns all records that begin with Boca End match BOCA returns all records that end in Boca e Any match BOCA returns all records that contain the string BOCA anywhere in the field e Exact match BOCA returns any record that is an exact match Browser Menu Select any entry in the navigation pane to display the appropriate Browser page Refer to Browser Menu on page 18 for more information
428. usion DGP and the Configure Intrusion DGP page as shown in Figure 169 displays Configure Intrusion DGP Instructions View or edit the intrusion DGP Intrusion DGP Information Tag Name DGP 10 Description Computer Lab Reference ID General Alarms Facility Intrusion Panel ATS Panel z DGP Number fio Submit Cancel Figure 169 Configure Intrusion DGP page Table 105 Configure Intrusion DGP fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Tag Name Y Enter a unique name to identify this item Use 2 36 characters Description Enter a description for this item Use 1 100 characters The description does not have to be unique Reference ID Enter a name to associate this item to a blue print or wiring diagram Use 1 20 characters Page 262 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices General Tab Alarms Facility Intrusion Panel Intrusion Panel v DGP Number 10 Figure 170 Configure Intrusion DGP General tab 3 Select the General tab as shown in Figure 170 Enter the information described in Table 106 A check mark indicates a required field 4 Click Submit to save the record Table 106 Configure Intrusion DGP fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Intrusion Panel Y Use the drop down list to select the appropriate intrusion panel to use with this DGP DGP Numbe
429. ut list page displays the imported items from the Picture Perfect server Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 93 Chapter 4 Importing Records Editing Digital Outputs Edit each digital output to assign a time zone or to specify which site plan displays in the Graphics Viewer when an alarm event occurs gt To make changes to a digital output follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then Digital Outputs The Digital Outputs list page displays 2 Locate the digital output you want to edit and select the link The Digital Outputs page in Figure 68 displays Configure Digital Output Instructions View or edit the digital output Digital Output Information Tag Name Do 200116 NY FIRE SOUNDER Description Do 200116 NY FIRE SOUNDER Reference ID General ACTA Graphic Display NY Floor 02 z Time Zone GMT 05 00 EST EST Cancel Figure 68 Configure Digital Output 3 Enter the information described Table 40 on page 94 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to enter information on the tabbed pages 4 Click Submit to save the record Table 40 Configure Digital Output fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Tag Name Y Enter a unique name to identify this item Use 2 36 characters Description Enter a description for this item Use 1 100 characters The description does not have to be unique Reference ID Enter a name to
430. utputs follow these steps 1 Select Device Management 2 Select Logical Inputs The Logical Inputs page as shown in Figure 60 displays The Output record imported from the Picture Perfect system displays in the Tag Name field with DO prepended to the name Digital Outputs search Instructions Import synchronize view edit or delete digital outputs 4Pagelofib Go to Go Items per Page 30 7 pictureofjamie z Import Synchronize i i DO 200116 NY FIRE SOUNDER DO 200116 NY FIRE SOUNDER pictureofjamie Figure 66 Digital Output page Importing Digital Outputs gt To import digital outputs follow these steps 1 Select Device Management and then Digital Outputs The Digital Outputs page displays 2 Use the Server drop down list to select the Picture Perfect server with the records you want to input Page 92 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 4 Importing Records 3 Click Import The Import page as shown Figure 67 displays Instructions Choose from the available entries and click Import Time Zone GMT 05 00 EST EST 7 Available DO 200116 NY FIRE SOUNDER Import Figure 67 Import page 4 Use the Time Zone drop down list to select the time zone where this device is located 5 Select the digital outputs you want to import Use the Shift key to select all the records or the Ctrl key to make multiple selections from the list 6 Click Import The Digital Outp
431. values that problem persists the System may be selected to a range of Administrator should examine valid values This error may the system log file for indicate an attempt to bypass evidence of an attempted the normal user interface security breach or software mechanisms could be problem and send the indicative of an attempted relevant information to security breach or a software Customer Support for problem assistance 00064 Page number not valid The value entered in the box The operator should enter a to the left of the Go button valid numeric value within the was not a number range of the page numbers shown on the screen If the problem persists contact Customer Support for assistance 00065 Page request not valid The value entered in the box The operator should enter a to the left of the Go button valid numeric value within the was not within range of the range of the page numbers available page numbers as shown on the screen If the shown on the screen problem persists contact Customer Support for assistance 00066 This client is currently offline The Facility Commander If the color of the connection Page 428 request cannot be executed client software cannot currently communicate with the server The operator tried to perform an action that requires communication with the server This can be caused either by the server being down or due to a lost connection with the client PC Facility Commander Administration
432. vent occurs within a specified priority range an operator response will be required If a priority range is not specified alarms can be acknowledged without entering a response in the Alarm Response window Configure Video Pre Play Time The Video Pre Play Time feature allows you to see activities that occurred immediately before the alarm event You can specify the number of seconds to start playing a video clip before the actual clip time The range is from O to 60 seconds The number of seconds is subtracted from the actual video start time and playback occurs the number of seconds earlier than the actual alarm event For example an event action mapping definition for a forced door alarm includes video tagging The Video Pre Play time is set for 15 seconds If the alarm event occurs at 10 21 30 AM you can view the recorded video starting at 10 21 15 AM fifteen seconds before the alarm event occurred Page 50 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 3 Configuring the System Configuring System Parameters gt To make changes follow these steps 1 Select System Administration and then System Parameters The Configure System Parameters page shown in Figure 33 displays Configure System Parameters Instructions View or edit system parameters Parameters System Default Locale Bag English in the United States Operator Idle Timeout minutes 60 4uto Alarm Video Popup Priority Range Ala
433. vers verify that the SSL password settings are correct between the two systems Page 406 Facility Commander Administration Guide Appendix B Troubleshooting Information Table 146 List of Common Problems with Possible Causes and Solutions Problem Possible Causes and Solutions All Client Applications Client applications do not remember their size and position correctly This problem is usually caused by the ATI HydraVision software that has the Application position memory option turned on Perform the steps below to turn this option off 1 Right click on the ATI icon in the Windows task bar area to activate the ATI HydraVision Utility menu 2 Select the Desktop Manager Configuration item from the HydraVision menu 3 Clear the Application position memory check box and click OK to save the change Alarm and Event Monitors Alarms and events from Picture Perfect are not received even though the data import was successful 1 On the Picture Perfect server verify that the URL address of the Facility Commander server is correct in the cas db text eifevtmgr cfg file Picture Perfect tps will need to be restarted after this file is changed 2 Verify proper network communications between the Facility Commander and Picture Perfect servers Remember to verify that the DNS Domain Name Server is providing correct translation of host names to IP addresses when dynamic IP a
434. view a single frame Continue to click to move the video backward one frame at a time Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 165 Chapter 7 Using the Video Console Create an Evidence CD Investigators and other operators may need to provide recorded video from a certain date and time on CD or DVD The Video Console allows an operator to create an evidence CD from a recorded video file To create an evidence CD follow these steps 1 Place a blank CD or DVD into your disc drive 2 From the File menu in the Video Console select Create Evidence CD The Create Evidence CD dialog displays 3 Click the Add button to select one or more files from the list and then click Open 4 The selected files appear in the Create Evidence CD dialog 5 The files can be written to windows default CD burning directory or a directory of your choice a Select the Windows CD Burning radio button and click Create to burn an evidence CD using Windows CD Burning directory b Select the Directory radio button and then the button to choose a directory to write the evidence file and then click the Create button A Windows Explorer view of the files will appear You can drag the contents of this directory to the CD burning software of your choice to burn the evidence file to CD Once the CD has been created you can use it to play the videos on any other Windows PC If the player does not start automatically you can start it manu
435. vironment and then Preferences The Set Operator Preferences page displays Set Operator Preferences Instructions View or edit the operator preferences Preferences Operator Locale k English in the United States Items per Page 415 Cancel Figure 41 Set Operator Preferences 2 Use the Operator Locale drop down list to select the language for the workstation 3 Enter the number of items to display at one time on the Facility Commander list pages in the Items Per Page field This becomes the operator s default setting The number of items can be changed anytime on the list page 4 Click Submit to save the record Page 66 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 4 Importing Records Facilities The Facility Commander facility feature is similar to Picture Perfect but offers even more flexibility Facilities are not limited to physical items or locations but now include logical groupings based on operational strategy The facilities feature partitions the Facility Commander database into logical segments or groupings As a result of partitioning the database operators assigned to a specific facility might be only permitted to view and control the items associated with only that facility and not others When creating facilities in Facility Commander consider A facility can be a member of only one other facility at a given time which means a facility can only have one parent Alloth
436. vtmgr cfg eifevtmgr cfg bak The following properties need to be configured correctly to support SSL URL PORT RANDOM CERTIFICATE SSL_PASSWORD e The URL is modified to use the https protocol The non secure PORT 8085 is commented out and the secure PORT is uncommented to use 8443 e The RANDOM and CERTIFICATE properties are not commented to use the values from the examples e The SSL_PASSWORD is the same password used to generate the Picture Perfect keys The following shows the original and the modified copy of the configuration file Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 393 Chapter 19 Advanced Configuration Page 394 Table 142 EIF Event Manager Configuration File Original File SSL Enabled Modified File SSL Enabled Copyright C 2002 GE Interlogix All Rights Reserved eifevtmgr cfg eifevtmgr cfg 1 0 12 12 02 Supported Property Examples URL http hostname facilitycommander servlet net casi app AppHttpServlet PORT 8085 Default SSL port PORT 8443 KEEP_ALIVE FALSE MESSAGE_TRACE TRUE RESEND_BUFFER_SIZE 256 RANDOM cas db text random pem CERTIFICATE cas db text server cer URL http bctrenegade FacilityCommander servlet net casi app AppHttpServlet PORT 8085 SSL Default Port PORT 8443 KEEP_ALIVE TRUE KEEP_ALIVE FALSE RANDOM cas db text random pem CERTIFICATE cas db text server cer MESSAGE_TR
437. w these steps 1 Select System Administration 2 Select Access Control Systems The Access Control Systems page as shown in Figure 21 displays Access Control Systems Instructions Search Go view edit add or delete access control systems that will communicate with Facility Commander Add Access Control System 4Pagelofib Goto Go Items per Page is z Thy E pictureofjamie Facility Commander Server i PP_NY Picture Perfect New York Facility Commander Server Figure 21 Access Control Systems page Page 38 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 3 Configuring the System Adding an Access Control System gt To add a Picture Perfect system follow these steps 1 Select System Administration and then Access Control Systems The Access Control Systems list page displays 2 Click Add Access Control System The Configure Access Control System page as shown in Figure 22 displays Configure Access Control System Instructions View or edit the access control system Access Control System Information Tag Name Description pee o ooo Reference ID External System Advanced Alarms Facility Addresses Host Name Access Control System Port e088 Time Zone GMT 00 00 GMT GMT es Facility Commander Server Facility Commander Server z M Enabled Cancel Figure 22 Configure Access Control Systems page 3 Enter the informat
438. will assigned to another DVR be redisplayed and the device If the camera is still camera inputs where the link available try the link operation failed will be flagged with an again If the problem persists X The reason for the link it may indicate a database failure is shown when the inconsistency or a software mouse is placed over the X problem Examine the system log file for evidence of a software problem and send the relevant information to Customer Support for assistance 00088 Missing initial state icon The symbol file that the Restore the missing image operator requested to upload file and retry the operation If to the server references an the problem persists contact image file to display for the the System Administrator to initial state of an item that examine the client and server could not be found The log files to determine the image file for the initial state problem of an item is a required component of a symbol This can occur if the image file was referenced across the network and is not accessible at the current time or if the image file was located on the workstation but was manually deleted after the symbol was created 00089 The license key file Verify that the license xml file License key does not exist or is invalid license xml is not present in the correct location or was generated using a machine code from a different computer is present in the correct location the installation path plus server
439. window title path name or access point and alarm type alarm Monitor 1 alarm Monitor 2 g Graphics Yiewer 1 2 Eo Graphics Editor 1 c displays working default jix amp Alarm Response 200100 NY LOBBY SOUTH Door Forced Figure 10 Title bars with window numbers and other information Figure 10 shows different title bars from several client applications windows The information shown on the title bar depends on the application such as e The Alarm Monitor and Event Monitor display a window number and if configured to do so a window title Each time you open another Alarm Monitor or Event Monitor another window number displays indicating the window sequence such as 1 2 3 and so on The custom window title displays only on the window where it was created e The Graphics Viewer displays the window number file name and a custom window title if configured to do so e If you open the Graphics Viewer from an icon on the Alarm Monitor the Graphics Viewer displays two window numbers such as 1 1 1 2 and 2 1 and so on The first number matches the Alarm Monitor window and the second number indicates the window sequence e The Video Console displays the window number and custom window title if configured to do so An operator can open four different Video Consoles position them and create custom titles for each window The next time these four Video Consoles are launched the will return to the s
440. wing area Use the right mouse button or mouse scroll wheel to zoom Right click and move the mouse up or down to zoom in or out or move the mouse scroll wheel forward or backward Use the left mouse button to pan Left click and move the mouse in any direction to view video for a specific area To change to a different camera view select a camera or preset position from the navigation pane The Video Console displays video from the selected device Viewing Recorded Video gt To view recorded video follow these steps 1 From the File menu in the Video Console select Play Video Clip The Open dialog displays 2 Select a file from the list and click Open The selected file opens in a new window 3 Use the slider bar or control buttons to pause stop fast forward or rewind the video clip View a Single Video Frame The Video Console permits an operator to view recorded video frame by frame Refer to Contro Buttons on page 161 to view each button To view a single video frame follow these steps 1 Select the Video Console pane and select the camera from the navigation pane Use the control buttons to navigate to the portion of the clip you want to review Click Forward Pause to view a single frame Continue to click to move the video forward one frame at a time Each click pauses the video for 30 seconds After 30 seconds the video automatically resumes Click Reverse Pause to
441. x to display the Attribute Panel window Select the attributes that you want to apply such as color pattern line and brightness The selection displays in the Samples pane This image displays on the map when an alarm is generated Page 292 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 14 Creating Symbol Schemes and the state condition changes The Active check box displays a check mark indicating this image has been associated with the alarm state condition 10 Click Save when you are finished If you want to create a symbol scheme for another intrusion area click New to clear the information and continue making new selections Table 125 lists and describes the elements in the Graphic Attributes window Table 125 Graphic Attributes elements and description Element Description Line Color Click Line Color to display the Edit Line Color palette Select a line color and click OK Fill Color Click Fill Color to display the Fill Line Color palette Select a fill color and click OK Pattern Click to display the fill color in the drawn image or a Transparency shape drawn with the Create Hyperlink Area tool lt a Click to remove the fill color When you remove the fill color only the pattern displays with a white background Patterns Click to apply a pattern to the image Use Line Color to select a color for the pattern Line Styles Select the line type such as solid dotted or arrows Brigh
442. y Sample Region Facility Figure 151 Configure Intercom Exchanges Facility tab 9 Select the Facility tab as shown in Figure 151 and enter the information described in Table 92 A check mark indicates a required field Table 92 Configure Intercom Exchange fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Assigned to Items can belong to more than one facility This is a read only field and cannot be edited Available va Use to assign or change the facility membership for this item The facilities that display in this list depend on the operator s context and permissions e To assign the item to more than one facility select the first facility and press the Ctrl key while selecting the other facilities The selected facilities are highlighted Click Submit e If this item is already assigned to a facility listed in the Assigned To list press the Ctrl key before selecting the new facility assignment e To assign the item to all the listed facilities select the first facility in the list press the Shift key and select the last facility in the list All the facilities are highlighted Click Submit Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 239 Chapter 12 Configuring Intercom Devices Configuring Intercom Stations Use the Intercom Stations page to add edit copy and delete intercom station records Refer to the following sections for more information e Viewing Intercom Stations e Adding Intercom Stat
443. y Commander Administration Guide Page 201 Chapter 9 Configuring Alarms Page 202 Adding an Alarm Profile gt To add an alarm profile follow these steps 1 Click Add Alarm Profile on the Alarm Profiles page The Define Alarm Profile page shown in Figure 134 displays Define Alarm Profile Instructions View or edit the alarm profile Select the instructions to be displayed in the alarm response window Alarm Profile Information Tag Name Emergency Procedures Description Use when emergency occurs inside building Priority 50 Alarm Instructions Available Instructions Selected Instructions Call 911 call supervisor Call the fire department Dispatch all guards Evacuate Building Notify system adminstrator Add All Remove Remove All t4 Submit Cancel Figure 134 Define Alarm Profile 2 Enter the information described in described in Table 77 A check mark indicates a required field 3 Click Submit to save the record Table 77 on page 203 lists and describes the fields in the Define Alarm Profile page A check mark indicates a required field Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 9 Configuring Alarms Table 77 Define Alarm Profile fields and descriptions Element REQ Description Tag Name Y Enter a unique name to identify this profile Use 2 36 characters Description Enter a description for this item Use 1 100 characters The descri
444. y Commander and the intrusion panel Encryption Key Windows only Obtain the encryption key from the vendor s web site The format is 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 There are 16 groups of three numbers separated by a hyphen The range of numbers is from 000 to 255 If the number 2 is given as part of the encryption key you must enter 002 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 13 Configuring Intrusion Devices Alarms Tab Model Addresses Advanced Alarms Facility Intrusion Panel Duress Code Entered Alarm v Intrusion Panel Main Power Failure Alarm Intrusion Panel Offline Alarm Intrusion Siren Monitor Failure Alarm Intrusion Panel Tamper Alarm Figure 166 Intrusion Panel Alarms tab 8 Select the Alarms tab as shown in Figure 163 and enter the information described in Table 103 A check mark indicates a required field Continue to the next tabbed page Table 103 Configure Intrusion Panel fields and descriptions Field Name REQ Description Intrusion Panel Use the drop down list to select the appropriate alarm Duress Code profile to use when a duress code has been entered Entered Alarm Intrusion Panel Use the drop down list to select the appropriate alarm Main Power Failure profile to use when the intrusion panel main power Alarm fails Intrusion Panel Use the drop down list to select the appropriate alarm
445. y Permissions System Administrator All System Permissions All Facility Permissions for Global Facility Other Pre defined System Permissions Other Pre defined Facility Permissions No System Permissions No Facility Permissions View Configuration Facility Permissions Update Configuration Facility Permissions Regional Administrator All System Permissions All Facility Permissions for Sample Region Facility Sample Permissions and Context Guard Supervisor Guard Supervisor System Permissions Guard Supervisor Facility Permissions Intermediate Guard Intermediate Guard System Permissions Guard Supervisor Facility Permissions Entry Level Guard Entry Level Guard System Permissions Entry Level Guard Facility Permissions Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 117 Chapter 5 Assigning Permissions and Context Page 118 Examples Facility Commander provides the flexibility to build relationships by creating parent facilities and sub facilities Each facility can be a member of one other facility An item can belong to more than one facility In the illustration in Figure 88 facilities in different geographic locations are used to show the relationship between facilities These facilities will be used later to build contexts Figure 88 Two regional facilities and four imported facilities The imported Picture Perfect facilities are e Los Angel
446. yer from your display follow these steps 1 From the Layer menu select Remove Layer The Select Layer window in Figure 199 displays with a drop down list Select Layer x Select layer to remove Doors v Figure 199 Select layer window 2 Use the drop down list to select the layer you want to remove from the drawing 3 Click OK Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 325 Chapter 15 Creating Graphic Displays Moving Objects Between Layers When you are working with multiple layers you may want to rearrange the objects by moving them to another layer First select the object you want to move and then follow these instructions gt To move an object to a different layer follow these steps 1 From the Layer menu select Move Selected Objects The Select Layer window as shown in Figure 200 displays Fr Select destination layer Layer 0 v Figure 200 Select Layer window 2 Use the drop down list to select the correct destination layer This is the location where the object will be moved 3 Click OK Managing Graphic Display Files Graphic displays are stored on the local system until they are uploaded to the server system for centralized storage and backup Once the files are uploaded they are available to use with the Graphics Viewer to view site maps and associated icons when an alarm event occurs When working with symbol schemes use Download to make sure you are worki
447. you want to view The camera preset positions display in alphabetical order under their associated camera in the navigation pane This option displays in Live mode only Page 162 Facility Commander Administration Guide Chapter 7 Using the Video Console Table 69 Video Console elements and descriptions Continued Element Status Bar Description Quick Playback menu Mode Right click on the Status Bar to view the Quick Playback menu e View Live Click to toggle from Record mode to Live mode e Playback Click to toggle from Live mode to Record mode You can select to playback from 15 seconds to 5 minutes of the last recorded video e System Events Displays the last four system events e Focus Near Select to change the camera focus to the foreground Select again until the focus is satisfactory e Focus Far Select to change the camera focus to the background Select again until the focus is satisfactory e Iris Open Select to increase the amount of light Select again to increase in increments until the lighting is satisfactory e Iris Close Select to decrease the amount of light Select again to decrease in increments until the lighting is satisfactory Displays Live mode or Recorded mode Date Time Camera Selection Displays the current date and time when you are in Live mode When you are in Recorded mode the date and time of the video event display This is the DVR s time zone Identif
448. yping x nine times to remove the previous entry Change to an input mode i Add new entry bud BackupUtility db_backup cpio Exit editor and save changes Esc x Enter View file to confirm changes cat onconfig Enter Facility Commander Administration Guide Page 403 Appendix A Edit Configuration Files for Informix Backup to Disk Scheduling the Backup Utility The backup utility can be launched by setting the task to run on a regular schedule or by manually running the task Create a Cron Task gt Torun the task on a schedule follow these steps 1 Use the vi text editor to edit the configuration file Type crontab e Enter 2 Type i to enter the input mode of the text editor 3 Use the arrow keys to position the cursor at the end of the last line displayed Press Enter to create a newline 4 Type 30 2 usr BackupUtility BackupUtility B This line represents the command used to schedule this task at 2 30 am each day The variables are minute hour day of month month day of week and command Use an asterisk to indicate all days or months Exit the editor and save the changes Type Esc x Enter 5 View the scheduled tasks Type crontab 1 Enter Launch the Script Manually gt Torun the task manually follow these steps 1 Type cd usr BackupUtility Enter 2 Type sh BackupUtility Enter OR 1 Log into the system as the Root u

Administration Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents